JP7130318B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-144218 A (paragraph [0042], and FIG. 4)

By the way, the board for controlling the progress of the game cannot be provided with a test pad for electrical inspection as a rule. For this reason, when electronic parts with a narrow lead pitch are mounted on a game control board that controls the progress of a game, there is a problem that it is difficult to conduct an electrical inspection.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing an electrical inspection of a board on which electronic components are mounted .

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above objects, in the present invention,
A gaming machine comprising a control board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The control board is
A wiring portion that connects a plurality of electronic components is formed,
Having the wiring part and having a front substrate surface and a back substrate surface that are visible from the outside ,
a specific board- to-board connection section that avoids obstacles on the front board surface and connects the front board surface and the back board surface in routing wiring that connects electronic components;
and a special board- to-board connection part that connects the front board surface and the back board surface even though there is no obstacle on the front board surface in routing wiring that connects electronic components. ,
The special substrate surface- to-surface connection portion is provided for wiring between surface-mounted electronic components,
It is characterized by
Moreover, the following means are disclosed for reference as inventions different from the present invention.
(Solution 1)
A gaming machine comprising a board on which electronic components are mounted, comprising a control device in which a housing is formed of a conductive member and the board is attached to the housing, wherein the control device is a housing of the control device. A gaming machine, comprising: a ground path portion in which a body is connected to the ground of the substrate; and a non-ground path portion in which the housing of the control device is not connected to the ground of the substrate.

This game machine includes a board on which electronic components are mounted, a housing formed of a conductive member, and a control device to which the board is attached to the housing. The controller has a ground path portion and a non-ground path portion. The ground path portion is a path where the housing of the control device is connected to the ground of the substrate, and the non-ground path portion is a path where the housing of the control device is not connected to the ground of the substrate.

In this way, in a state in which a board on which electronic components are mounted is attached to a control device whose housing is formed of a conductive material, noise that has entered the housing of the control device is transmitted to the board through the non-ground path section. Since it is possible to escape to the ground of the board through the ground path instead of going out to the ground, the noise to the electronic components mounted on the board is reduced by limiting the path through which the noise escapes to the ground path. Impact can be prevented. Therefore, the noise resistance of the substrate can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 82 corresponds to the electronic component, the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 82 corresponds to the board, and the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. , the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 in FIG. 82 correspond to the housing, the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. A route through which noise does not escape corresponds to a non-ground route.

(Solution 2)
In the game machine according to solution 1, the non-ground path portion includes a rib portion of the housing of the control device, a copper foil peeling area formed in an area where the rib portion contacts the substrate, A game machine characterized by comprising: In this way, by forming the copper foil stripped region in the area where the rib portion of the housing of the control device abuts the substrate, noise that has entered the housing of the control device is prevented from passing through the rib portion of the housing of the control device. Penetration into the substrate can be prevented.

In this embodiment, for example, disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 in FIG. 82 correspond to the rib portions, and the foil extraction region 1510ya in FIG. 85 corresponds to the copper foil peeling region.

(Solution 3)
A game machine according to solution 1 or 2, wherein the game machine is a reel-type game machine.

In the game machine of the present invention, since the game machine is a reel-type game machine, the effect of the solution means 1 or 2 can be obtained in the reel-type game machine. As a basic configuration of the reel-type gaming machine, after variably displaying a pattern information string (for example, a plurality of reel strings attached with a plurality of pattern information) consisting of a plurality of pattern information, the display result of the pattern information is stopped and displayed. In addition to having variable display means, the variable display of pattern information is started based on the operation of the operation means for starting (eg, starting lever), and based on the operation of the operation means for stopping (eg, stop button) or the passage of a predetermined time. to stop the variable display of the pattern information. Then, there is provided profit giving state generation means for generating a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and medals are used as game media to generate the profit giving state. It is configured so that a large amount of medals are sometimes paid out.

(Solution 4)
A game machine according to solution 1 or 2, wherein the game machine is a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine are combined.

In the game machine of the present invention, since the game machine is a fusion game machine that combines a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine, in the fusion game machine that combines the pachinko game machine and the reel-type game machine, The effect of solution 1 or 2 is obtained. As a basic configuration of a fusion game machine that combines a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine, a pattern information string consisting of a plurality of pattern information (for example, a plurality of reel strings with a plurality of patterns) is displayed in a variable manner. Later, a variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the pattern information is provided, and the variable display of the pattern information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the starting lever), and the stop operation means (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped. Then, there is provided a profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and a game ball is used as a game medium to generate the profit giving state. It is constructed such that a large number of game balls are put out when it occurs.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the game control board on which electronic components are mounted can be electrically inspected .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnected the door frame in the up-down direction center, and was seen from the top. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnected the door frame lower unit in the left-right direction center, and was seen from the right. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable portion of the door frame effect device is moved to the rising end, and (b) is a state in which the effect operation portion is moved to the rising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view showing. (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the lower front speaker grille, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration are removed in (a). (a) is an enlarged front view of the upper portion of the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the grill decoration frame and the lattice decoration are removed in (a). It is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state in which game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. It is an explanatory view showing a surrounding light area in a door frame. (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation part in the door frame effect device, and (b) is the decoration of the effect operation part by the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration production|presentation by the production|presentation image of a door frame production|presentation display apparatus, and the movable production|presentation of the production operation part. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which a game panel and the like are made opaque; FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 18 as seen from the front right; FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 18 as seen from the front left; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch seen obliquely from the front right side, a perspective view (b) of the setting key switch seen from the front left side obliquely, and a top view of the setting key switch. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box; 1 is a front view of a game board with a game panel and the like made transparent; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstructing nails. 31 is an enlarged front view of the group of circulation passages in the upper right corner of FIG. 30; FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner of FIG. 30; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role different from FIG. is an enlarged view of a main part showing (a) is an enlarged view of a main portion showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role different from that of FIG. 33, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main portion showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role that is still different It is a diagram. FIG. 35 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for center accessories different from FIGS. 33 and 34; It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the back. It is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the first rear effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back 2nd production|presentation unit mainly for every structure, and was seen from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit, which is mainly disassembled for each configuration and viewed from the rear; It is a front view which shows the mechanism of a drive in a back 2nd production|presentation unit. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing movements of a plurality of rotary decorations in the second back effect unit. 48(e)-(g) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of a plurality of rotary decorations in the second back effect unit continued from FIG. 47. FIG. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED in a back 2nd production|presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 3rd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 3rd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back 3rd production|presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back 3rd production|presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the drive mechanism and decoration substrate in the third back effect unit in a state where the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration are moved to the appearing position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which a plurality of rotary decorative bodies in the second back effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while being rotated clockwise from a normal state. It is a front view showing an enlarged lower part of the game board in a state in which the special rotary ornament in the back second effect unit is moved to a specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration body and the lower vertical ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration, the lower vertical ring decoration, the left horizontal ring decoration, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit moved to the appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing an example of an effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the upper back third effect unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during a light emission effect in the back unit; It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state in which the game board is facing from the door window of the door frame. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2(a) is an enlarged view of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram (a) of a surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which SMD type electronic components as substitutes for lead type electronic components are aggregated in a predetermined area, and SMD type electronic components as substitutes for lead type electronic components are aggregated. 1B is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of a substrate that has been miniaturized. FIG. 66 is a view showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of FIG. 65; 4 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit; FIG. Fig. (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and Fig. (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board viewed through the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, It is a schematic diagram (c) of a cross section taken along line WW in (a). FIG. (a) shows the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the method of connecting the metal frame plate of the setting key switch to the ground (GND). GND) is a view showing the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the method of connecting to the ground (GND). FIG. (c) showing the front surface (mounting surface), and FIG. be. It is a diagram showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board in a state where the main control board box is attached to the game board. Modification 1(a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board. It is the modification 2 (b) which shows a lower part of a left side view. It is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the body frame. Figs. (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridges of terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, showing a small DIP-type connector electrically connected to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. 4D to 4F are diagrams for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of . FIG. 74( a ) shows a modification of FIG. 74( c ), and FIG. 74( b ) shows a modification of FIG. 74( f ). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification in which the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed apart from each other by a predetermined distance; FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram (a) of an over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. FIG. 78 is a continuation of FIG. 78 and is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line YY. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modification, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 80 is a continuation of FIG. 80 and is an enlarged view of the B part of FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line ZZ. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the shape of a solid ground at a portion where the front surface of a disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, showing the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; 1A is a schematic view of the surface, and FIG. 1B is a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 87; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 93. FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of power-on of the payout control unit subsequent to FIG. 94 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a first starting opening passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big-hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a big win determination table used for lottery processing for big wins, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a second reception port opening/closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a main-control side power-on process. It is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine during the setting change of the setting value. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine during confirmation display of the setting value. 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of set values. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraud during setting change of setting values; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraud during confirmation display of setting values; FIG. It is a time chart showing command transmission timing when the pachinko machine is powered on. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a main-control side power-on process. It is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the case where an alert notification is extended and performed after completion|finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart showing a case where the initial action of the production member is performed after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing a modified example of a fraudulent activity monitoring state during setting change or setting value confirmation display; FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
An overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1, which is an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame and an outer frame.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by. In addition, what is comprised from the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is called a front frame.

As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left portion 10 and an outer frame right portion 20 which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20 to each other. The upper part 30, the outer frame lower part 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20, the outer frame upper hinge part 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the outer frame upper part 30, the outer An outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left frame portion 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame portion 40 is provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame 4 are connected by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. The lower hinge part 320 is coaxially rotatably supported, and the body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

The door frame 3 includes a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, and an upper plate 130 that stores the game ball B to be hit into the game area 5a. and a lower tray 140, and a handle 111 operated by the player to hit the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 by means of a main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed.

The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The main body frame 4 includes a game board mounting portion 301 that detachably holds the game board 5 from the front, a main body frame upper hinge portion 310 provided at the upper end on the left side when viewed from the front, and a main body provided at the lower end on the left side. A frame lower hinge portion 320, a ball launching device 330 provided on the right side below the game board mounting portion 301 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an upper plate 130 and a lower plate. A payout device 350 for putting out game balls B to 140 and a locking unit 360 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 has a main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 320 attached to the outer frame 2 by an outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 so as to be openable and closable. A door frame 3 is attached to a main body frame 4 via an upper frame hinge portion and a lower door frame hinge portion so as to be openable and closable.

The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board mounting portion 301 of the body frame 4 . Although illustration is omitted, the game board 5 includes a general prize winning opening and a first start opening for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. , a gate section, a second starting opening, a big winning opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has a left outer frame portion 10 and a right outer frame portion 20 that are separated from each other in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the left outer frame portion 10 and the right outer frame portion 20 are connected to each other. outer frame upper part 30, outer frame lower part 40 connecting the lower ends of outer frame left part 10 and outer frame right part 20, and outer frame upper hinge attached to the left end of the upper surface of outer frame upper part 30 and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left portion 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower portion 40 .

The outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 can coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[3. door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut at the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 has a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, and a top for storing the game ball B to be hit into the game area 5a. A plate 130 and a handle 111 operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a are provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and has various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the various decorative portions, those decoratively plated on the entire surface of the front and back surfaces are connected to the metal door frame in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 described later via wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the reinforcement unit (some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown, and the conductive member is directly made of metal). (Some are attached and electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit of the door frame). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground.

Of the various decorative parts, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and is transferred to the door frame metal ground (described later). It is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the wire, then transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side.

The door frame 3 is composed of a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit (not shown) extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a portion extending from the lower end to a height of about 1/4 of the total height, which is located in front of the door frame base unit. A door frame lower unit 100 provided, a door frame upper unit 200 provided on the upper side of the door frame lower unit 100 and in front of the door frame base unit, a main body frame upper hinge portion 310 of the main body frame 4, and A door frame upper hinge portion and a door frame lower hinge portion (not shown) rotatably and detachably supported by the body frame lower hinge portion 320 are provided.

The door frame base unit includes a door frame base (not shown) having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a game window 201 penetrating in the front and rear, and a door frame base on the rear side of the door frame base. A door frame main relay board (not shown) attached near the right end in rear view at the bottom, a door frame secondary relay board (not shown) attached to the left of the door frame main relay board in rear view, and a door frame secondary relay board (not shown). A rear handle relay board (not shown) mounted on the left side of the rear view, a door frame relay board cover (not shown) covering a portion of the door frame main relay board and a part of the door frame sub relay board from the rear side, and a rear handle relay board (not shown) It has a handle rear relay board cover (not shown) covering the board from the rear side, and a cable cover (not shown) covering a wiring cable (not shown).

The door frame base unit includes a metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base, and a metal door frame top (not shown) attached to the door frame reinforcing unit. It comprises a hinge assembly and a door frame lower hinge member, and a metal cylinder lock 127 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit.

The door frame reinforcing unit is attached to the rear side of the door frame base to reinforce the door frame base and impart rigidity to the door frame base. The door frame upper hinge assembly and the door frame lower hinge member are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 127 cooperates with the locking unit 360 of the body frame 4 and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

In addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to impart rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground. properly connected. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a handle 111 that can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, a bulging portion 120 bulging forward, and a bulging portion 120. An upper plate 130 provided on the upper surface of the game area 5a for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a lower plate 140 provided below the upper plate 130 for storing game balls B, A door frame effect device 150 is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion for presenting a predetermined effect to the player, and a door frame effect device 150 is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and the game ball B in the upper tray 130 is placed on the lower tray. An upper tray ball release button 124 to release to, a ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and a door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 A display portion 185 and a lower front speaker 191 provided on the front surface of the bulging portion 120 are provided.

A door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 includes a game window 201 having an inverted U shape on the inner circumference, which allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 to be visually recognized from the front, and a transparent closing glass closing the game window 201. 205, a door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 provided along the inner circumference of the game window 201, a door frame upper exterior decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210, and a door frame. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covering upper inner decoration unit 210 and door frame upper outer decoration unit 220; ing.

The door frame 3 also has a ball feeding unit (not shown) for feeding the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 to the ball launching device 330 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The ball feeding unit has a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 18) controlled by the firing control section 372 of the payout control board 633 .

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13 and the like. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 12(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable portion of the door frame effect device is moved to the rising end, and (b) is a state in which the effect operation portion is moved to the rising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view which shows a state. 13A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and FIG. 13B is an enlarged front view of FIG. 13A with the lower front speaker grill, grill decoration frame, and lattice decoration removed. .

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is arranged below the game window 201 closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided at the lower right corner in front view, and has a handle unit 110 that can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, and a handle unit 110 above and to the left of the handle unit 110. and a bulging portion 120 bulging forward with respect to the surface closing the front surface of the body frame 4 .

In addition, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device placement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, an upper plate 130 for storing the game balls B, and a horizontal direction center below the upper plate 130. A lower plate 140 provided on the left side for storing game balls B, and a door frame effect device provided in a device placement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and capable of presenting a predetermined effect to the player. 150 , a door frame sub-display portion 185 provided in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided in front of the bulging portion 120 .

[3-1a. handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the door frame lower unit 100 includes a handle 111 that can be grasped and rotated by the player, a handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and a handle 111 rotatably supported. and a handle base 113 that The handle unit 110 is provided in a handle base 113, and includes a handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 18) that detects the rotation angle of the handle 111, and a sensor that detects that the player is touching the handle 111. It has a handle touch sensor 115 for detection, a handle return spring (not shown) that biases the handle 111 counterclockwise, and a single button 116 that can be pressed by the player.

The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves rightward as it goes forward. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 111 of the handle unit 110 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort. Further, the handle unit 110 is configured so that the handle base 113 can extend and contract in the direction in which the rotating shaft of the handle 111 extends, and can be held at a desired extended and contracted position. As a result, the position of the handle 111 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, so that the handle 111 can be operated at a position that is easy for the player to operate.

The handle 111 is supported by the handle base 113 so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angular range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (here, four) protrusions spaced apart in the circumferential direction and projecting from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 is translucent, and can be decorated with light of various colors by a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged on the rear side.

A steering wheel rotation detection sensor 114 of the steering wheel unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the steering wheel 111 . According to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 that changes due to the rotating operation of the handle 111, the driving force of a shooting solenoid 331 in the ball shooting device 330, which will be described later, changes, and a game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 and the like. When the player touches the handle 111 or the like, the static capacitance of the handle 111 or the like changes. detect. In this embodiment, when the handle 111 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 115 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is received, and the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 111 is received. , the driving of the firing solenoid 331 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 111 in some way without touching the handle 111, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 331 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 111 in a manner different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

When the single-shot button 116 of the handle unit 110 is pressed while the player is rotating the handle 111 , the firing solenoid 331 is stopped by the firing control section 372 of the payout control board 633 . As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 111.例文帳に追加By canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 116, the game ball B can be hit again into the game area 5a with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 116 is operated.

[3-1b. Bulging part]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 is formed in a T shape with a short vertically extending axis when viewed from the front, and has a rear end side extending in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 when viewed from above. It is formed in an isosceles trapezoidal shape such that the length of the entire width becomes narrower toward the front (see FIG. 10, etc.). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward with a length slightly longer than half of the full width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to be positioned downward toward the front.

The bulging portion 120 bulges forward over the entire height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3 at the central portion obtained by dividing the entire width of the door frame 3 into three equal parts in the left-right direction. ) bulges forward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height from the bottom end of the door frame 3 to the top surface. As a result, the shape of the bulging portion 120 when viewed from the front is T-shaped. The bulging portion 120 has a square speaker mounting opening 120a which is open at the lower part of the center of the front surface. A lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to the speaker attachment opening 120a.

In addition, the bulging portion 120 has a vertically extending sound emission slit 120b and a heat dissipation slit on both left and right side surfaces of the vertically extending portion (the portion where the speaker mounting opening 120a is opened) in the front view T shape. 120c are provided. The sound emitting slit 120b is for emitting sound from a lower front speaker 191, which will be described later, to the outside. Also, the heat radiation slit 120c is for releasing heat from the first elevation drive motor 175b, the second elevation drive motor 182, the lower front speaker 191, etc. in the door frame effect device 150, which will be described later, to the outside.

The bulging portion 120 includes a bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 provided on the upper edge of the front surface, a bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 provided on the lower edge of the front surface, and a rear end on the upper surface at the center in the left-right direction. A device placement portion 123 provided so as to protrude forward from the side, an upper tray ball ejection button 124 provided on the upper surface for releasing the game ball B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray 140, and an upper tray ball. A ball lending button 125 and a returning button 126 provided behind the withdrawal button 124 are provided.

The bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the bulging lower decorative portion 122 are milky white with translucency and are formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The bulging upper decorative portion 121 extends along the upper edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120 and is provided to decorate the front upper edge of the upper plate 130 to be described. The swelling upper decorative portion 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 121a are arranged in a row in the extending direction of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 . These plurality of LEDs 121a are full-color LEDs.

In the bulging upper decorative portion 121, the distance between the two rear ends separated in the left-right direction is within the upper part separated in the left-right direction in the door-frame upper inner decoration unit 210 of the door-frame upper unit 200, which will be described later. It matches the interval between the lower ends of the decorative portion 212 . The bulge upper decoration part 121 is formed to match the upper inner decoration part 212 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration together with the upper inner decoration part 212. there is The bulging upper decorative portion 121, together with the upper internal decorative portion 212, constitutes a first surrounding light area LA1 for decorating the area around the game window 201 with light emission.

Further, the bulging upper decorative portion 121 decorates the upper side of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 and raises the front side wall (the front peripheral wall 134 ) of the upper plate 130 . The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is configured such that part of the light from the LED 121a is irradiated into the upper plate 130 (inside the storage area 131), and the game stored in the storage area 131 is provided. The sphere B can be illuminated with light to be decorated with light.

The bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120 . The bulge lower decorative portion 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 122a are arranged in a row in the direction in which the lower decorative portion 122 extends. These plurality of LEDs 122a are full-color LEDs.

The device placement portion 123 is formed in a shape that is a combination of a rectangle elongated in the left and right direction and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle when viewed from above. The device placement portion 123 has a width in the left-right direction on the rear end side that is approximately half the full width of the door frame 3 . The device placement portion 123 is open at the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and is formed in a container shape extending into the bulging portion 120 from above.

The upper tray ball ejection button 124 is provided at the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper tray 130 . By pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 124 downward, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be released from the outlet 136 to the lower tray 140 . This upper tray ball ejection button 124 releases the game ball B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray 140 only while it is pressed, and when the pressure is released, it moves upward and returns to the original state, Discharge to lower tray 140 is stopped.

The upper tray ball ejection button 124 is formed in a square outer shape. The upper tray ball ejection button 124 has a light-emitting decorative portion 124a that emits light from an LED arranged below. The light-emitting decorative portion 124a is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the top tray ball eject button 124. As shown in FIG. By causing the light-emitting decorative portion 124a to emit light, the upper tray ball release button 124 can be decorated with light-emitting.

The ball lending button 125 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 behind the upper tray ball ejecting button 124 . The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is arranged to the right of the ball lending button 125 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 . The return button 126 has an equilateral triangular outer shape.

The ball lending button 125 is pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and a predetermined number of game balls B are raised. The game ball B is supplied to the tray 130 and rented out to the player. When the return button 126 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine is returned after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display section 185 .

[3-1c. Fine plate]
The upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and has a storage area 131 in which game balls B are stored. The storage region 131 is connected to a front region 131a (a portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 15) on the front side of the device placement portion 123 and side regions 131b on both the left and right sides of the device placement portion 123. (A portion surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 15).

The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower from the rear end toward the front region 131a. The right side region 131b extends from the side of the front region 131a at the front end partway so that the width in the left-right direction increases toward the rear, and then extends in the front-rear direction so that the width narrows toward the rear end. extended. The upper plate 130 (storage area 131 ) is formed so as to surround the front side and the left and right outer sides of the device placement portion 123 .

The upper plate 130 has a bottom wall 132 forming a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 rising upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall rising upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132. 134, a supply port 135 that opens forward at the rear end of the left side region 131b, a delivery port 136 that opens forward at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and a delivery port 136. and an aligning part 137 which is provided in the vicinity of and aligns the game balls B toward the delivery port 136. - 特許庁

A bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130 is inclined downward from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136 . The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 rise substantially vertically. Surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are mirror-finished. The top plate 130 forms a storage area 131 with a bottom wall 132 , a rear peripheral wall 133 and a front peripheral wall 134 . The depth of the upper plate 130 (the height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest portion (near the supply port 135).

The supply port 135 is for supplying the game balls B paid out from the payout device 350 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131 . The delivery port 136 is for delivering the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launching device 330 and the lower tray 140 . The alignment part 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 is lowered toward the delivery port 136 near the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device arrangement part 123, which is a combination of the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in plan view. ing.

In addition, the upper plate 130 is provided with a storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138a capable of irradiating light into the storage area 131. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133, and are positioned above the bottom wall 132 by half of the outer diameter of the game ball B and substantially parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133. is provided. These LEDs 138a are full color LEDs. By causing the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 to emit light, the inside of the storage area 131 and the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 can be decorated with light emission.

The upper plate 130 is provided with a bulge upper decorative portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134. The bulge upper decorative portion 121 raises the front end side of the storage area 131 to allow more storage space. Game balls B can be stored. Further, the upper plate 130 is configured such that part of the light from the LED 121a of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 is irradiated into the storage area 131, and the light from the bulging upper decorative portion 121 also emits light. A game ball B in the storage area 131 is decorated with light emission.

The upper plate 130 has a front region 131a on the front side of the device placement portion 123 where the door frame effect device 150 is placed, and side regions 131b on both left and right sides. Since the game balls B can be stored on the front side, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, in the upper plate 130, the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions extending back and forth, so that the game balls B stored in the side regions 131b are also stored in addition to the front region 131a. , can be made easier to see from the player's side.

Therefore, since the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen, it is possible to arouse the player's awareness of the amount of the game balls B stored. is consumed and the amount of storage decreases, the player can easily recognize the decrease in the amount of storage, and the game balls B can be replenished in the upper tray 130, so that the player does not notice. The game balls B are prevented from disappearing from the upper tray 130, the sudden interruption of the game can be prevented, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game is prevented, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the upper tray 130, the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so that the player's line of sight is directed downward from the game area 5a. Only by dropping the ball onto the device 150, it can be immediately recognized whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and the player does not need to carefully confirm whether or not there is a game ball B in the upper tray 130. - 特許庁, the player can be easily devoted to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 are delivered out of the storage area 131 from the delivery port 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the plate 130 is consumed, the game ball B flows in front of the player's eyes (front area 131a), making it easy for the player to recognize the consumption speed and consumption amount of the game ball B. It is possible to make it easier to achieve the effects described above.

Further, the upper plate 130 is provided with a storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131, and the light from the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 (LED 138a) is reflected upward by the game ball B. The game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be glittered and decorated with the light emitted from the light emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the game balls B. Thus, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, and the amount of the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effects as described above. can.

In addition, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 are mirror-finished, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are Since it is reflected on the peripheral wall of 130, the player can have the illusion that the game balls B are stored beyond the peripheral wall, and it appears that many game balls B are stored on the upper tray 130.例文帳に追加be able to.

Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, since the alignment part 137 is provided near the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the vicinity of the delivery port 136. The game balls B stored in the tray 130 can be smoothly delivered from the delivery port 136 to the ball launching device 330 and the lower tray 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, interruption of the game due to clogging of the game balls B can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 arranged in the right side region 131b is visible from the front, so that the game ball B is ejected from the delivery port 136, which could not be seen in the past pachinko machines. It is possible to see how the game is sent out, which surprises the player and strongly attracts the player's interest, thus providing the same effects as those described above.

[3-1d. lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 and to the left of the central portion of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and is formed in a shallow plate shape that opens upward. A space is provided between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left portion of the bulging portion 120) to allow the player's hand to be inserted. The front surface of the lower plate 140 is formed in substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in plan view.

The lower tray 140 is formed at the lowest portion of the bottom wall, and has an openable and closable lower tray ball extraction hole 141 (see FIG. 9). A lower tray ball ejection button 142 for ejecting game balls B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 18) for detecting that the lower tray 140 is full of game balls B are provided. is doing.

The game ball B in the upper tray 130 is supplied to the lower tray 140 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 124 . The lower tray 140 is supplied with the game balls B paid out from the payout device 350 in a state where the upper tray 130 is filled with the game balls B. As shown in FIG. When the lower tray 140 is filled with game balls B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects that the lower tray 140 is full. is temporarily suspended. After that, when the lower tray 140 is no longer full (the full-tank detection sensor 143 becomes non-detected), the temporary suspension of dispensing is released.

The lower tray ball release button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower tray 140 and has a rectangular outer shape. When the lower tray ball removal button 142 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 141 is opened and the lower tray ball removal button 142 is held in a pressed state. When the lower tray ball removal button 142 is pushed further rearward in this state, the lower tray ball removal hole 141 is closed and the lower tray ball removal button 142 moves forward to return to the original state.

The lower tray ball ejection button 142 has a light-emitting decorative portion 142a that emits light from an LED (not shown). The light-emitting decorative portion 142a is arranged so as to surround both the left and right sides and the upper side of the lower tray ball release button 142. As shown in FIG. By causing the light-emitting decorative portion 142a to emit light, the lower tray ball release button 142 can be light-emitting and decorated. For example, during a "jackpot" game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out, the player's attention can be drawn to the lower tray 140 by decorating the lower tray ball ejection button 142 with the light emitting decoration part 142a. By operating the lower tray ball eject button 142, the game balls B in the lower tray 140 can be ejected into a dollar box or the like below, and the lower tray 140 becomes full and the payout of the game balls B is temporarily stopped. can be avoided.

[3-1e. Overall configuration of the door frame production device]
The door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement portion 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 . The door frame effect device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device placement portion 123 that opens upward, a door frame effect display device 152 that is provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151, a lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152; One movable part 155 is provided to be able to move up and down, and the player can press and operate the production operation part 160, the first lifting mechanism 170 that raises and lowers the first movable part 155, and the second elevation that raises and lowers the production operation part 160. a mechanism 180;

[3-1e-1. Equipment cover]
The device cover 151 has the same planar shape as the device placement portion 123, and is formed in a shape that combines a horizontally long rectangle and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle. The device cover 151 has an opening 151a that is wide open in an isosceles trapezoidal shape, and a square portion that is bent and inclined such that the rear end side is upward in the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. It has a surface portion 151b and a plurality of grille holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape near the front end of the square portion. The entire device cover 151 is inclined so that the front end side is lowered. A first movable portion 155 is inserted through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 .

The device cover 151 has the upper end of the inclined surface portion 151 b aligned with the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200 . Further, the device cover 151 is inclined such that the front side thereof is lower than the inclined surface portion 151b. Thereby, even if the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can roll forward and be released into the upper tray 130. - 特許庁

[3-1e-2. Door frame effect display device]
The door frame effect display device 152 has a display screen for displaying a effect image formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction, and the length in the left and right direction is slightly shorter than 1/2 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower side is located forward with respect to the upper side. That is, the door frame effect display device 152 is directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 . The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side positioned near the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100 and a lower side positioned below the bottom surface of the front area 131 a of the upper tray 130 . The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side located near the rear end of the lower door frame unit 100 (device cover 151) and a lower side located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device with a screen ratio of 16:9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 includes a pair of lower speakers 153a spaced apart to the left and right, a lower speaker base 153b to which the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and a lower speaker base 153b attached to the lower speaker 153a. and a lower speaker decoration portion 153c that decorates the outer periphery and between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output high-pitched sounds.

The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear edge is positioned upward with respect to the front edge, and a rear surface that extends downward from the rear edge of the front surface perpendicularly to the front surface. It is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the left and right and is long. In addition, the lower speaker base 153b has circular mounting holes formed in the front surface thereof so as to be spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined at a smaller angle from the horizontal than the angle of inclination from the horizontal of the door frame effect display device 152 (see FIG. 11, etc.).

The lower speaker decorative portion 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and includes an annular portion arranged on the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of portions arranged between the pair of lower speakers 153a. It is composed of an arc-shaped part. The lower speaker decoration portion 153c has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by causing an LED (not shown) mounted on the lower speaker decoration substrate to emit light.

The lower speaker unit 153 is mounted inside the lower speaker base 153b so that the pair of lower speakers 153a face forward from the mounting holes of the lower speaker base 153b. As a result, the pair of lower speakers 153a are directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The lower speaker unit 153 has an upper end located at a height slightly lower than the center of the door frame effect display device 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower end located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. there is

The front end of the lower speaker unit 153 is located forward from the rear end of the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 (slightly rearward from the effect operation section 160 ), and the rear end of the lower speaker unit 153 is located at the front end of the inclined surface portion 151 b of the device cover 151 . located nearby. The lower speaker unit 153 is visible through the transparent device cover 151 . Also, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be radiated to the outside (outside the pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156.

In addition, the lower speaker unit 153 is configured such that the lower speaker decoration part 153c is decorated with light emission by the LED of the lower speaker decoration board (not shown), so that the lower speaker 153a and the speaker grill of the lower speaker 153a (the device cover 151 and the first movable part main body) 156 (upper wall of 156)), and the player can see the luminous decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines.

[3-1e-4. First moving part]
The first movable part 155 includes a container-like transparent first movable part main body 156 whose rear and lower sides are open, a first movable part base 157 attached to the lower side of the first movable part main body 156, a A first movable part cover 158 attached to the upper surface of one movable part main body 156, and a first movable part decorative substrate 159 attached to the inside of the side surface of the first movable part main body 156 (Fig. 11 and FIG. 12). The first movable portion 155 is arranged in the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 . The first movable portion 155 is supported by the first elevating mechanism 170 so as to be movable up and down, and is raised and lowered by the first elevating mechanism 170 .

The shape of the first movable portion main body 156 in plan view is similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, and is shaped like a combination of a rectangle elongated in the left and right direction and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle. formed into a shape. The first movable portion main body 156 has an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid, and side walls extending downward from the sides of the upper wall except for the rear side, and the rear and lower sides are open. It is formed in a container shape. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable portion main body 156 is inclined so that the front side is lower and curved so that the center in the left-right direction is higher.

The first movable portion main body 156 has an opening 156a that penetrates in a rectangular shape that is elongated in the left and right direction near the front end of the upper wall, and a plurality of hexagonal grills that penetrate through the upper wall except for the opening 156a. It has a hole 156b and a plurality of rectangular through-holes 156c that are arranged in a line in the circumferential direction in the side wall. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156c is formed in a size that allows the LED 159a mounted on the first movable part decoration board 159 to face outward.

The first movable portion base 157 is formed in a flat plate shape elongated in the left and right direction. The first movable portion base 157 has a width in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction of the opening 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156 . The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 so that the front end thereof is positioned substantially at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the opening 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156 . The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 in a horizontal state. A pair of elevating sliders 172 of the first elevating mechanism 170 are attached to the lower surface of the first movable part base 157 , and a second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part base 157 .

The first movable part cover 158 has the same outer shape and size as the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156 . The first movable part cover 158 has a horizontally long rectangular opening frame part 158a corresponding to the opening part 156a of the first movable part main body 156, and a plurality of louver parts 158b extending left and right and separated in the front-rear direction. ,have. The first movable part cover 158 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158 a of the first movable portion cover 158 protrudes downward from the lower end of the louver portion 158 b and is inserted into the opening portion 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156 . A rendering operation unit 160 is inserted in the frame of the opening frame portion 158a.

The louver portion 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 extends with a constant width except for both ends in the left-right direction, and is formed in a triangular shape such that both ends in the left-right direction spread obliquely forward. . A plurality of (here, five) louver portions 158b are provided at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored between the louver portions 158b. Incidentally, one game ball B is placed between the first louver portions 158b from the front, two game balls B are placed between the second louver portions 158b, and the third louver portions 158b are placed between the third louver portions 158b. Three game balls B can be respectively stored between them (see FIG. 15).

A plurality of LEDs 159 a are mounted on the front surface of the first movable part decoration board 159 . The plurality of LEDs 159 a are arranged at positions corresponding to the through holes 156 c of the first movable portion body 156 . The first movable part decoration board 159 is attached to the inner side of the side wall of the first movable part main body 156, so that the plurality of mounted LEDs 159a face outward from the through holes 156c of the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 is a full-color LED.

When the LED 159a is lit with the first movable portion 155 lowered (normal state), the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 is arranged such that the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 are aligned. Through the gap, the upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be decorated with light. In addition, when the LED 159a is caused to emit light while the first movable portion 155 is raised, the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 can decorate the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 with light emission, and the inside of the storage area 131 and Light can be emitted forward (toward the player).

[3-1e-5. Production operation section]
The effect operation unit 160 is provided so as to be able to move up and down with respect to the first movable unit 155, and is a so-called push button that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 160 is supported so as to be vertically movable by the second lifting mechanism 180, and is lifted and lowered by the second lifting mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

The effect operation unit 160 includes a translucent pressing operation unit 161 having the characters “PUSH” formed on the upper surface, and an operation having a plurality of LEDs mounted below the pressing operation unit 161. An operating portion movable base 163 on which a pressing operation portion 161 and an operating portion decorative substrate 162 are attached on the upper surface thereof, and a second elevating mechanism 180 which supports the operating portion movable base 163 so as to be able to move up and down. An operation portion base 164 attached to the first movable portion 155 via (the second elevating base 181), an operation portion spring that biases the operation portion movable base 163 upward, and a biasing force of the operation portion spring. and a press detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 18) that detects the press operation portion 161 that has moved downward against the pressure.

The pressing operation part 161 has a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction, and the character "PUSH" is formed in relief on the upper surface thereof. The pressing operation portion 161 has an outer peripheral shape that is slightly smaller than the inside of the opening frame portion 158 a of the first movable portion cover 158 .

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation section decoration board 162 are full-color LEDs. On the upper surface of the operation section decoration board 162, a first LED that emits light upward and a second LED that emits light outward along the upper surface of the operation section decoration board 162 are mounted. The operating section decoration board 162 can light-embellish the pressing operating section 161 (characters of "PUSH") by causing the first LED to emit light. In addition, by illuminating the second LED, the peripheral wall of the operating section movable base 163 can be decorated with light. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The operation unit movable base 163 is formed in a box shape elongated in the left and right direction with an open bottom. The operation portion movable base 163 is formed slightly smaller than the outer circumference of the pressing operation portion 161 . A pressing operation portion 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation portion movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation portion decoration substrate 162 . The operating portion movable base 163 is inserted into the operating portion base 164 from below.

The operation unit base 164 has a box-shaped portion that is large enough to be inserted into the inside of the operation unit movable base 163 and has an open top that is long in the left and right direction. and a flange-like portion protruding outward. The operating section base 164 supports the operating section movable base 163 so that it can move up and down within a predetermined range. A second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operating portion base 164 .

The operation spring has its upper end in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operation portion movable base 163 and its lower end in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation portion base 164 . The pressing detection sensor 165 is attached inside the operation portion base 164 and detects a detection piece (not shown) of the operation portion movable base 163 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 161 via the operation portion movable base 163 . detect.

[3-1e-6. First lifting mechanism]
The first elevating mechanism 170 is attached inside the bulging portion 120 as shown in FIG. 11 and serves to elevate the first movable portion 155 . The first elevating mechanism 170 includes a pair of elevating rails 171 that are attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 and are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically, and a pair of elevating rails 171 that are guided in the vertical direction by the pair of elevating rails 171 . A slider 172, a connecting portion 173 that connects the pair of lifting sliders 172, and a pole whose one end is rotatably attached to the lifting slider 172 and whose other end is rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120. A pair of elevating arms 174 shaped like a pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating drive mechanism 175 that rotates the pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating detection sensor 176 that detects the elevating position of the elevating slider 172 (first movable part 155), It has

The pair of elevating rails 171 are left and right separated by an interval longer than the length of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) in the left-right direction. A pair of elevating rails 171 are attached inside the bulging portion 120 so as to extend vertically. The pair of elevating sliders 172 have upper ends attached to the lower surface of the first movable portion base 157 of the first movable portion 155 and lower ends attached to the connecting portion 173 .

The pair of elevating arms 174 are attached to the corresponding elevating sliders 172 at their front end sides so as to be rotatable around axes extending in the left-right direction and slidable in the longitudinal direction of the elevating arms 174 . . The pair of lifting arms 174 are attached at their rear end sides to the bulging portion 120 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction. Each of the pair of elevating arms 174 has a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end than the center in the longitudinal direction.

The first lifting drive mechanism 175 is provided for each pair of lifting arms 174 . That is, a pair of the first lifting drive mechanisms 175 are provided. The first elevating mechanism 170 rotates the pair of elevating arms 174 in a direction in which the front end sides of the pair of elevating arms 174 move upward by the first elevating drive mechanism 175, respectively, thereby moving the tips of the pair of elevating arms 174 upward. The first movable portion 155 (the effect operation portion 160) can be moved up and down via a pair of lifting sliders 172 to which are attached respectively.

More specifically, the first elevation drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the elevation arm 174 and revolves around an axis extending in the left-right direction. It has a pin 175a and a first lifting drive motor 175b that revolves the first lifting pin 175a. More specifically, the first elevation drive mechanism 175 includes a flat drive base 175c that is attached inside the bulging portion 120 and extends in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, and a drive base 175c that extends in the left-right direction on the drive base 175c. A lifting gear 175d having a spur gear shape and having a first lifting pin 175a attached to a position eccentric to the rotation axis, which is mounted rotatably about an axis, engages with the lifting gear 175d to provide a first lifting pin 175a. and a driving gear 175e attached to the rotation shaft of the lifting drive motor 175b.

In this embodiment, two first elevation drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and the drive gears 175e attached to the rotating shafts of the respective first elevation drive motors 175b are attached to the elevation gears 175d. They mesh with each other. That is, one lifting gear 175d is rotated by two first lifting drive motors 175b.

The first elevation drive mechanism 175 rotates the drive gears 175e attached to the rotary shafts of the two first elevation drive motors 175b in the same direction. 175d rotates, the first lifting pin 175a revolves around the axis of the lifting gear 175d. By revolving the first lifting pin 175a, the first lifting pin 175a slides in the slit 174a of the lifting arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, and the lifting arm 174 moves toward the rear end side. is rotated (rotated) around the center. As a result, the front end of the lift arm 174 moves vertically, so that the first movable portion 155 can be lifted or lowered via the lift slider 172 to which the front end of the lift arm 174 is attached.

The first elevation detection sensor 176 enters a detection state when the pair of elevation sliders 172 is positioned at the downward movement end (lowering end). That is, the first elevation detection sensor 176 detects via the elevation slider 172 that the first movable portion 155 is positioned at the lower end.

[3-1e-7. Second lifting mechanism]
The second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part base 157 in the first movable part 155, and supports the operation part base 164 of the effect operation part 160 so that it can be raised and lowered. A second lifting drive motor 182 attached to a second lifting base 181, and a second lifting pin 183 attached to the rotation shaft of the second lifting drive motor 182 and revolving at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft. , an elevation transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction into which a second elevation pin 183 is slidably inserted and whose upper part is attached to an operation unit base 164; and a second up/down detection sensor 180a that detects the up/down of the.

The second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 moves the operating portion base 164 in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operating portion 161 (in a direction in which an inclined axis extends forward as it goes upward). ) so that it can move up and down.

In the second lifting mechanism 180, when the second lifting drive motor 182 causes the second lifting pin 183 to revolve, the second lifting pin 183 slides in the slit 184a of the lifting transmission piece 184 and moves up and down on the inner surface of the slit 184a. direction, and the elevation transmission piece 184 moves in the vertical direction. Since the operation portion base 164 of the effect operation portion 160 is attached to the elevation transmission piece 184 , the effect operation portion 160 can be moved up and down via the elevation transmission piece 184 .

In the second lifting mechanism 180, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned near the rear end of the slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction when the lifting transmission piece 184 (the effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the lower end. there is That is, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned at the bottom dead center. When raising the elevation transmission piece 184 from this state, the second elevation drive motor 182 causes the second elevation pin 183 to revolve so as to have a forward movement vector. As a result, the second lifting pin 183 slides forward in the slit 184a, and the second lifting pin 183 pushes the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, so that the lifting transmission piece 184 moves upward. Become.

As the second lifting pin 183 revolves further, when the line connecting the center of the second lifting pin 183 and the center of revolution passes the central axis of the slit 184a, the second lifting pin 183 moves upward along the inner surface of the slit 184a. While being pressed downward, it slides rearward in the slit 184a. Then, when the second lifting pin 183 reaches the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184a, the driving of the second lifting drive motor 182 stops, and the revolution of the second lifting pin 183 stops. In this state, the second lift pin 183 is positioned at the top dead center, and the lift transmission piece 184 is positioned at the upper end.

In a state where the elevation transmission piece 184 (the effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the rising end, when a force is applied to move the elevation transmission piece 184 downward by pressing the effect operation unit 160 or the like, Since the second lifting pin 183 is positioned at the top dead center, no force acts on the second lifting pin 183 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the second lifting pin 183 does not revolve, the lifting transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

Further, when the effect operation unit 160 is pressed while the elevation transmission piece 184 is positioned at the rising end, the effect operation unit 160 is operated by the player positioned in front of the effect operation unit 160. , a backward motion vector acts in addition to the downward motion vector. On the other hand, in the state of the rising end, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned at the rear end of the slit 184a. The second lifting pin 183 comes into contact with the rear end of the slit 184a, preventing the second lifting pin 183 from revolving, preventing the lifting transmission piece 184 from moving downward, and moving the effect operation unit 160 to the upper end position. can be maintained.

The second lift detection sensor 180a enters the detection state when the second lift base 181 is positioned at the downward movement end (lower end). In other words, the second elevation detection sensor 180a detects, via the second elevation base 181, that the effect operating section 160 is positioned at the lower end.

[3-1f. Door frame sub-display]
The door frame sub-display unit 185 is arranged on the right side of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150 and behind the top tray ball removal button 124 , the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 . The door frame sub-display section 185 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side. The door frame sub-display portion 185 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower end side is located forward with respect to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub-display portion 185 is arranged at the same height as the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 from which the upper tray ball ejection button 124, the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 protrude.

The door frame sub-display unit 185 includes a frame-shaped sub-display unit decoration frame 186 that illuminates the outer periphery of the three square 7-segment LEDs, and the door frame effect device 150 that covers the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display unit decoration frame 186. and a transparent sub-display unit cover 187 inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151 in .

[3-1g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 includes a lower front speaker 191 attached behind the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of grille holes extending through the speaker mounting opening 120a. a lower front speaker grill 192 that closes the lower front speaker grill 192, a horizontal grid-like grill decorative frame 193 that is placed in front of the lower front speaker grill 192 and attached to the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and each grid in the grill decorative frame 193 A rod-shaped lattice decoration part 194 arranged on the rear side of each part, and lattice decoration LEDs 195 provided at both ends of each lattice decoration part 194 and decorating the lattice decoration part 194 with light emission are provided.

The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs low frequency sound. A lower front speaker grill 192 is mounted inside the bulge 120 . The lower front speaker grill 192 is punching metal.

The grill decoration frame 193 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The grill decoration frame 193 is a square frame along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart frames that connect two vertically extending sides of the frame. and a lattice portion of The lattice portion extending left and right of the grille decorative frame 193 has a portion (general portion) extending with a constant width except for both ends in the left and right direction, and both ends in the left and right direction are slanted downward toward the ends. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape that expands to a certain width after being widened.

The lattice decoration part 194 is translucent and formed in a columnar shape elongated in the left-right direction. Both ends of the grid decoration portion 194 in the left-right direction are located behind the trapezoidal portions of the grid portion of the grille decoration frame 193, and the remaining portions are located below the general portion of the grid portion. As a result, the lattice decoration part 194 can be visually recognized from the front except for both ends. A plurality of lattice decorations 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grill 192 . The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full color LED.

The lower front speaker unit 190 can output sounds in the low range (low frequency) among sounds to be output through the lower front speaker 191 . Since the lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front surface of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, it imparts sound pressure to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. can be made In addition, the lower front speaker unit 190 can light-embellish the lattice decoration part 194 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 195, and the grille decoration frame 193 (lower front speaker The front side of the grille 192) can be decorated with light.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
Next, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit will be briefly described. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown), and cooperates with the locking unit 360 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame. It is used for opening and closing and locking with 4. The cylinder lock 127 includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 128 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and a keyhole 128 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) which is inserted into and rotates together with a regular metal key.

The cylinder body of the cylinder lock 127 penetrates from the rear through the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, a metal transmission cylinder (not shown) of the metal locking unit 360 in the body frame 4 is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 128) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder to rotate. When the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 in the body frame 4 are in contact with each other when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the cylinder lock 127 and the locking unit 360 are electrically connected.

When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 is operated by an official metal lock 127. The key is inserted into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively). A staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall, when inserting a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, charges himself/herself and discharges static electricity. , and is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, various substrates (for example, a substrate having a power supply line and a substrate ground line) are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127 in order to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Next, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10 and 14. FIG. FIG. 14(a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the grille decoration frame and the lattice decoration are removed in (a). The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 has a game window 201 which allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. A door frame upper unit base 202 is formed in an inverted U shape with an outer periphery that is vertically elongated when viewed from the front and an inner periphery that becomes the game window 201 is opened downward. A transparent closing glass 205 that closes the inverted U-shaped inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 is provided.

In addition, the door frame upper unit 200 includes a door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 provided in a belt shape along the inner circumference of the inverted U shape of the game window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a door frame upper unit. A door frame top exterior decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame top interior decoration unit 210 on the front surface of the base 202, a door frame covering the door frame top interior decoration unit 210, and the door frame top exterior decoration unit 220. An upper outer edge decoration unit 230 and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 are provided.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 is flat and formed in a gate shape that opens downward. The door frame upper unit base 202 has a rectangular outer periphery that is elongated vertically in a front view, and an inverted U shape that opens downward on the inner periphery. The size of the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed larger than the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged behind.

[3-2b. closing glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). . The closing glass 205 prevents the game ball B from falling forward from the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. for closing the front side of the The closing glass 205 is transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Door frame upper interior decoration unit]
The upper door frame interior decoration unit 210 includes a wall-like upper inner base 211 that extends along the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a constant width and protrudes forward, and along the upper inner base 211 A semi-cylindrical upper inner decoration part 212 extending and provided at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper inner decoration part 212 provided behind the upper inner decoration part 212 and having a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface. A decoration substrate 213 is provided.

The upper inner base 211 is formed in an inverted U shape when viewed from the front. At the front end of the upper inner base 211, a pair of linearly extending portions of the inverted U shape extend vertically in the vertical direction, and the semicircular portions of the inverted U shape extend upward. curved to protrude forward. The upper inner base 211 is formed to be opaque. The interval in the horizontal direction at the lower end of the upper inner base 211 matches the interval between the laterally separated rear ends of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 in the bulging portion 120 of the lower door frame unit 100 .

The upper interior decoration part 212 is milky white with translucency and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper interior decoration substrate 213 is attached to the upper interior base 211 , and a plurality of LEDs 213 a mounted on the front surface are arranged in rows along the upper interior decoration portion 212 . A plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper interior decoration substrate 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper interior decoration substrate 213 to emit light, the upper interior decoration portion 212 can be decorated with light.

The door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper interior decoration part 212 is aligned with the rear end of the bulge upper decoration part 121 of the bulge part 120 when assembled to the door frame 3 . The upper inner decoration part 212 and the bulging upper decoration part 121 form one continuous decoration.

The upper interior decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is combined with the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 to decorate the area around the game window 201 with light emission. parts). In addition, since the upper interior decoration part 212 is formed milky white, it is possible to reduce the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a and radiate it outward, so that the game window surrounded by the upper interior decoration part 212 It is possible to prevent the inside of 201 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2d. Door frame upper exterior decoration unit]
The door frame upper exterior decorative unit 220 has a rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, protrudes forward, and includes a plurality of protruding bases 221 arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. , the upper outer apex decorative portion 222 provided at the front end of the projecting base 221, the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 respectively arranged between the projecting bases 221, and the upper outer apex decorative portion 222 respectively arranged behind. and an upper outer valley LED 225 arranged behind the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 .

The projecting base 221 is formed to have an isosceles triangle shape when viewed from the side. The projecting base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to near the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202 , and extends outward from the upper inner base 211 . The front end of the projecting base 221 projects forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the portion in contact with the upper inner base 211 .

The plurality of upper outer apex decorative portions 222 are formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The outer diameter of the cylinder of the upper outer top decorative portion 222 is approximately one-third the outer diameter of the upper inner decorative portion 212 . The upper outer top decorative portion 222 is formed to have a length corresponding to the length in the horizontal direction of the projecting base 221 provided. These upper outer top decorative portions 222 are translucent.

The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 includes a portion (vertical surface portion) extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221, and the lower surface and upper surface of the protruding base 221 from the upper side and lower side of the portion. and a portion (slanted portion) that obliquely extends to the vicinity of the front end of the projecting base 221 along the . The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 has a mirror-like plated layer on the surface (front surface). Further, the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 has a square opening formed in a portion extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 arranged in the rear faces forward. ing.

The top rim LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high brightness full color LED.

The door frame upper external decoration unit 220 can light-embellish the upper external apex decorative part 222 by appropriately lighting the upper external apex LED 224 . In addition, the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can make the upper outer valley decoration part 223 emit light by appropriately emitting light from the upper outer valley LED 225, and the upper outer top decoration part 222 separated in the vertical direction You can brighten the space between them.

The upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 are the second surrounding light area LA2 (Fig. 16 The part surrounded by the two-dot chain line in ) is configured. In addition, the front ends of the upper outer peak decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the upper door frame outer decoration unit 220 are located behind the front ends of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the upper door frame inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and the upper outer peak decorative portion 222 and the upper outer Even if the valley decoration part 223 is decorated with light emission, the inside of the game window 201 is prevented from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit]
The upper door frame outer edge decoration unit 230 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in rows along the outer peripheral edge (both left and right sides and upper side) of the upper door frame unit base 202 and the outer periphery of the upper door frame unit base 202. A door frame upper cover 232 that is attached to the edge and covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220, and an opaque decoration part 233 provided on both left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full color LEDs.

The door frame upper cover 232 includes a pair of side walls extending forward from portions near the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202, and connecting the upper sides of the pair of side walls to close the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202. It is composed of a top wall extending forward from a part and a front wall connecting the front sides of a pair of side walls and the front sides of the top wall, and is formed into a box shape that is open at the rear and bottom. It is The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely transparent.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end of the upper interior decoration part 212 so that the front end of the side wall is positioned slightly forward of the front end of the upper interior decoration part 212 . Specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to the height near the upper end of the linearly extending inverted U-shaped portion of the game window 201, from which the door frame upper unit base 202 extends. It curves and extends in an arc shape so as to be located forward as it goes upward to approximately the same height as the state. In addition, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved upward in an arc shape, and are curved toward each other as they go upward.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed with a pair of speaker mounting openings 232a to which the grill decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 and the like are mounted at both right and left corners of the upper part of the front wall.

The opaque decorative portions 233 are provided on the outer surfaces of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 . The opaque decorative portion 233 has a slit 233a extending forward and backward at the same height as the projecting base 221 in the door frame upper external decorative unit 220. As shown in FIG. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233 a of the opaque decorative portion 233 .

The door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 with a door frame upper cover 232 so as to be visible from the front. In addition, the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 appropriately emits light from a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231, so that the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232 (side wall and upper wall, respectively) are illuminated. front end) can be decorated with luminescence.

In addition, since the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has opaque decoration parts 233 on both the left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 It is possible to prevent other players seated in front of other pachinko machines arranged adjacent to the machine 1 from being irradiated.

A plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 (front end outer edge of the door frame upper cover 232) are arranged around the game window 201 in the third surrounding light area LA3 ( 16). In addition, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 are arranged in front of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decorative portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer edge LED 231 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are caused to emit light, the inside of the game window 201 is blocked. Difficulty in seeing due to glare is prevented, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 includes upper speakers 241 mounted near the left and right corners of the front upper portion of the door frame upper unit base 202, and closing the speaker mounting openings 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of the upper speakers 241. An upper speaker grille (not shown), a horizontal grid-like grille decorative frame 243 arranged in front of the upper speaker grille and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and substantially the same lattice parts in the grille decorative frame 243. Rod-shaped lattice decorations 244 arranged at intervals behind the upper speaker grille, lattice decoration LEDs 245 provided at the outer ends in the left-right direction of each lattice decorations 244 and emitting light to the lattice decorations 245 (Fig. 14).

Each of the upper speakers 241 is attached obliquely to the center of the door frame upper unit 200 in the left-right direction so as to face slightly downward. The upper speaker 241 is attached behind the adjoining upper outer top decoration part 222 in the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 . The upper speaker 241 is a full-range speaker that outputs a full range of sound from low to high. The upper speaker grill is mounted inside the door frame upper cover 232 (rear surface of the front wall). The upper speaker grill is punching metal.

The grill decoration frame 243 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The grille decoration frame 243 is arranged so as to be separated vertically by connecting a frame portion shaped along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 and two vertically extending sides of the frame portion. and a plurality of grid portions. The lattice portion extending in the left and right direction of the grille decorative frame 243 has a portion (general portion) excluding the laterally outer end portion of the door frame 3 extending with a constant width. is formed in a trapezoidal shape extending obliquely downward toward the end and then extending with a constant width.

The lattice decoration part 244 is translucent and formed in a columnar shape elongated in the left-right direction. The lattice decoration part 244 can be visually recognized from the front through the upper speaker grill. The lattice decoration LED 245 is a full color LED.

The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can light-embellish the lattice decoration part 244 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245 . rear side) can be decorated with light emission.

Also, in the upper speaker unit 240 , the upper outer top decorative portion 222 arranged in the upper speaker grill (the grill decorative frame 243 ) is located forward of the upper speaker 241 in front view. That is, between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grille, the lattice decoration part 244 and the upper outer top decoration part 222 which can be decorated with light are arranged. As a result, when the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the lattice decoration part 244 are decorated with light emission, the player can see the effect that the inside of the speaker grill is decorated with light emission, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines. .

[3-3. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the overall configuration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. FIG. 15 is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state in which game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing the peripheral light area in the door frame. The door frame 3 makes most of the front surface including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the body frame 4 visible from the front through the game window 201 in a state where the front surface of the body frame 4 is closed. be able to. Also, the closing glass 205 of the game window 201 can close the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a).

As shown in FIG. 16 and the like, the door frame 3 has a bulging upper decorative portion 121 and an upper inner decorative portion 212 which are connected in a ring shape. A game window 201 and the like are arranged. In other words, the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, and the like are surrounded by the bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 (the first surrounding light area LA1). Furthermore, the outside of the upper inner decorative portion 212 is surrounded by the upper outer crest decorative portion 222, the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 (second surrounding light area LA2), and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third surrounding light area LA3). there is In other words, the game window 201 is triple surrounded by three surrounding light areas, the first surrounding light area LA1, the second surrounding light area LA2, and the third surrounding light area LA3.

The door frame 3 is formed so that the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 surrounds the front side and the left and right sides of the door frame effect device 150, and the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 are supplied to the bulging portion 120. It flows along the front edge and is delivered from the delivery port 136 to the outside (lower tray 140 or ball launching device 330).

In the normal state of the door frame 3, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operating portion 160 of the door frame effect device 150 are positioned at the downward movement end (lowering end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156 ) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 . In addition, the effect operation section 160 has the pressing operation section 161 positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable section main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable section main body 156 .

The door frame 3 is provided with a bulging upper decorative portion 121 over the entire length at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 . The upper end of the wall of the upper plate 130 for storing the game balls B is raised by the bulging upper decorative portion 121 . The upper end of the front side (front region 131a side) of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 is higher than the front end of the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (first movable portion 155) in the normal state. As a result, when the upper tray 130 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B overflow toward the door frame presentation device 150, and the player is informed that the upper tray 130 is full of the game balls B. can be easily recognized, and the game ball B can be prevented from spilling forward from the upper plate 130.例文帳に追加

In the door frame 3, the upper tray ball ejection button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are gathered at the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper tray 130. As shown in FIG. The surface on which the upper plate ball release button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided is provided at a position higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulging upper decorative portion 121, and forward. It slopes down towards you. As a result, when the game ball B lands on the surface provided with the upper tray ball release button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126, the game ball B is rolls toward the upper tray 130 side and can be released into the upper tray 130 .

In the door frame 3, the surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 that constitute the upper tray 130 (that is, the inner surface of the upper tray 130) are mirror-finished. Since the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are reflected on the inner surface of the upper tray 130, the reflected game balls B can be seen to create the illusion that many game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130.例文帳に追加In addition, the volume of the upper plate 130 can be made to appear large.

In the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 first rolls forward in the left side area 131b, and then enters the front area 131a to reach the front area 131a. Roll inside to the right. Then, the game ball B enters the right side area 131b from the right end of the front area 131a, rolls backward in the right side area 131b, and is then sent out from the outlet 136 to the player. (see FIG. 15). At this time, since the game ball B circulates in the front area 131a closer to the player on the front side than the door frame effect device 150, the game ball B in the front area 131a can be visually recognized well. It is possible to easily check the amount of game balls B stored in the .

Further, in the door frame 3, since the delivery port 136 is provided at the rear end of the right side region 131b where the game ball B rolls backward in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 can be visually recognized from the player side. can. As a result, the player can see how the game ball B is sent to the ball shooting device 330 from the delivery port 136 (upper tray 130), which could not be seen in the conventional pachinko machine.

In the door frame 3, the pair of lower speakers 153a can be visually recognized through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, and the door frame effect display device 152 can be visually recognized behind the lower speakers 153a. be able to. The upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 of the door frame 3 is close to the upper end of the lower door frame unit 100 , that is, the lower end of the game window 201 . As a result, the door-frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are brought close to each other, so that the effect image is such that the door-frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 constitute one screen. can be displayed.

In the door frame effect display device 152 arranged behind the effect operation part 160, the door frame 3 is arranged so that the lower side is positioned below the upper front end of the effect operation part 160 and the upper side is positioned at the upper front end of the effect operation part 160. , and the upper part of the door frame effect display device 152 is higher than the effect operation part 160.例文帳に追加As a result, even if the door-frame effect display device 152 is brought closer to the effect operation unit 160, the door-frame effect display device can be viewed from the player side as compared with the case where the entire door-frame effect display device 152 is lower than the effect operation unit 160. 152 can be made visible. In addition, since the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the door frame effect display device 152 can be reduced, the forward bulging amount of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of excitement, and to allow the player to enjoy the game in a comfortable state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 is a door that is diagonally arranged behind the production operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (range between two dashed lines in FIG. 11) is in the vicinity of the production operation unit 160. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, when the door frame effect display device 152 is viewed from the player side, the effect operation unit 160 can be seen near the outer edge of the lower side of the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying an effect image decorating the effect operation part 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, the effect operation part 160 can be decorated with the effect image, and by changing the effect image, the effect operation part can be displayed. The 160 decorations can be changed in various ways, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, since the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 can be seen in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160, the door frame 3 does not need to display the image of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152. An image such as an arrow pointing to 160 or a hand can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the production operation section 160, so that the player's line of sight can be immediately directed to the production operation section 160. , the operation timing of the performance operation unit 160 can be made difficult to delay, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance of operating the performance operation unit 160 to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower front speaker grille 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the upper speaker grille of the upper speaker unit 240 so that the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 are forward (player side) in a normal state. ) is difficult to see.

[3-4. Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for the door frame]
Next, noise countermeasures for the door frame 3 will be briefly described. As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame base unit (not shown) and the like, which is a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. As described above, the door frame base unit has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. A metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the door frame, and a metal opening/closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit. As described above, the door frame reinforcement unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to impart rigidity. 4 is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 provided in the 4. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. The frame grounding board 559 collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island equipment of the game hall. is electrically connected to the ground of

As described above, the various decorative portions provided on the door frame 3 include those with no decorative plating at all, and those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown) or a metal conduction plate (not shown). there is For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion that has been subjected to decorative plating, the static electricity charged to the player is discharged as electromagnetic noise, and is transmitted from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative portion, From the door frame reinforcement unit, it is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground substrate 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown) and removed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmitting member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit 360 in the body frame 4 come into contact with each other, causing an electrical connection. Therefore, when a staff such as a game hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 while the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, A staff member such as a game hall clerk or a person who possesses a metal setting key described later (a limited person who can confirm the current setting value that has been set in addition to changing the setting value) When the locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4 is touched, the static electricity that has been charged to a staff such as a store clerk of the game hall or a person holding a metal setting key described later is discharged as electromagnetic noise, and the staff such as a staff member of the game hall or the like is discharged. A person holding a metal setting key, which will be described later, is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit through the locking unit 360, and from the door frame reinforcing unit, the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground substrate 559, and the island equipment ground (not shown). It is removed by being led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via a wire.

[3-5. Luminescence production of the door frame]
Next, the lighting performance by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 consists of the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, etc., which are formed in a milky-white columnar shape with the bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 (first circular light It is surrounded by an area LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative portion 212 are arranged in a line in the direction in which they extend. As a result, the surroundings of the game window 201 and the like can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a. At this time, if the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a are made to emit light in order, the player can see a light emission effect in which light circulates around the game window 201.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the upper outer crest decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 (second surrounding light area LA2) arranged outside the upper inner decorative portion 212, the upper outer crest LED 224 And the upper outer valley LED 225 illuminates the upper outer apex decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223, so that the outside of the first surrounding light area LA1 can be decorated with light, and the outside of the game window 201 is doubled. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect of luminous decoration.

Since a plurality of upper outer apex decorative parts 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, by sequentially emitting light from one side in the vertical direction, the player can see a light emitting effect like a level meter. . For example, when a chance arrives, the expected value for the game can be shown to the player as a level meter, or a sound meter matching the output music can be shown to the player.

In addition, since the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 is formed in a mirror surface shape, the upper outer valley LED 225 emits light to make the space between the upper outer top decorative portions 222 brighter than the upper inner decorative portion 212. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that can strongly attract the player's interest.

Since the door frame 3 is provided with a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in rows on the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202, the upper outer edge LEDs 231 are made to emit light. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the outer edge of the door frame 3 (the third surrounding light area LA3) emits light.

Further, in the door frame 3, outside the game window 201, there are triple light surrounding areas of the first light surrounding area LA1, the second light surrounding area LA2, and the third light surrounding area LA3. By properly emitting light in the surrounding light area, various light emitting effects such as going around the game window 201, going to the game window 201 from the outside, going to the outside from the game window 201, etc. It is possible to show a player a light emitting effect.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the grid decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grid decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the grid portion (grid decoration portion 194) of the grille decoration frame 193 and the grille are displayed. The lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 244) of the decoration frame 243 can be decorated with light emission, and the player can enjoy the light emission effect that makes the grille decoration frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grille decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out. can be shown to

Furthermore, in the door frame 3, the lower speaker decoration portion 153c of the lower speaker unit 153, the lattice decoration portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, the plurality of upper outer peak LEDs 224 and the grille decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 in the upper outer valley LEDs 225 ( By illuminating the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 located behind the upper speaker grill), between the pair of lower speakers 153a and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, the upper speaker 241 and A space between the speaker grill and the upper speaker grill can be decorated with light, and a player can see a light-emitting performance that cannot be seen in the past pachinko machines in which the space between the speaker and the speaker grill is decorated with light.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138, the plurality of LEDs 138a emit light to store the liquid in the upper tray 130 and in the upper tray 130. The game ball B that is being played can be decorated with light emission. For example, when the game balls B are not stored in the upper plate 130, the plurality of LEDs 138a are made to emit light, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is mirror-finished, so that the entire inside of the upper plate 130 is dazzling. A light-emitting performance decorated with light-emission can be shown to the player, and the top plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 brightly shines for the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play, thereby attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加can be strongly attracted.

Since the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is provided above the bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130 by more than half the outer diameter of the game ball B, a plurality of storage light-emitting decoration parts 138 are provided in a state where the game ball B is stored in the upper tray 130. When the LED 138a emits light, the light is irradiated to the upper half side of the game ball B and reflected upward, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 shines. can show people.

When the bulging upper decorative portion 121 is decorated with light, part of the light is also emitted into the upper plate 130 . A player can be shown a luminous performance in which the stored game balls B are decorated with luminescence.

In addition, since the door frame 3 includes the light-emitting decorative portion 124a surrounding the upper tray ball eject button 124 and the light-emitting decorative portion 142a surrounding the lower tray ball eject button 142, By making the light-emitting decoration part 124a of the ball-drain button 124 and the light-emitting decoration part 142a of the bottom-ball-drain button 142 emit light, the top-dish ball-drain button 124 and the bottom-dish ball-drain button 142 can be decorated with light. Therefore, when a large number of game balls B are paid out, such as during a "jackpot" game, the upper tray 130 and the lower tray 140 can be ejected by illuminating the upper tray ball ejection button 124 and the lower tray ball ejection button 142. In order to prevent the tank from becoming full with , it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect for prompting the player to operate the upper tray ball ejection button 124 or the lower tray ball ejection button 142.例文帳に追加

In this way, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can present various lighting effects to the player, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player. can be enjoyed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

[3-6. Effect of door frame effect device]
Next, the rendering of the door frame 3 by the door frame rendering device 150 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 17 and the like. FIG. 17(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation section in the door frame effect display device, and (b) is the effect operation part by the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of decoration, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration production|presentation by the production|presentation image of a door frame production|presentation display apparatus, and the movable production|action of a production operation part.

In the normal state of the door frame effect device 150, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 are positioned at the lower movement end (lower end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156 ) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 . In addition, the effect operation section 160 has the pressing operation section 161 positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable section main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable section main body 156 . Even in this normal state, the pressing operation portion 161 in the effect operation portion 160 can be pressed.

When the first LED of the operating section decoration board 162 emits light in a normal state, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the upper surface of the pressing operating section 161 is decorated with light. In addition, when the second LED of the operating section decoration board 162 is illuminated in a normal state, the opening frame section 158a of the first movable section cover 158 surrounding the pressing operating section 161 is decorated with light emission. can show people. By these light emitting effects, the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation part 161, and the player is encouraged to press the pressing operation part 161 to operate the pressing operation part 161. can facilitate participation in

In addition, when the plurality of LEDs 159 a of the first movable part decoration substrate 159 are illuminated in a normal state, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the first movable part main body 156 are projected through the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 . The space between can be decorated with light. In other words, the player can see the light-emitting effect in which the vicinity of the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is decorated with light.

In this normal state, when a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a, the sound is radiated toward the player through the grille hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grille hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156. , the player can hear a sound effect in which a sound can be heard from the direction of the effect operation part 160 (pressing operation part 161). As a result, the sound from the lower speaker 153a can attract the interest of the player to the pressing operation section 161, prompting the player to press the pressing operation section 161 and operate the pressing operation section 161. It is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production.

In addition, in the normal state, the door frame effect display device 150 can be visually recognized from the player side through the device cover 151 in a good condition, and the door frame effect display device 152 displays the door frame effect display device 150. The effect image can entertain the player (see FIG. 17(a), etc.).

In a normal state, the door frame effect device 150 rotates the first lifting pins 175a by the four first lifting drive motors 175b of the first lifting mechanism 170, thereby moving the pair of lifting arms 174 and the lifting slider 172. , the player can see a movable effect in which the first movable part 155 moves to the upward movement end (rising end) together with the effect operation part 160.例文帳に追加As a result, the first movable part 155 pops out together with the effect operation part 160, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be strongly urged to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation part 161. At the same time, by raising the first movable portion 155, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and to increase the player's expectation for the game.

When the first movable portion 155 is moved to the raised end, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 becomes visible from the player side, as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 are caused to emit light, the player can see the lighting effects in which the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light. Therefore, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end while the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light, an effect is played in which the first movable part 155 rises from the light. It can be shown to other people, and can give a strong impact to the player.

Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 are caused to emit light while the first movable part 155 is moved to the upper end, part of the light is emitted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130. Since the light is emitted, the plurality of LEDs 159a can also show the player a light-emitting effect that makes the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 shine brightly, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down by the four first elevation drive motors 175b, the first movable portion 155 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotation of the first elevation drive motors 175b. can be made As a result, when the player touches the first movable part 155 or the effect operation part 160 while the first movable part 155 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Further, by vibrating the first movable portion 155 at the timing of pressing the effect operation portion 160 (pressing operation portion 161), the operation feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavy or light, and the player can can entertain.

Furthermore, when the first movable portion 155 is moved from the lower end to the upward end, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable portion main body 156 move upward. and the pair of lower speakers 153a. As a result, the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grille hole 156b changes, the natural vibration of that part changes, and the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a changes. The player can be made to listen to a sound effect in which the tone color of the sound radiated to the player side through the grille hole 156b changes.

Further, when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the first movable part 155 from the lower end to the upper end, the upper part of the first movable part 155 moves to the door frame effect display device 152. Appears to cover the bottom of the display screen. As a result, when the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable portion 155, so that the player can It is possible to make the user notice that the movable portion 155 has risen, and to obtain the same effect as described above.

At this time, the door frame effect display device 152 displays, for example, an effect image in which a predetermined character lifts the first movable portion 155, an effect image in which the predetermined character is lifted by the rise of the first movable portion 155, and the like. By displaying , the player can see the collaboration effect of the movable effect of the first movable part 155 and the effect image, and the player can be greatly entertained.

In addition, when the door frame effect device 150 revolves the second lifting pin 183 by the second lifting drive motor 182 of the second lifting mechanism 180 in a normal state, the effect operation unit 160 moves upward via the lifting transmission piece 184. It is possible to show the player a movable effect of moving to the moving end (rising end) of. As a result, the upper surface of the pressing operation part 161 of the effect operation part 160 protrudes upward more than the upper surface of the first movable part 155, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the pressing operation part 161.例文帳に追加can strongly prompt the player to press the pressing operation portion 161, and the rising of the pressing operation portion 161 makes the player think that something good will happen. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the game.

When the effect operation part 160 is moved to the raised end, the peripheral wall of the operation part movable base 163 below the pressing operation part 161 is exposed to the outside, as shown in FIG. 12(b). In this state, when the second LED of the operating section decoration board 162 is caused to emit light, the player can see a lighting performance in which the peripheral wall of the operating section movable base 163 emits light. Therefore, when the performance operating section 160 is moved from the lower end to the rising end while the peripheral wall of the operating section movable base 163 of the performance operating section 160 is decorated with light, the performance operating section 160 appears to rise from the light. can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

In addition, since the effect operation section 160 can be moved up and down by the second elevation drive motor 182, the effect operation section 160 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the second elevation drive motor 182 forward and reverse in small increments. . As a result, when the player touches the performance operation unit 160 while the performance operation unit 160 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Further, if the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is vibrated at the timing of pressing the effect operation unit 160, the operation feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavy or light. can entertain.

Further, when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the effect operation unit 160 from the lower end to the upward end, the upper part of the effect operation unit 160 is displayed on the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152. appears to cover the bottom of the As a result, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the upward end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the effect operation unit 160, so that the effect operation unit 160 is displayed to the player. can be made aware of the increase in the temperature, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

At this time, the door frame effect display device 152 displays, for example, an effect image (see FIG. 17B) that decorates the periphery of the effect operation unit 160, and an effect that the effect operation unit 160 is lifted by a predetermined character. By displaying an image, an effect image (see FIG. 17(c)) in which a predetermined character is lifted by raising the effect operation unit 160, etc., a collaboration effect is produced by the movable effect of the effect operation unit 160 and the effect image. can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly entertained.

The effect operation part 160 can be moved to the rising end when the first movable part 155 is at the lowered end, and can be moved upward when the first movable part 155 is at the rising end (Fig. 12(b)). state). For example, after moving the first movable part 155 from the lower end to the rising end, by moving the effect operating part 160 from the lower end to the rising end, the player can perform a movable effect in which the effect operating part 160 rises in two stages. can be shown to As a result, since the performance operating part 160 rises in two stages, the player is strongly reminded that a "big hit" game will start (the special lottery result is "big win") when the performance operating part 160 is operated. Thus, the player's expectation for the game can be heightened, and the player can be made to operate the performance operation section 160 to enjoy the player participation type performance.

As described above, the door frame effect device 150 can present various effects to the player, such as the light emission effect, the movable effect, the image effect, the player participatory effect, the sound effect, and the like. By appropriately combining them, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make the player less likely to get bored, and to entertain the player.

[3-7. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame effect device 150 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5a where the game is played. The upper plate 130 having the storage area 131 for the game balls B surrounding the device placement portion 123 is provided by the front region 131a on the front side of the device placement portion 123 and the side regions 131b on both left and right sides. The game balls B are stored on the front side of the door frame effect device 150 by the area 131a, so that the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, since the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend back and forth, in addition to the front region 131a, the game balls B stored in the side regions 131b can also be viewed from the player side. Visual recognition can be facilitated.

Therefore, since the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen, it is possible to arouse the player's awareness of the amount of the game balls B stored. is consumed and the reserved amount decreases, the player can easily recognize the decrease in the reserved amount and can be replenished with the game balls B in the upper tray 130, so that the player does not notice. The game ball B is prevented from disappearing from the upper tray 130, the sudden interruption of the game can be prevented, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game is prevented, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, since the game ball B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, the player's line of sight is directed downward from the game area 5a. Only by dropping the ball onto the device 150, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the front area 131a can be immediately recognized, and the player does not need to carefully confirm the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper tray 130.例文帳に追加, the player can easily concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a, and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the opposite right side, the front region 131a is connected to the supply port 135. Since it is provided on the way to the exit 136, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out of the storage area 131 from the delivery port 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the upper tray 130 is consumed by playing a game, the game ball B flows in front of the player's eyes (front area 131a). can be easily recognized, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

Furthermore, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the side region 131b on both the left and right sides of the device placement portion 123, and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the right side, the space between the supply port 135 and the delivery port 136 in the horizontal direction can be increased, it is likely that the storage area 131 is also increased in the left-right direction, so that the amount of game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be increased. Therefore, since many game balls B can be stored in the upper tray 130, the player can play the game without worrying about the amount of the game balls B stored, and the player can concentrate on the game. In addition, the player can immediately recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a simply by dropping the player's line of sight from the game area 5a to the lower door frame effect device 150.例文帳に追加This eliminates the need for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper tray 130, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, making the game more enjoyable and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, a storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 for irradiating light into the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 is provided above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper tray 130. Since the light from the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is irradiated to the part above the half of the game ball B stored in 131, the light from the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is emitted by the game ball B can be reflected upwards. Therefore, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be glittered and decorated with light from the light from the stored light-emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the game balls B. At the same time, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, and the amount of the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effects as above. can play.

In addition, since the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the forward-facing rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 emits light by causing the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 to emit light. It is possible to show a player a luminous decoration that cannot be seen in a conventional pachinko machine, surprise the player, and direct the player's attention to the upper tray 130 (storage area 131). By having the player confirm the amount of game balls B stored, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described effects. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is mirror-finished, the light from the storage light-emitting decoration portion 138 or the light from the storage light-emitting decoration portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is reflected on the upper plate 130. By reflecting the light on the inner surface, it is possible to further increase the feeling of glitter in the storage region 131 by the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the alignment part 137 is provided near the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, clogging of the game balls B can be prevented in the vicinity of the delivery port 136, and the game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130. It is possible to smoothly deliver the game ball B from the delivery port 136 to the ball launching device 330 and the lower tray 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, interruption of the game due to clogging of the game balls B can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the side region 131b of the upper plate 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is delivered from the delivery port 136 that could not be seen in the conventional pachinko machines. The situation can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the front area 131a in the storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored is provided on the front side of the device placement portion 123, the game ball B is placed on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the device placement portion 123. Even if it rolls forward on the ball, it will fall into the front area 131a, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling forward from the bulging part 120.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 are mirror-finished, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be Since it is reflected on the peripheral wall of the upper tray 130, the player can be given the illusion that the game balls B are stored beyond the peripheral wall, and it appears that many game balls B are stored on the upper tray 130.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, since the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131 is provided, the light from the storing light emitting decorative portion 138 or the light from the storing light emitting decorative portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is emitted upward. By reflecting the light on the inner surface of the plate 130, the glittering feeling in the storage region 131 by the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 can be further increased, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement portion 123 of the bulging portion 120, the player can be entertained by the effect of the door frame effect device 150, and the player's interest in the game is suppressed. can be made

In the above-described embodiment, the storage area 131 in which the game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130 includes the front area 131a in front of the device placement section 123 (door frame effect device 150) and the left and right sides of the device placement section 123. However, it is not limited to this, and the front region in front of the device placement portion 123, one side region on the left side of the device placement portion 123, It may be configured with a back region behind the device placement portion 123 . Alternatively, it is composed of a front region 131a in front of the device placement portion 123, two side regions 131b on the left and right sides of the device placement portion 123, and a back region behind the device placement portion 123 (the device placement portion 123 is provided in the form of islands in the upper plate 130). It should be noted that the back area of the storage area 131 may be tunnel-shaped so that the game ball B cannot be visually recognized from the player side. Also, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation section 160 in the door frame effect device 150 .

In the above embodiment, the inner surface of the upper tray 130 is mirror-finished, but the inner surface of the upper tray 130 may be non-mirror-finished.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, but the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the front peripheral wall 134. You can do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effect device 150, a certain number of game balls B are placed on the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 by the plurality of louver portions 158b of the first movable portion cover 158. However, it is not limited to this. The game ball B placed on the upper plate 130 may be rolled onto the upper plate 130 so that the game ball B is not stored (continued to be placed) on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150.例文帳に追加

[4. Body frame]
The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side (upper tray 130 of the door frame 3). , to discharge the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall).

[4-1. Overall configuration of main body frame]
As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 300 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 300 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge portion 310 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; a main body frame lower hinge portion 320 attached to the lower end on the left side in the front view of the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; I have it.

The main body frame 4 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 300 in front view and reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300, and a front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 300. A ball launching device 330 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an inverted L attached along the upper side and left side of the body frame base unit 300 on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 in front view. A letter-shaped payout base unit 340, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 340 for putting out game balls B to the player side (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140), and a body frame base. A board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, which is attached to the lower side surface of the unit 300 when viewed from the rear and is equipped with a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a body frame base which will be described later. A back cover 640, which covers the back side of the game board 5 attached to 501 and is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically, and a right side surface of the main body frame base unit 300 when viewed from the front. A metal locking unit 360 for locking between the cage outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 is provided.

The body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a rear side of a portion extending rightward from the front end thereof to prevent the game board 5 inserted into the game board mounting portion 301 of the body frame base 501 to be described later from moving forward and up and down. Two regulating left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 300, which will be described later. Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the inside (game board 5).

The main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 is recessed rearward in a range of about 3/4 of the total height downward from the upper end when viewed from the front, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. It has a mounting portion 301 . The ball shooting device 330 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base unit 300 at a position lower than the game board attachment portion 301 .

Further, the body frame base unit 300 of the body frame 4 has a door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening through which the transmission cylinder of the lock unit 360 is inserted. 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 4a is depressurized so that the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. A detection signal from the door frame open switch 4 a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . The body frame base unit 300 of the body frame 4 has a body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame open switch 4a is attached. installed. When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 4b is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The door frame opening switch 4a and the body frame opening switch 4b open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, The opening of the body frame 4 is not detected, but the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the locking unit 360. ing. Further, the door frame open switch 4a and the body frame open switch 4b are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, and the transmission cylinder of the lock unit 360 is inserted so as not to be affected by the electromagnetic wave noise entering the cylinder lock 127. The door frame opening switch 4a is arranged at a position below the cylinder insertion opening where the door frame opening switch 4a is installed, and on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is installed, below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is installed A body frame open switch 4b is arranged on the rear surface. In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission lines from the door frame opening switch 4a and the body frame opening switch 4b are not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

The body frame base unit 300 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted into the body frame base 501 from the front side. Ruko is formed.

The pay-out base unit 340 includes a pay-out base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 300, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the pay-out base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 when viewed from the front and extending to the left side when viewed from the front in the shape of a groove that opens upward, and a first rail cover attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. 554, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 , a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 , and an external ball disposed above the tank rail 553 and attached to the dispensing base 551 . It has a terminal board 558 and a frame ground board 559 housed in a board housing portion (not shown) formed in the payout base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal board 558 (the front of the pachinko machine 1). The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame grounding substrate 559 can temporarily collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground it to the island facility of the game hall.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 350 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 350, and an upper full ball path. A lower full tank ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through the unit 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and a power supply unit 620c to the right of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front. It has an attached payout control unit 620d and an interface unit 620e attached to the left side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front.

The base unit 620b includes a front base (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a rear base (not shown) attached to the rear side of the front base and having the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface.

The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. I have it.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the right side of the power supply board cover 631 in the front view of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board box 632 housed in the payout control board box 632. a substrate 633; The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632 and configured as a caulking case.

In addition, the payout control board 633 includes an error LED indicator (not shown) for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, as well as an RWM clear button 633z and the like having a pressing operation section that serves a plurality of functions. In this embodiment, a lead type RWM clear button 633z is adopted, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from the opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed when the payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632. can be operated by pressing the

The RWM clear button 633z is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board for controlling the game content (game progress). It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in the built-in RAM, functions as a setting switch button to select and switch setting values, and is displayed on the error LED indicator. function as an error release switch for canceling an error that has occurred. In other words, in this embodiment, the setting change function related to game specifications (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values) is provided separately from the main control board that controls game content (game progress). It is mounted on the payout control board 633 which is a board. Also, the separate board may not be the payout control board 633, and the board not housed in the board case, the board housed in the board case, and the board housed in the board case configured as a caulking case. can be considered. However, the setting change function (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) is an important function for a game machine, so it is desirable to have high security, and it is better to put it in the board case rather than the board that is not stored in the board case. The board housed has higher security, and the board with even higher security is the board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case. Since the dispensing control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that security is high. A main control board 1310 for controlling the contents of the game (progress of the game) is attached to a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 as will be described later. Being attached to the frame 4 also contributes to the improvement of security.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base (not shown) attached to the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base, and the rear side of the interface board 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base.

One end of a connection cable from the body frame 4 side is connected to the interface board 635 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board for controlling the game content (game progress), the peripheral control board for controlling the progress of performance, etc., and the like. It is connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the interface board 635 so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 300 . The back cover 640 has its right side as seen from the front attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 as seen from the front so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and the left side as seen from the front is the back cover attachment portion of the dispensing base 551 . 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 are pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable. A lock screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and in a portion corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 . The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed into the back cover attachment portion 601a to secure the back. Cover 640 is secured. The back cover 640 can rotate about 180 degrees from a closed state covering the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state opening the rear side of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned on the surface. The rear cover 640 is formed with a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 . The slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to a main control board box attached to the rear side of the game board 5, which will be described later.

By the way, the game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are worn by the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other, and the metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B and falls. Therefore, when the tank rail 553 on which the game ball B rolls in the downstream direction is in a state where metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres, the downstream flow of the game ball B is hindered. As a result, it becomes difficult to supply the game balls B smoothly toward the downstream side, and the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 350 of the payout unit 560 is stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is removed. can be removed from the tank rail 553. As a result, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B naturally falls from the tank rail 553 to the outside through the notch 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from the tank rail 553. Metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B adhering to the inside of the tank rail 553 due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling inside the tank rail 553 falls to the outside from the tank rail 553 through the notch 553aa. The powder can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553, and metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the inside of the tank rail 553 can be removed by inserting a cotton swab into the notch 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk. The metal powder can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553 by performing the operation of removing the .

The pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, and the game balls B discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and then re-fed by a ball lifting device. Since the balls are supplied to the ball tank 552, the temperature inside the island facilities of the game hall is much higher than the indoor temperature of the game hall. For this reason, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 includes various substrates provided for the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. In order to radiate the heat emitted from the light emitting means, etc., to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 extending vertically through the front and rear are formed. In addition, since the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B dropped through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 enters the back side of the game board 5. Although it is difficult to completely prevent this, it is possible to prevent the metal powder from entering the back side of the game board 5 .

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part thereof. , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes the unconnected wiring and is in a state of being suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch the light-emitting means such as the light-emitting means, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the rear cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented.

Of the various substrates provided on the game board 5, the substrates near the back cover 640 (excluding relay substrates such as a panel relay substrate 1410, which will be described later) are molded from a non-conductive resin that constitutes the substrate box. It is covered with the cover body, and even if the tip of the unconnected wiring intrudes into the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the cover body, the board covered with the cover body is not affected at all. . A relay board such as a panel relay board 1410 to be described later is a board that relays one board and another board. It is formed not on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board on which various connectors are mounted, which is the surface facing the back cover 640, but on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board opposite to the surface facing the back cover 640. Through-holes with lands that allow pin terminals of various connectors to be inserted and soldered on the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the relay board (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through-holes") ), the wiring pattern is covered with a resist of a predetermined color (for example, green, yellow, red, blue, black, etc.) and is not exposed. In other words, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and touches the relay board, the relay board is not affected.

In this way, the rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 includes a protective cover capable of protecting the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5 . , and by covering the back side of the game board 5, heat emitted from various substrates provided on the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and light emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps A heat dissipation function that can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the slit 641 of the tank rail 553, and metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B that has fallen through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 A metal powder intrusion suppression function that can suppress intrusion into the side of the game hall, and an unconnected wiring suspended from the inside of the island facility of the game hall. and a protection wall function capable of preventing contact with light-emitting means such as a driving source, various LEDs, various lamps, and the like.

The locking unit 360 includes a metal unit base (not shown) attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of metal door frame hooks (not shown) projecting forward from the unit base and capable of locking with the door frame 3, A plurality of metal outer frame hooks (not shown) that protrude backward from the unit base and can be engaged with the outer frame 2, and a metal transmission (not shown) that vertically moves the door frame hook or the outer frame hook. A cylinder, a metal lock spring (not shown) that biases the door frame hook downward and the outer frame hook upward, and a metal spring (not shown) that moves the outer frame hook downward. and an unlocking lever for the outer frame.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 300 in front view is attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 300 in front view. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side in front view, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal has the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 and imparting rigidity to it, and also functions as a main body frame metal ground. It is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 described above. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). In addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal, the fact that it also functions as a main body frame metal ground will be described later.

[4-2. Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for the main body frame]
Next, noise countermeasures of the body frame 4 will be briefly described. As described above, the body frame 4 includes a frame-like body frame base unit 300 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. Inverted L-shaped payout base unit 340 attached along the upper side and left side in the front view on the rear side, game balls B received by the payout base unit 340 to the player side (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140) A payout unit 560 for payout, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the pachinko machine 1, and a payout control board 633 are provided.

As described above, the body frame base unit 300 is formed of a metal extruded member, and includes the body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the like attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 when viewed from the front. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity. are electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 provided in the body frame 4 . In other words, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 serves as a frame ground on the main body frame side. In addition, the ball tank 552 has a metal plate (not shown) disposed on the entire bottom thereof electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 via a ball tank ground wire (not shown). A ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 via an interface ground wire (not shown). A ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 is electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 via a power supply ground wire (not shown). This frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

In this way, as noise countermeasures for the main body frame 4, electromagnetic wave noise that enters the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power board 630 in the board unit 620 is suppressed by the main body frame reinforcing frame 530. , the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620, various corresponding ground wires (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire (not shown). It is designed to be guided to ground and removed.

[4-3. Frame ground board]
Next, the frame ground substrate 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame grounding board 559 can once collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground it to the island facility of the game hall, and has a plurality of grounding terminals. The first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) is electrically connected as an interface ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via an interface ground wire (not shown). , The second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown) as the island facility ground. A terminal (ball tank grounding terminal) has one end of a ball tank grounding wire (not shown) attached to a metal plate (not shown) arranged on the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 with a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the tank ground wire is electrically connected, and the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) serves as the main body frame metal ground, and is connected to the metal main body of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4. One end of a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown) is attached to the frame reinforcing frame 530 with a metal screw (not shown), and the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal) is electrically connected as a power supply ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via a power supply ground wire (not shown). As a door frame metal ground, one end of a door frame metal ground wire (not shown) is attached to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in a door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 with a metal screw (not shown). , the other end of the door frame metal ground wire is electrically connected.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, a third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor (not shown), and the other end of the first resistor is used as a power supply ground. is electrically connected to the 5th ground terminal (power ground terminal), the 2nd ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground, and the 1st ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as the interface ground. A fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as a frame metal ground and a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as a door frame metal ground are electrically connected to one end of a second resistor (not shown). Along with this, the other end of the second resistor is connected to the fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) as power ground, the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as island facility ground, and the first ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as interface ground ( interface ground terminal). That is, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the first resistor and the second resistor.

The electromagnetic noise flowing through the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as an interface ground is grounded to the island facility of the game hall via the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire. The electromagnetic noise that flows through the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as the ball tank ground and is removed by being guided to the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground, through the island facility ground wire Then, the electromagnetic noise that is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed and flows to the fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as the main frame metal ground is transferred to the second ground terminal (island ground) as the island equipment ground. Equipment ground terminal), island equipment ground wire, is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed, and the electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the 5th ground terminal (power ground terminal) as the power ground is used as the island equipment ground. 2nd ground terminal (island facility ground terminal), through the island facility ground wire, it is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed, and the 6th ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground The electromagnetic wave noise flowing in the game hall is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed.

By the way, the ball tank 552, the payout unit 560 and the like are attached to the payout base unit 340 in the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facilities of the game hall, and the game balls B are supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560 . The game balls B are ground in the island facilities of the game hall, rub against each other in circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is arranged near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, and as a result of which static electricity tends to accumulate, the ball tank 552 and the payout unit are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground substrate 559 , a third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) and the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as the main body frame metal ground (main body frame metal ground terminal), through the first resistor and the second resistor, respectively, the electromagnetic wave noise is gradually passed and attenuated, and the instantaneous high voltage is generated. The second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise entering from the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate is transferred from the frame ground board 559 through the sphere tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called frame ground. By leading to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise entering from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. Thus, in this embodiment, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity.

Further, as described above, some of the various decorative portions provided on the door frame 3 are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity. The ornamental plated decorative portion is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 via wiring (not shown) or a metal conductive plate (not shown). It is For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion with decorative plating, the static electricity charged to the player is discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative portion. In addition, staff such as game hall clerks and those who have metal setting keys described later (limited to those who can check the current set values in addition to changing the set values) ) touches the locking unit 360 in the main body frame 4, as described above, the static electricity charged in the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall or the person holding the metal setting key described later is discharged as electromagnetic wave noise. The signal is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit via the locking unit 360 from a staff member such as a hall clerk or a person who has a metal setting key to be described later.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as a door frame metal ground is provided in the frame ground board 559 for the door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3. Through the second resistor, the electromagnetic wave noise is gradually flowed and attenuated to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground wire is passed through the island facility ground wire. It is designed to be able to lead to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. In other words, the decorative parts with decorative plating, the players, staff members such as clerks at the skill hall, and those who have metal setting keys (described later) (in addition to changing the setting value, the current setting Electromagnetic noise from a limited person who can check the value etc.) is led from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the door frame reinforcement unit as a frame ground called frame ground. Due to this, decorative parts with decorative plating, players, clerks at skill halls, etc., and those who have metal setting keys described later (in addition to changing the setting value, the current setting value Electromagnetic noise from a limited person who can confirm etc.) can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 18 to 27. FIG. FIG. 18 is a front view of a game board in which the game panel and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 19 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 18 as seen from the front right, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 18 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. and FIG. 22 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. This is for performing a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 111 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 30, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 64) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600 .

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 28, etc.) which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to the command from the panel relay board 1710 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive board 1720 for driving the decoration board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 containing the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side when viewed from the rear.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large prize winning opening 2005 is provided, which enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. , a side unit 2200 having two general prize winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a starting unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a. From the attacker unit 2400, which is attached to the right side of the opening unit 2100 in front view and has one general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100, and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 is provided in the upper part of the game area 5a, and is attached slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 . The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided therein, and a second opening for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a starting hole sensor 2402 and a big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 . In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects an illegally acting magnetism.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 64). ).

The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second effect unit 3200 attached inside the back box 3010 behind the first back effect unit 3100. , the back third effect unit 3300 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200, and the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 attached to the front of the back second effect unit 3200 A back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and releases it downward, and a game received in the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 A back right ball discharge unit 3040 for receiving the ball B and discharging it downward is provided.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 28(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the space between the outer rail 1001 and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is substantially entirely transparent, so that the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 28 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and having the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface thereof.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the left-right direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

As shown in FIG. 28, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated to penetrate the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 24 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 for setting game performance, and the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311. and a non-conductive resin main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200 .

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the horizontal direction is the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the top, right, and bottom sides, and the remaining one-fifth of the area is A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially rotates the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in the front view, the body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the body frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the front view in the up-down direction is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the up-down direction on the opposite side is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side of the main body frame 4 ( A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, the rear cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as described above. It is a thing. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 , the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640 . As described above, the back cover 640 has its right side in front view attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in front view so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side in front view Since it is attached to the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side of the front view becomes the pivotal support side (closed side) of the rear cover 640. The left side in the front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640 . That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, a green resist is used for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from that of the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. It is solidly coated with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the use of a color different from the color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards housed in the main control board box 1320 . The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game, the payout of the game ball B, etc.) and is highly important for crime prevention. Awareness about is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 by distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the game performance, it is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, but it is less important for crime prevention. Awareness of the fact that it is an expensive substrate is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a substrate resist, is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311. adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out more than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 is also highly important in terms of crime prevention, in addition to the main control board 1310. It can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In this embodiment described above, the resist of the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310. However, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished. Yellow, red, blue, transparent, etc. may be used if possible.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used. The surface (mounting surface) and/or the back surface (solder surface) may be printed in white to cover almost the entirety of the surface (mounting surface) and/or in black, blue, yellow, or red. You may print.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a non-conductive resin cover and a non-conductive resin base. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. The cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat radiation through which the air inside the main control board box 1320 can be released to the outside air.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 , the peripheral control board 1510 and the setting change board 1311 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning opening sensor. 2401, the general prize-winning sensor 3001, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the outlet sensor 3032 are connected.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is provided with a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (relieves) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 is connected electrically. can be difficult to transmit to). A signal from the setting key switch 1311 a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 by this connector connection (inter-board connection). Note that connector connections, which are connections between boards, include connection using a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism and connection using a special connector that has a floating mechanism. A normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. The structure is such that there is absolutely no amount of movement in the direction (for example, vertical direction) relative to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed. On the other hand, a special connector with a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug. At the time of mating, it is possible to absorb the error (fitting axis misalignment) that occurs when the socket is pushed in by moving the socket in a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (e.g., vertical direction). It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with one side having a distance dimension approximately one-fifth of the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 , and the upper side of the setting change board 1311 being the main control board 1310 . is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the lower side thereof is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 respectively.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction. , at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 . A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point of intersection of the center lines of the square setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the horizontal direction and near the connector MSCN. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center toward the right side is arranged below.

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key made of metal can be inserted into the insertion port and can be pulled out from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the member of the other pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) arranged opposite to the island facility of the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to damage it.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (ie, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

[Setting key switch]
Here, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch seen obliquely from the front right, a perspective view (b) of the setting key switch seen obliquely from the front left, and a top view of the setting key switch.

The setting key switch 1311a is of a type in which a resin setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is housed inside a resin outer cylinder (hereinafter referred to as a "resin type cylinder"). setting key switch 1311a"), and a metal setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned to be operated is accommodated in a metal cylindrical outer cylinder. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "metal type setting key switch 1311a"), and the like. The resin-type setting key switch 1311a and the metal-type setting key switch 1311a have the same structure, but are partially different in material.

[Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a non-conductive resin cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a setting key switch 1311a for the inner side of the outer cylinder 1311aa. A setting key cylinder 1311ab made of non-conductive resin into which a key is inserted and rotated is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and a circuit is formed in which a contact is turned on or off by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac made of resin having non-conductivity and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa is formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and is bent so as to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. and a metal frame plate 1311ad on which a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada projecting rearward from the base body 1311ac are formed on both side surfaces (the front side surface and the rear side surface in the figure).

The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is provided with an insertion port 1311aba into which a metal setting key is inserted. As shown in FIG. 25(c), the setting key made of metal is operated when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (that is, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a). Insert the setting key into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the cylinder 1311ab at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted (at a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening 1311aba is along the vertical direction). and can be pulled out from the insertion port 1311aba. The base body 1311ac has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad, and two brass lead terminals are spaced apart from each side by a predetermined distance from the side rotated 90 degrees (in the figure, right side and left side).

In the figure, the COM1 terminal as the upper lead terminal on the left side and the COM2 terminal as the lower lead terminal on the left side are common terminals, and either one or both terminals can be used. When the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the A terminal that is the upper lead terminal on the right side and the B terminal that is the lower lead terminal on the right side are connected to the base. A circuit formed in the body 1311ac electrically connects the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal, thereby electrically connecting the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal, thereby disconnecting the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal. When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated by 60 degrees from the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, The circuit formed on the base body 1311ac electrically disconnects and cuts off the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal, and electrically connects and conducts the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal ( As a result, the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted).

A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada projecting from a metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to set the setting key switch 1311a. It can be fixed to the change board 1311 . The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered on the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 . On the back side of the base body 1311ac, when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged so that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in FIG. A specified columnar protrusion (not shown) is formed to protrude. Due to this cylindrical projection, when the operator of the manufacturer mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, for example, the setting key switch 1311a is turned upside down (wrongly). It can be made not to be soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, the resin type setting key switch will 1311a has the outer cylinder 1311aa, the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the base body 1311ac, which are each molded from non-conductive resin, as described above. has no effect.

[Metal type setting key switch]
Next, the metal type setting key switch 1311a includes a metal cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated inside the outer cylinder 1311aa. 1311ab and 1311ab have the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a in that the material is different in the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a. Further, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are made of metal and are electrically connected to each other. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to the non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. That is, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, there is a problem that electromagnetic wave noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad. A detailed description of the electromagnetic noise of the metal type setting key switch will be given later.

[Relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switches and the cover of the main control board box.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with the insertion port 1311aba into which the metal setting key is inserted, as described above. When the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is separated from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box. As shown in FIG. 26, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is provided with a diameter ( For example, a tubular rib portion 1301za (tubular rib portion 1301za) having a predetermined distance dimension toward the setting change board 1311 along the inner circumference of the through hole 1301z having a diameter 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. has the same thickness as the thickness of the cover body 1301). The inner periphery of the through-hole 1301z and the inner periphery of the tubular rib portion 1301za communicate with each other so as to form the same inner peripheral surface without steps.

Since the through-hole 1301z is also a portion that is touched by a finger or fist of a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a, the strength around the through-hole 1301z can be increased by the rib 1301za. As a result, the periphery of the through-hole 1301z is pushed by human force to bend the periphery of the through-hole 1301z to increase the gap between the through-hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, or the periphery of the through-hole 1301z is damaged and penetrated. Since it is possible to prevent the gap between the through-hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab from being increased by increasing the outer diameter of the hole 1301z, for example, a person who illegally accesses the setting key switch 1311a can intentionally point the finger. Even if the perimeter of the through hole 1301z is pushed with a fist, it can contribute to preventing the insertion of an elongated illegal tool such as a wire into the gap between the through hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

The diameter of the through-hole 1301z is designed to fit inside the rectangular surface shape of the base body 1311ac having the cuboid shape of the setting key switch 1311a. The edge of the rib portion 1301za and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are separated by a distance dimension d (in this embodiment, about 2 mm), and the metal frame plate of the setting key switch 1311a is separated. 1311ad is configured so as not to be directly touched by a person accessing the setting key switch 1311a.

As a result, the gap between the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1310za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab). The diameter of the through-hole 1301z is the surface shape of the base body 1311ac having the cuboid of the setting key switch 1311a even if an elongated irregular tool such as a wire is inserted into the hole 1301z. Since it is formed so as to fit inside the rectangular shape, the tip of the elongated unauthorized tool is bent against the surface of the base body 1311ac and cannot enter toward the setting change board 1311 . In other words, it is possible to prevent the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 from being altered.

In the resin-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of non-conductive resin. Even if a finger approaches or touches the front surface of the key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is transmitted through the setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board. 1311 can be prevented. Also, the distance d is between the end of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer circumference of the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. (In this embodiment, about 2 mm). Also, it becomes difficult for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a through the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za. 1311 can be prevented.

In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. It is in a state of Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to the non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. In other words, if a person charged with static electricity brings his or her finger close to or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover 1301 or its surroundings, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is transmitted between the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key. Since the cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, there is a possibility that electromagnetic wave noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad. For this reason, if a person charged with static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z of the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 or its periphery, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge will be generated on the metal frame plate 1311ad. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the setting change board 1311 may be invaded via the setting key switch 1311a. A detailed description of the electromagnetic noise of the metal type setting key switch will be given later.

In addition, when the operator attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed on the island facility of the game hall, first, it is temporarily placed in front of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. When the temporarily placed game board 5 accidentally hits the game board 5 and overturns, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged. Also, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the temporarily placed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 during work and falls.

The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all. Therefore, through the cover 1301, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal are set. They are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other) on the change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. The main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of ) is also formed so as not to approach each other (spaced apart from each other), and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are also formed so as not to come close to each other (spaced apart from each other).

[Procedure before operating the setting key switch]
Here, the procedure up to operating the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 as described above. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the rear cover 640 as described above. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the back cover opening side of the back cover 640 is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 , so the main body frame 4 is made larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately 90 degrees), the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 simply opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 by a gap enough to insert his or her arm. Even if an attempt is made to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 first needs to open the back cover 640 from covering the back side of the game board 5. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees).

Since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 in this way, compared to the case where the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 When a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a uses an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a wire, the opening side of the main body frame 4 between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 Therefore, even if an illegal tool is inserted and fed, the path from the open side of the body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, and the illegal tool must be fed deeply. As a result, the operation time during which an illegal tool is fed into the setting key switch 1311a is also lengthened, so that such fraudulent acts can be easily detected by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall.

In addition, since the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640, the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered with the back cover 640. It's becoming As a result, an unauthorized person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can use an illegal tool such as a piano wire or wire to break the body frame between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and sent from the open side of 4, the unauthorized tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before it reaches the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from being inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

The setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting a metal setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. Therefore, in order to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. FIG. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. FIG. Accompanied by such a plurality of operations, the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can be enhanced, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraudulent use of an unauthorized tool.

As described above, the rear cover 640 is attached so that its left side in front view is pivotably supported by the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 so as to be openable and closable. A lock screw 642 is screwed into the back cover mounting portion 601 a to fix the back cover 640 . It is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, which is opposite to the open side of the body frame 4. Therefore, a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts an illegal tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if it is fed in, the path from the open side of the body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes long, so it is necessary to feed the unauthorized tool deeply. In this respect as well, since the operation time during which an unauthorized tool is fed into the locking screw 642 is longer, it is possible to make it easier for a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall to discover such fraudulent acts, and the setting change board. By increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent actions using illegal tools.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switches 1311a are arranged is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is accommodated in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is located behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. installed on the side. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are separated from each other by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate substrates, and by making the objects to which the substrates are attached different. can be done. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one board, only one board needs to be tampered with, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are also different. Security against the clear button 633z is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs game preparation control and game control (follows game preparation control, and performs game control). The game preparation control is performed in the first step (step S14 in the main control side power-on processing described later) in which the setting value can be changed based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. Judgment, processing of step S16A), and following this first step, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, it functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the setting value.) and a second step (determination in step S216 and processing in step S218 in setting change processing to be described later) in which a setting value can be selected and switched based on. Following the game preparation control, the game control consists of the main control side main process in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control side timer interrupt process described later, and the like.

Although it is possible to improve such security, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are also different. Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located. It may be difficult for staff members such as game hall managers and game hall clerks to know if they are arranged because they may be unfamiliar with them.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, the cover body of the main control board box 1320 is pasted with a sticker that indicates the location of the RWM clear button 633z. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" is printed in red translucent characters (height: 7mm). ing. As a result, the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) can be communicated to the store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, and other staff members. Since the RWM clear button 633z can be easily found when operating the RWM clear button 633z, the user does not get dizzy. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

It should be noted that even if this sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320, the visibility of the main control board 1310 is not obstructed. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of the sticker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When molding the cover body of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the characters may be integrally molded). . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. On the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311, characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" may be printed in white by silk printing. Characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) in white by silk printing. In addition, the color of silk printing may be the same color, or may be different colors. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of silk-printed characters. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The character part may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1311, and the character (height: 7 mm) may be formed with a resist as "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board". A character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633, and a blank character (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be formed with a resist. The colors of the resist may be the same color, but it is preferable to use different colors so that the substrates can be distinguished. In addition, instead of the characters, a character such as an arrow may be masked. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. A similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and this rectangular sheet has, for example, red translucent characters (high (width: 7 mm), and "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" is printed.), or red translucent on the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 A transparent rectangular sheet labeled "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" with letters (height: 7 mm) may be attached. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The position of the button 633z may be indicated by an announcement sound from various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an attendant such as a store manager of the game hall or a store clerk of the game hall operates the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice saying "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button." An announcement image (which may be photographed) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. After grasping the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z from such announcement voices and announcement images, the staff such as the manager of the game hall and the store clerk of the game hall turn off the power of the pachinko machine 1 to change the setting value. can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting of , an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located by the control of the control board 1510 ``The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. Please change the value." is repeated from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound and proceeds with various processes based on the received predetermined command. It will be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. It should be noted that, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, while the announcement sound is playing, the effect display device 1600 may display an image of "setting".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting of , an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located by the control of the control board 1510 ``The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. Please change the value." is repeated from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the seal attached to the cover body of main control board box 1320 . Although such an announcement sound is repeatedly played from various speakers, it is assumed that the contents of the announcement sound may be overlooked. , the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known. In addition to the announcement voice, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." The contents of the location where the seal indicating the location of the button is affixed may also be provided. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting value becomes accustomed to changing the setting value by the work and it is annoying, if the RWM clear button is operated immediately after starting the work, this will be a trigger. , the announcement sound can be promptly stopped, and even if it is unavoidable that the work needs to be done after the game hall opens for business, the work can be started so as not to cause inconvenience to the players. If the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement sound can be quickly stopped with this as a trigger. It should be noted that, following such an announcement voice, an announcement voice telling how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, an image of "setting" may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the announcement sound is played.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the substrates are attached to different objects. were spaced apart, but if crime prevention can be enhanced, a setting key switch 1311a and a setting switching button (in this case, from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 to the setting switching button functions are removed.) can be aggregated and arranged. For example, the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have the same vertical distance as the main control board 1310. A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 , have matching shapes. That is, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is on the center line. Along the right side of the control board 1310, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. Below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and near the lower side of the setting change board 1311, a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged. A setting switching button having a pressing operation part is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311 . That is, on the same board, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switches 1311a are arranged near the lower side, while the setting switching buttons are arranged near the upper side and are spaced apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are separately arranged on the same board and separated from each other, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one board. are placed close to each other and arranged separately, it is difficult to make unauthorized modifications. Even if it is a thing, there is a case where crime prevention can be improved.

[Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for confirming and displaying set values]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting indicator 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing setting values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current setting values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. By doing so, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated. . In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening the body frame 4, then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

A person who changes the setting values must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After the opening operation is performed, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform an ON operation. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, while operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). value) is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

A person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is sent from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Every time the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. When it reaches the set value 6, which is the maximum value, it returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and is again incremented by 1, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the setting value is to be determined, a person who changes the setting value must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a). It is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the setting value from the state where it is displayed on the setting display 1310g. state, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. complete the configuration change task.

When confirming and displaying the set values currently set, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then After the body frame 4 is opened from the frame 2, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. .

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Next, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the set value currently set must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the original position to the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the set values currently set removes the metal setting key from the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. to complete the confirmation display of the currently set setting values.

It should be noted that, as described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs instantaneously), the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform ON operation. Therefore, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the key cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on, thereby turning the setting key on and pressing the RWM clear button 633z. It is necessary that the pressing operation part is not operated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are set when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When the power is restored, the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned ON by turning it 60 degrees and turning it ON, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when there is a power failure ( When the power is restored after a momentary power failure), the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated", whereas the predetermined set value display The permission condition is "when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must not be operated." is different in that it requires

Also, there are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mounting type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment is basically of a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation in which the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port. As a result, the substrate on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided is bent by the force associated with this operation. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outline of the setting key switch and soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude outward from the outline of the setting key switch and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board.

As a result, with the lead type, if the metal setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the external shape of the setting key switch, and the substrate is removed. Because it is soldered to the back (solder side) of the setting key switch, compared to the SMD type where the lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude toward the outer shape and is soldered to the surface (mounting side) of the board, setting The load applied to the part where each lead of the key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board becomes large, and this load acts strongly from the back surface (solder surface) of the board toward the front surface (mounting surface), and the board itself becomes weaker. It will bend greatly. On the other hand, in the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the metal setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch is directed outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch. The lead of the setting key switch is located inside the outline of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board. Compared to the lead type switch, the load applied to the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller, and this load is transferred from the back surface (solder surface) of the board to the front surface (mounting surface). The substrate itself is difficult to bend even when working toward the surface).

Also, if the board itself bends greatly due to external force acting on the board, there is a concern that the solder part where the SMD type electronic parts are soldered will peel off due to the large peeling load of the land pattern. When using , it is desirable to mount it on a board on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the solder part where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the solder part of the setting key switch Considering the strength of the solder portion, it is desirable to use a lead type setting key switch because it can be made strong against peeling.

Therefore, in this embodiment, basically, a reed type switch is adopted as the setting key switch 1311a. In this embodiment, lead-type electronic components are mounted on the setting change board 1311 instead of SMD-type electronic components. Even if the metal setting key is caught in the insertion slot and the board itself bends greatly as described above when the metal setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot, soldering to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 is possible. There is no fear that other lead-type electronic components attached to the printed circuit board may come off from the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 . As described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (connected between boards) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected). may be electrically connected via a harness), the signal from the setting key switch 1311 a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 .

A rectangular main control board 1310 elongated in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left, top, right and bottom sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. The upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected to the remaining one-fifth area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the corner region. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with one side having a distance dimension approximately one-fifth of the lateral distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Compared with the shape of the main control board 1310, it is small. In this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square setting change board 1311 having such a small shape. If the setting change board itself bends when the setting key switch 1311a is pushed in and the board itself bends, or if the metal setting key gets caught in the insertion opening when the metal setting key is pulled out from the insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and the board itself bends. Since 1311 is formed on a small substrate, the magnitude of deflection can be kept smaller than that of main control substrate 1310 . As a result, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are brought into contact with the cover body and base body of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending. Since there is no need to provide ribs that can be used to control the setting key switch 1311a, screw holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is of the lead type and is arranged on the setting change board 1311, which is separate from the main control board 1310, so that the setting value can be changed. Even if the setting change board 1311 bends when the setting key is inserted into or removed from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 does not bend. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

On the other hand, in place of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on one of the boards such as the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the power supply board 630. When an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the board, instead of the lead type setting key switch 1311a, an SMD type switch is adopted, mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, and temporarily inserted. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion slot when the metal setting key is pulled out from the opening, the board itself is difficult to bend as described above, so other SMD type electronic devices that are soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board are used. There is no danger that the component will come off the surface (mounting surface) of the board.

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when moving to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used for various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[Base monitor]
Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects game balls launched into the game area 5a through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the outlet sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It's becoming

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to turn it on. A key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the information that conveys the setting key ON and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects one of the setting keys ON and OFF from the received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "setting key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position. A key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information that conveys the setting key ON and OFF is output to the outside as a pulse signal. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit capable of Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has a pulse width of 1 ms when the information indicates that the setting key is ON, and a pulse width of 5 ms when the information indicates that the key is OFF. . When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects one of the setting key ON and OFF from the input pulse signal. , , or (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "setting key modification (2)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position. A key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 1311ab counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal are Between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310, an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2 V to 3 V in the range of 0 V to 5 V) is used, and a comparator circuit is provided in the main control board 1310, The main control MPU 1310a may determine ON/OFF of the setting key ON signal and ON/OFF of the OFF signal by inputting the comparison result from the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, it is possible to improve the security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "variation (3) of the setting key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of ) and then turning it off. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch is referred to as "setting key modification (4)"). sometimes referred to as).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320 . In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the press operation part of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. However, the setting change board 1311 is modified by inserting a wire or the like from the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the opening corresponding to the pressing operation portion of the enter key button. In order to prevent this, the structure is such that the wire penetration preventing portion is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening. It should be noted that unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover open/close switch capable of detecting opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the open/close switch for the setting change board cover, the case where the cover is released from the base can be included in the predetermined set value change permission conditions (setting change board box This aspect may be described as “setting key modification (5)”).

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (5) of the setting keys is appropriately selected and combined (the mode of selection and combination of the modification examples is referred to as "setting key modification example (6) ”).

In addition, in the above-mentioned setting value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, for lottery determination when shifting from probability variable time to normal time It is possible to change the probability of , the rate of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player possible) probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a game specification in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (the degree of advantage) exists as a plurality of set values in advance and requires setting changes, is advantageous to the player. There are game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) exists in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player Since there is no need to use it as a can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of all areas of the RAM), it is possible to set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns (after clearing the RAM It can be used as a setting value that allows variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the set value 1 is set to "all operations (movable bodies (role Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "movement of object (object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and real machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movable object (character object) operation" is assigned as setting value 2, and set Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "illumination of light emitting body" is assigned as value 3, and detailed operation of movable body (character object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of light emitters per port (lighting of light emitters by predetermined output port units (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and set value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 specifying "no operation" is assigned (the mode of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later after the RAM is cleared. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 90) from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the peripherals according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). The board 1510 can operate a movable body (accessory) to be controlled and light a light-emitting body. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a time setting pattern 3 that specifies "", a time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 specifying "35 seconds" is assigned as the set value 6 (the mode of changing the setting of the time when the player waits after the completion of the symbol fluctuation is set as "Modified example by common hardware configuration (2 )”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the end of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, it is possible to give variation to the time from the end of the symbol variation to the demonstration.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed while the player is waiting) to be performed after the pattern variation is completed. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "comical effect, movement effect of movable body (character object)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates "serious effect" is assigned as the set value 3, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "serial effect, movement effect of the movable body (role object)" is assigned as the set value 4. 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 specifying "historical drama effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and a demonstration effect setting designating "historical drama effect, movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the aspect of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect may be described as "modification (3) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the details of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the details of the demonstration effect performed after the variation of the symbols is finished.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default sound volumes to be adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a volume setting pattern 3 that designates ", a volume setting pattern 4 that designates "volume 4" as a setting value 4 is allocated, a volume setting pattern 5 that designates "volume 5" is allocated as a setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 that designates "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting mode of the default volume may be described as "modification (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction of decreasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to set value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the maximum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This mode of changing and setting the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various problems, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by maximizing the volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice it, it may be offensive to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and setting value 5 is assigned as " An error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (error notification sound volume is sometimes referred to as "modified example (5) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, and the volume that allows you to recognize the error notification sound when you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of default brightness is sometimes described as "modification (6) by common hardware configuration"). be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a changes the default brightness by repeatedly performing main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to adjust the brightness of the light emitters and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned to be specified, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, and an error notification specifying "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4. A luminance setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and an error notification specifying "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6. A luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, so that an error notification can be recognized when stopping in front of the pachinko machine even though it does not turn off), the lamp brightness is increased from setting value 6 (maximum brightness). Brightness is set to high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the brightness of the light emitters in the error notification, and adjust the lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. By changing and setting the luminance of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the luminance of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Further, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration are determined when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established in the setting value confirmation display processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. However, it may be displayed on the setting display 1310g all the time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (set value display (8) may be referred to as "modification (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modification (6) of the setting key described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned ON, thereby turning the setting key ON. On the premise that, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is being pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the main All areas of the control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, and then the game is progressed by setting interrupt permission, etc., while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed. When not operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs set value confirmation display processing in main control side power-on processing to be described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 in the ball count process of the main control side power-on process described later. In the port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 is output to the base monitor 1310h and displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set values that have been set during the period from when the power is restored until when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting etc. after the power is restored, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed, so the setting display 1310g It is no longer necessary to provide it, and can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 21 and 22. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is composed of a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status (not shown in detail), and two LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. It has a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected, A plurality of wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “wirings”) for transmitting control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

The wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the back box 3010, as shown in FIGS. When pulled up to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction to form a game panel. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of 1100 or that is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 as it is pulled downwards.

When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of main control board box 1320 and extends along the lower side of main control board box 1320 to the function display unit connector MFCN. , and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

As described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 is bent downward on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the vertical direction. The rear surface of the board holders 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 . In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 shown in FIG. will be placed in

A decoration board 1131 on which a plurality of decoration LEDs are mounted is arranged behind the function display unit 1400 . The wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable that is electrically connected via a connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decoration board 1131, is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and pulled around to the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 in a state (or in contact) with the wiring FCBL described above, it extends downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010. , and bundled by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 , and routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 . be. Then, the wiring UPCBL separates from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, and is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 to extend along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive board 1720 has a longer wiring length, and especially from the upper right corner of the game board 5 The wiring FCBL, which is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, is bent downward on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and extends vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed, respectively, and are routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 . The area where the wiring UPCBL is routed in this manner is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560 that is set.

As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides downward the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580, A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

In addition, as described above, the game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubbed against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and discharged by static electricity, thereby eliminating electromagnetic noise. discharge. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

In addition, the main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, etc., which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. I have it. This main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be controlled and disabled by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing is not executed, the checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is completely erased (cleared). That is, when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

In addition, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. It protrudes from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . In other words, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. FIG.

As described above, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and in the surrounding area. 1400 and the main control board 1310, and electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510. It may invade the wiring UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may pop out and enter the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may pop out and enter the wiring FCBL.

For example, if the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to pass through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, From a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 to the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, on the right side of the main control board box 1320, approximately from the top side of the main control board box 1320) bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the top or bottom side of the main control board box 1320 at the point where it has a quarter length), and from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 to the left side When it passes over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the side, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then the function display unit connector MFCN. When the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320. Then, when passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the electromagnetic wave noise is mainly transmitted through the wiring FCBL. Intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320, there is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of this intruding electromagnetic wave noise.

Note that if a wiring receiving groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL , not in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but along the wiring accommodation groove, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, if electromagnetic wave noise enters this wiring FCBL, as described above, if the wiring FCBL is housed along the wiring housing groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and routed, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of , electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise that has penetrated into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is placed on the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, while the main control MPU 1310a is arranged from the center to the left side of the lower side of the main control board 1310. That is, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below this center line. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310. FIG.

As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented from entering through the space separating the main control board 1310 from the MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL. , on the main control board 1310, or in the space separating the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "first wiring separation distance dimension"). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic waves entering the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through the space having the first wiring spacing dimension.

The wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, as described above. (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 is attached to the right side of the main control substrate box 1320. When it is routed downward along the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. , and the function display unit connector MFCN, the wiring FCBL is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and protrudes toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is possible to secure a large distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "second wiring distance dimension") to various pins of the main control MPU 1310a. This second wire spacing dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wire spacing dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. can be prevented. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. It can also be configured to be directly connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of elements for transmitting control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). elements capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise are preferably provided for each of the wirings FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From observation results of electromagnetic noise waveforms, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements can also include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted in each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be used. may be inserted respectively.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 64) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

A peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The performance display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. This performance display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 obliquely behind the 3010, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32 and the like. FIG. 29(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 29(b) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board. FIG. 30 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 31 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group in the upper right corner of FIG. 30, and FIG. 32 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner of FIG.

The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end part of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. and a big prize winning port 2005 which enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged near the right end of the game area 5a, below the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged above the right general prize winning opening 2001 and substantially in the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a position higher than the first starting opening 2002 below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 .

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 having two general prize winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a starting opening unit at the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of 2100 in front view and having one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 is provided in the game area 5a, and is attached slightly above the center in the front view.

[5-8a. starting unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upwards with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received, and only one game ball B is received at the lower left of the first starting port 2002. It has one general prize winning opening 2001 always open upward with a possible width. The starting port unit 2100 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be seen (see FIG. 27, etc.).

The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 30 etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a panel that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. and a guide path 2102 (see FIG. 29) that guides the plate 1110 to the rear and discharges downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general prize winning port 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is positioned at the center, which will be described later. It is positioned directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the role object 2500 . Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received in the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

In the starting port unit 2100 assembled on the game board 5, the first starting port 2002 is located directly below the central release portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500 described later. It is configured such that the game ball B released from 2503a is received in the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8b. side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning openings 2001 which are open to receive the game ball B at all times, and a first shelf section 2201 which is inclined such that the upper left and right ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are lowered. , and a second shelf portion 2202 which is inclined so that the right end is lower in the upper part of the two general prize winning openings 2001 . The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 .

The side unit 2200 has two general winning openings 2001 provided at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 are provided facing each other so as to line up on the left and right. The left general prize winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left, and the right general winning opening 2001 opens toward the right.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is located near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game ball B that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. can be guided to the right. The first shelf portion 2201 is inclined so that the extension line of the upper surface passes between the first starting port 2002 and the stage 2503 . The second shelf 2202 is inclined so that the extension line of the upper surface passes through the opening of the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100 .

The side unit 2200 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be seen (see FIG. 27, etc.). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf portion 2201, and the second shelf portion 2202 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. . This side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in the general prize winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and can deliver it to the guideway of the back unit 3000. - 特許庁A game ball received in the general winning hole 2001 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 64).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 27, etc.). This attacker unit 2400 has one general winning opening 2001 out of four general winning openings 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 32, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has an L-shaped outer shape in a front view with the upper end on the right side extending upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward at the upper right corner, the second starting opening 2004 can be opened upward at the lower left of the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004 .

The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and a large winning opening 2005 that is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the horizontal direction. It is five times wider and opens upwards.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large opening opening. A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 64, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starter door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starter 2004 and the second starter door 2411 according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. A starting opening solenoid 2412, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 opened and closed according to the result of one special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is provided.

The attacker unit 2400, as shown in FIG. 2421, the second starter guide shelf 2423 is inclined to the left and has the second starter guide 2004 open in the middle. A grand prize winning opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined to be lower leftward from a position spaced leftward from the left end of the start opening guiding shelf 2423 and has a grand prize winning opening 2005 open in the middle. I have it.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a communication port 2425 communicating with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, and a communication port 2425 that communicates with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423. From between the attacker lower right passage 2426 that extends to the left end of the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424 so as to be lower toward the left after extending to the second start opening guidance shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424 An intermediate passage 2427 extending downward from the big winning opening 2005 and communicating with the attacker lower right passage 2426 is provided.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general prize winning opening 2001, partitions the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and forms a communication port 2425 between the lower end and the second starting opening guide shelf 2423. A partition portion 2428 is formed, and an inclined portion 2429 that is inclined to the left as it goes upward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428 .

The second starting opening door 2411 that enables opening and closing of the second starting opening 2004 that is open on the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423 extends in the front-rear direction and has a plate-like shape that extends left and right so that the left end is lowered. The left end side is provided rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. This second start opening door 2411, the right end side is above the horizontal, by making the state of the position slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second start opening 2004, the game ball to the second start opening 2004 By disabling acceptance of B, the second starting port 2004 can be closed. The second starting opening door 2411, in the state where the second starting opening 2004 is closed, guides the game ball B flowing through the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left. be able to.

The second starting port door 2411 is rotated counterclockwise so that the right end side moves upward from the state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed. Acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is enabled, and the second starting port 2004 can be opened (opened). When the second starting opening door 2411 is raised so as to raise the right end side to open the second starting opening 2004, the second starting opening door 2411 rises from the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423. As a result, the course of the game ball B rolling on the second start opening guide shelf 2423 is blocked, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second start opening 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). open up.

The big prize gate door 2413 that can open and close the big prize gate 2005 opened in the big prize gate guide shelf 2424 is formed in a plate shape that extends in the front and rear direction and also extends in the left and right direction so that the left end is lowered. It is possible to open and close the big winning opening 2005 which opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The big winning gate door 2413 can close the big winning gate 2005 by moving forward, and when the big winning gate 2005 is closed, the big winning gate guide shelf 2424 flows from the upstream side (right side). The incoming game ball B can be guided to the left. In addition, the large winning opening door 2413 is driven backward by the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the large winning opening 2005, and the second start opening guide shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 of the center accessory 2500 are circulated. The game ball B that has been played can be received by the big winning opening 2005 . The big winning opening door 2413 closes the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward inside the big prize winning port 2005. A second inlet 2008 is provided which is always open. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a first receiving port sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008. 2405 and a distribution piece 2415 that opens and closes the first receiving port 2007 (distributes the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 and circulating inside to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008) And, a distribution solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the distribution piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 , is equipped with The sorting piece 2415 is formed in a plate-like shape that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the right end is lowered inside the big prize-winning hole 2005, and opens upward by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving port 2007, guides the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 to the right, and the second receiving port is always open upward. 2008 can be accepted. In addition, the sorting piece 2415 is driven by the sorting solenoid 2416 to move backward to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 is transferred to the first receiving port 2007 with a high probability. can be accepted by This sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can sort the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 so that it can be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 .

This attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the general prize winning opening 2001 is located below the gate portion 2003 (from directly below) on the downstream side of the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 in the center accessory 2500 described later. slightly to the right), the second starting opening 2004 is located at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the big winning opening 2005 is positioned below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . In addition, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are present between the lower end of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general prize winning opening 2001).

Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be explained. Since the general prize winning opening 2001 and the second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state assembled on the game board 5, the game ball B is ejected from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 . Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 (circulation passage group 2520) can be accepted by the general prize winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, an attacker left passage 2421, a general prize-winning port 2001, and an attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and a game ball flows down the right side of the center role 2500. B will enter any of them.

When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. , is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. FIG. When the game ball B enters the attacker's left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it falls on the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423, and falls on the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423. Flows toward the second starting port 2004 (left side) along the slope. When the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, it flows leftward on the second starting port door 2411 and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second starting port guiding shelf 2423. . When the game ball B passes through the second start opening guide rack 2423, if the second start opening 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted into the second start opening 2004 with a very high probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. FIG. When the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted by the second starting opening 2004, it is released to the left big winning opening 2005 side via the second starting opening guide shelf 2423.

Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B released to the left from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 will reach the big winning opening 2005 side, Or, it will flow down either to the intermediate passage 2427 side. When it flows down to the big winning opening 2005 side, if the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413, it is guided to the left by the big winning opening door 2413, and from the left end of the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424. Released to the left. When the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005 is retracted and the large winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B flowing down from the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423 to the large winning opening 2005 side is It is accepted in the grand prize opening 2005 . The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. FIG.

The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B that has been released leftward from the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 pass through the out port 1008 to the rear side of the game panel 1100. is ejected downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and the right side of the general winning opening 2001 When it enters the attacker's right passage 2422, it abuts against the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 and rebounds leftward. In the present embodiment, the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 coincides with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, so that the attacker can enter the right passage 2422. Then, the game ball B bounced off the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 falls (circulates) onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability.

When the game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2422 and contacts the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 rebounds above the communication port 2425, the partition portion 2428 forming the upper end side of the communication port 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429 . Since the inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is located on the right side with respect to the lower end, the game ball B in contact with the inclined portion 2429 is reflected downward toward the attacker's lower right passage 2426, The attacker will enter the lower right passage 2426 . In addition, when the game ball B in contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 rebounds below the communication port 2425, it enters the attacker's lower right passage 2426.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker's lower right passage 2426 has no chance of being received by the second starting hole 2004 and the big winning hole 2005, and is discharged out of the game area 5a through the out hole 1008. - 特許庁

The attacker unit 2400 also has a sub-function display section 2450 above the second starting port 2004 . The sub-function display section 2450 has a plurality of (here, six) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is interlocked with the normal symbol display device, the first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the gate part The result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B to 2003, the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are displayed. It is something to do.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 has a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 64). This magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting a fraudulent act using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the production display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is positioned within the frame. are made invulnerable to

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a frame which can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501. A warp exit 2502 opened inside and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction are provided.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the center side in the left-right direction depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is positioned on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110) is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that the center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2503 has a portion (central release portion 2503a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portion 2503b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central discharge part 2503a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is positioned directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 provided below the center in the vertical direction and to the right of the right outer peripheral surface. The gate portion 2003 has a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the gate portion 2003, and is provided with a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the passage of the game ball. The gate portion 2003 is provided with an interval between the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 and a space through which only one game ball B can pass.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 constitutes a part of the outer peripheral surface of the upper side, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward from a position on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction. , and a distribution passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and is composed of a plurality of passages through which the game ball B can be circulated. The flow passage group 2520 extends vertically from near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to above the gate portion 2003 .

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the group of circulation passages 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first circulation passage 2521 and the left side of the first circulation passage 2521. and a second circulation passage 2522 . The first circulation passage 2521 extends in an arc from the entrance side of the upper end downward along the peripheral edge (right rail 1005) of the play area 5a, the vicinity of the lower end is bent leftward in a crank shape, and the exit is downward. opening towards. The outlet at the lower end of the first circulation passage 2521 is located slightly rightward with respect to directly above the gate portion 2003 .

The second circulation passage 2522 has an entrance at its upper end that opens to the left with a gap from the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521, and bends rightward in the vicinity of the upper end into a first It extends downward in an arc shape adjacent to the circulation passage 2521, bends leftward in the vicinity of the lower end in a crank shape, and then bends rightward in a crank shape, and the outlet is downward adjacent to the outlet of the first circulation passage 2521. opening towards. Thereby, the second circulation passage 2522 can attenuate the circulation speed of the game ball B more than the first circulation passage 2521 . In the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, a plurality of protrusions 2523 are provided at intervals in the direction of circulation of the game ball B, and the game ball B contacts the protrusions 2523. You can slow down the flow rate.

This center accessory 2500 is located upstream of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a) of the front component 1000 when assembled on the game board 5. , an upstream space 2511 through which the game ball B can flow is formed. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the entrance of the upper end of the first circulation passage 2521 of the circulation passage group 2520 is positioned directly below the blocking portion 1006, and the first circulation passage 2521 is located on the right rail 1005 (game edge of region 5a). Furthermore, between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a), a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed.

[5-8e. Flow of game balls through the group of distribution passages for the center role]
Next, the flow of the game ball B through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate portion 2003, and between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. is planted. A plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 prevent the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 from falling to the right side of the gate portion 2003 (the gate portion 2003 and the right rail 1005). and between) are adjusted to circulate with a high probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are arranged so that the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. adjusted. Furthermore, the plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 have the second highest probability that the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is placed in the gate portion after the gate portion 2003. 2003 is adjusted to flow on the left side.

On the other hand, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 have a high probability that the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the gate portion 2003 will hit the attacker unit 2400. It is arranged to enter the attacker right passage 2422 . In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 have a high probability that the game ball B that has flowed through the gate portion 2003 or the left side of the gate portion 2003 It is adjusted to enter the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general prize winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted to be accepted in the general prize winning port 2001 with the next highest probability after the attacker left passage 2421.例文帳に追加

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with such strength that it enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center accessory 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 The game ball B circulates through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 . More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first circulation passage 2521 . A game ball B that has entered the first circulation passage 2521 is likely to be placed on the right side of the gate portion 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the downstream end of the first circulation passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. pass through. Then, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker's right passage 2422 with a high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400 . The game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422 circulates through either the second start opening guidance shelf 2423 or the attacker's lower right passage 2426 .

As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 very often. It is unlikely that the ordinary lottery results in which the second starting port 2004 is open will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 circulates through the second start opening guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second start opening 2004 is often closed. Since the game ball B is not accepted in the opening 2004 very often, there is little opportunity to receive benefits such as the lottery of the second special lottery result and the payout of the game ball B when the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the first circulation passage 2521, the privilege granted to the player is relatively small.

In the above description, the case of hitting to the right has been described, but the game ball B that is hit with such force that it jumps over the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 It will enter the first circulation passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

On the other hand, when the game ball B struck into the upstream space portion 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003 A plurality of implanted obstructing nails N pass through the gate part 2003 with a high probability, and the ordinary lottery result is selected. A game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker's left passage 2421 with a high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and exits the attacker's left passage 2421. It circulates through the second starting port guide shelf 2423 .

At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is drawn, if the ordinary lottery result drawn is "ordinary hit", the second start port 2004 is in a predetermined pattern. Since it will be in an open state at , there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 . When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a lottery for the result of the second special lottery is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, the privilege granted to the player is relatively high (large).

For this reason, the player is more likely to receive a privilege in the second circulation passage 2522, so that the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 with a hitting strength and The hitting strength of the game ball B is adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the hitting strength at which the ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. Variation can be given to the hitting operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522.例文帳に追加It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, if the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is a "jackpot" or the like that generates an advantageous game state, The large winning opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and when the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of the game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous game state ("jackpot game state"), if the player is required to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B, some players may feel impatient or irritated. There is a risk of losing interest in However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is struck to the right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, it circulates through the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422, and then communicates with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. By rebounding toward the opening 2425 and falling through the communication opening 2425 to the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B can be circulated to the big winning opening guiding rack 2424 side (big winning opening 2005 side). Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the big prize winning opening 2005 by an easy hitting operation without delicate adjustment of the hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous game state. At the same time, it is possible to give sharpness to the hitting operation of the game ball B according to the game state, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

[5-8f. Another Embodiment of Distribution Passage Group for Center Accessory]
Next, a distribution channel group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. FIG. FIG. 33(a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for center accessories different from FIG. 31, etc., and FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment. FIG. 34(a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role different from that of FIG. 33, and FIG. It is a part enlarged view. FIG. 35 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for center accessories, which is different from FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. In addition, in FIG.33 and FIG.34, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the component similar to the above.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 33( a ) places the upper end inlet of the second flow passage 2522 a spaced distance to the left relative to the inlet of the first flow passage 2521 as compared to FIG. 31 . It is what I did. This circulation passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 33(b), the impact portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is angled so that the game ball B in contact with the impact portion 1006 easily rebounds toward the entrance side of the second circulation passage 2522. is changed, and the part between the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second circulation passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It is what I let you do. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second circulation passage 2522 side, so that the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B entering the second circulation passage 2522 is widened. It is possible to make it easy to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the secondary circulation passage 2522.例文帳に追加

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 34(a), in the circulation passage group 2520 of FIGS. 31 and 33, the entrances of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are opened upward. Then, the upstream sides of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are aligned vertically and directed leftward. It is designed to be opened.

In this embodiment, part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes part of the first circulation passage 2521, and part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is part of the second circulation passage 2522. make up the department. Also, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a) is the first distribution from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It has a length up to the entrances of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space 2511 shown in FIGS.

In this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the striking strength to contact the narrow part on the left side of the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, Since it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a hitting strength that directly enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens toward the left, compared to the embodiments of FIGS. 31 and 33, The adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B is narrowed. In addition, the game ball B struck into the upstream space 2511 on the left side of the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 partitions the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. If it contacts the left end of the wall (the part between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space 2511 depending on the leftward momentum and angle of the bounced game ball B. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2511, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2511 and enters neither the first circulation passage 2521 nor the second circulation passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. As described above, since the difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B is increased, the player's motivation for the operation of hitting the game ball B can be increased, and the player can hit the game medium. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 34(b), in the embodiment shown in FIG. 34(a), a branch portion 2524 is provided in the middle of the first circulation passage 2521, which communicates with the second circulation passage 2522 in a one-way manner. is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above a portion of the second flow passage 2522 that extends left and right (the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) and is bent downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength enough to enter the first circulation passage 2521, depending on the hitting strength (if the hitting strength is weak), the game ball B may hit the second at the branch portion 2524. Since it branches to the distribution passage 2522 side, the difficulty of distribution of the game ball B to the second distribution passage 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 34(a).

In addition, in order to enter the game ball B into the second circulation passage 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B entering the first circulation passage 2521 weaker than the hitting strength, and the first circulation passage 2521 and Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second circulation passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second circulation passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (to the branch 2524 side) and does not enter the first flow passage 2521 through the branch 2524 . In other words, the branch portion 2524 communicates in one way from the first circulation passage 2521 to the second circulation passage 2522 .

Further, in this embodiment, when the liquid enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 having a branch portion 2524 in the middle and flows through the first circulation passage 2521, the first circulation passage 2521 side of the branch portion 2524 Or because it branches to either of the second circulation passage 2522 side, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on which side the game ball B branches at the branch portion 2524, and the first circulation The flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second circulation passage 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521. , There is a possibility that the first circulation passage 2521 branches to the second circulation passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524, so depending on whether or not to branch to the second circulation passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524, It can make the player's heart throb and entertain the player, and when branching to the second distribution passage 2522 side at the branching part 2524, the mistake of the player's hitting operation can be covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 can be opened. The game ball B is circulated, and the player can be made to feel that he or she has won the game, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 35, the second circulation passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 crossing the frame of the center accessory 2500 . In this embodiment, the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 . Therefore, all game balls B hit into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 flow through the first flow path 2521 . According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the circulation of the game ball B can be made conspicuous from the bypass section 2525, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen after the game ball B circulates through the bypass section 2525. To allow a player to perform the operation of hitting a game ball B aiming at the entrance of a second circulation passage 2522 having a bypass part 2525, and to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of interest. can be done.

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39 and the like. 36 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the performance display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (FIG. 64). ).

The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second effect unit 3200 attached inside the back box 3010 behind the first back effect unit 3100. , the back third effect unit 3300 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200, and the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 attached to the front of the back second effect unit 3200 A back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and releases it downward, and a game received in the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 A back right ball discharge unit 3040 for receiving the ball B and discharging it downward is provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which upper fixing pieces 1601 of the effect display device 1600 are inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch portion 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached (see FIGS. 38 and 39, etc.).

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The rear box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear side as viewed from the rear so as to be slidable to the left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has an insertion opening 3011 that is recessed rearward from the front end near the center in the vertical direction on both left and right sides. The insertion opening 3011 is configured to communicate between the space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the rear first effect unit 3100 described later and the outside of the back box 3010 in a state assembled to the game board 5 . When the game board 5 is transported, this insertion opening 3011 inserts a stuffing between the rotary decorative bodies 3210 from the side of the back box 3010, so that the back second effect unit 3200 is moved by the vibration caused by transportation. The rotary decoration 3210 can be made immovable. Alternatively, when a problem arises in the movement of the rotary decorative body 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, the problem can be resolved by inserting a finger or a tool through the insertion opening 3011.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41 and the like. FIG. 40(a) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40(b) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 41 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the first rear effect unit. The back first effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached at the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened forward.

The back first effect unit 3100 includes a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 that are arranged above the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. A rear first upper decorative substrate 3120 on which LEDs 3121 are mounted, and a rear first left on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 arranged to the left of the light guide plate 3110 and emitting light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. A diffuser lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130 and the plurality of LEDs 3131 on the rear first left decorative substrate 3130 and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 to diffuse the light from the LEDs 3131 and illuminate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. and have.

In addition, the rear first effect unit 3100 includes a transparent plate-shaped upper base 3151 attached to the upper edge of the front surface of the light guide plate 3110, and an upper base 3151 attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 to hold the light guide plate 3110 therebetween. A transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, a transparent plate-shaped left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and attached to the rear side of the left base 3153. A transparent left rear cover 3154 sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 and having a rear first left decorative substrate 3130 and a diffusion lens 3140 attached thereto, and a transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110. and a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 therebetween.

In addition, the back first effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decoration body 3161 on which the relief-like decoration is formed, and the left base 3153. , the back first left decoration 3162 on which the relief-like decoration is formed, the back first right decoration 3163 attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and on which the relief-like decoration is formed, and the guide. A rear first lower decoration 3164, which is attached to the center of the front lower edge of the light plate 3110 in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration formed thereon, and a rear first lower decorative substrate 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The light guide plate 3110 of the back first effect unit 3100 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a notch 3111 cut upward in a semicircular shape at the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. Although illustration is omitted, the light guide plate 3110 has a first pattern that emits light from the upper surface and a second pattern that emits light from the left surface. The first pattern and the second pattern are patterns different from each other. Although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the LEDs 3121 of the plurality of LEDs 3121 on the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 emit light in different modes.

The LEDs 3121 and 3131 mounted on the rear first upper decorative substrate 3120 and the rear first left decorative substrate 3130, respectively, are full-color LEDs. In addition, the rear first left decorative substrate 3130 is vertically divided into three. Since the rear first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three, the diffuser lens 3140 is also vertically divided into three correspondingly. By causing the LED 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 to emit light, the first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be caused to emit light. The pattern can be illuminated.

The back first upper decoration 3161, the back first left decoration 3162, and the back first right decoration 3163 are provided with plating layers having metallic luster. The back first upper decoration 3161, the back first left decoration 3162, and the back first right decoration 3163 are formed in strips along the upper, left, and right sides of the light guide plate 3110. there is

The rear first lower decoration body 3164 has a pair of portions extending in an arc shape concentrically with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110, and is open at the top and bottom. It is formed in a substantially annular shape. The back first lower decoration body 3164 has a plurality of three-way decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front surface. In addition, the back first lower decoration body 3164 has projections radially extending so as to pass through the parts of the three-storied decoration. These radial projections are long outward from the trident and short towards the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is formed by coating a transparent member with a vapor-deposited layer having metallic luster of a predetermined color and translucency. In the state where the LED 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 is not emitting light, the rear first lower decoration body 3164 can visually recognize the decoration on the front side in a good condition from the player side due to the metal luster deposited layer. .

On the rear first lower decoration board 3170, an LED 3171 is mounted at a position behind the part of the back first lower decoration 3164 where the tridente decoration is provided. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 are caused to emit light, the entire back first lower decoration body 3164 can be decorated with light, and at the same time, the part of the three-way decoration can be brightly decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs 3171 on the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are full-color LEDs.

When the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel plate 1110 and almost to the front above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 to display the first pattern. and the second pattern can be displayed by light emission. In addition, the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. are located near the upper edge, left edge, and right edge in the game area 5a.

In addition, the back first lower decoration 3164 is positioned directly above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decoration 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting port 2002. . This back first lower decoration 3164 can decorate the outer side of the rotary decoration 3210 positioned at the lowest specific position among the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200 . Therefore, the back first lower decoration 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotary decoration 3210 at a specific position.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 42 to 49 and the like. 42 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit mainly disassembled for each structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit mainly disassembled for each structure and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. FIG. 46 is a front view showing a drive mechanism in the second back effect unit. Figures 47(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the second back effect unit, and Figures 48(e) to (g) in the second back effect unit continuing from Figure 47. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of several rotating decorations. FIG. 49 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the second back effect unit.

The back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached inside the back box 3010 between the back first effect unit 3100 and the back third effect unit 3300 . The back second effect unit 3200 is arranged in a row on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of (here, 12) disk-shaped rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating. Each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has a shaft portion 3210a projecting rearward in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have translucency. A plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of a back second outer decorative body 3228 and a back second inner decorative body 3229, which will be described later.

The plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are composed of a plurality of (here, four) special rotating decorations 3211 and the remaining (here, eight) ordinary rotating decorations 3212 . The special rotary decorations 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (here, two) of the normal rotary decorations 3212 interposed therebetween. In this embodiment, the special rotary decoration 3211 is decorated with a trident. The special rotating decorative body 3211 is formed so that the toe portion is red and other portions are gold with metallic luster, and the whole is translucent. The ordinary rotary decoration 3212 is decorated with petals. The ordinary rotating decorative body 3212 has a petal portion formed in a pink color with metallic luster, and the other fringing portion formed in white, and has translucency as a whole.

The back second effect unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a square outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center, and an annular fixed gear portion 3220b having a diameter larger than the through hole 3220a, and a unit base. It is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3220 and penetrates back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, and the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decoration 3210 can rotate. and an annular drive ring 3221 having a plurality of shaft holes 3221a to be inserted into and an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the plurality of shaft holes 3221a.

In addition, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220, and has a back second drive motor 3222 whose rotating shaft penetrates the unit base 3220 and protrudes forward. A drive gear 3223 in the shape of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a drive motor 3222 is in mesh with the drive gear 3223 and with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221, and is rotatable on the unit base 3220. a transmission gear 3224 in the form of a spur gear attached to a rotating body gear 3225, which is fixed to the rear ends of the shaft portions 3210a of the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220; , is equipped with

In addition, the rear second effect unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a square outer shape and a through hole 3226a having a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. and an outer base 3226 provided in front of the driving ring 3221 in the through hole 3226 a of the outer base 3226 and attached to the unit base 3220 . It is attached to the front surface of an inner base 3227 having a polygonal through-hole 3227a in the center and an outer base 3226, and has a quadrangular outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the outer base 3226. A back second outer decoration body 3228 having a through hole 3228a with a smaller diameter, and a back second outer decoration body 3228 is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 in the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decoration body 3228, and the inner base 3227 has an outer shape. A back second inner decorative body 3229 having a circular and polygonal through hole 3229a in the center larger than the outer diameter of the second inner decorative body 3229, and a unit base 3220 inserted into the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. and an annular back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 attached to.

Furthermore, the back second effect unit 3200 includes a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating is positioned at the lowest specific position, and a special position that revolves while rotating. A special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is provided for detecting that the rotary decorative body 3211 is positioned at the lowest specific position.

In addition, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 and the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229. It has a rear second decoration substrate 3240 on which a plurality of LEDs 3241 are mounted on the front surface. By appropriately causing the LED 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 to emit light, the rotary decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229 can be decorated with light.

The unit base 3220 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The drive ring 3221 is formed with a plurality of shaft holes 3221 a that are the same in number as the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 . The inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions protruding toward the center are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The trapezoidally protruding portions are provided in the same number as the rotary decorations 3210 (here, 12 pieces). In this embodiment, 12 trapezoidally protruding portions are provided at angles of 30 degrees each in a clockwise direction from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

The driving ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c protruding toward the center from the inner periphery of portions corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a. Further, the drive ring 3221 extends further toward the center from the detection pieces 3221c which are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (here, two) of the detection pieces 3221c interposed therebetween. It has a plurality of (here, four) special detection pieces 3221d. That is, the drive ring 3221 of this embodiment has the same number (12 pieces) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotary decoration 3210, and the same number (4 pieces) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotary decoration 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220 .

The outer base 3226 has the same outer shape as the unit base 3220 . The outer base 3226 is transparent and flat. The outer base 3226 is divided into four parts by a vertical line passing through the center of the through hole 3226a and a horizontal line, and each part is attached to the unit base 3220. As shown in FIG.

The inner base 3227 has a polygonal through-hole 3227a whose inner circumference is the same shape and size as the inner circumference of the through-hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 . The inner base 3227 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The inner base 3227 is divided into four parts by crosshairs obtained by rotating a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center clockwise by about 20 degrees, and each part is attached to the unit base 3220. there is In the present embodiment, the divided portions of the inner base 3227 divided into four are made different from the divided portions of the outer base 3226, so that the unit base 3220 can be compared with the case where each divided portion is the same. The strength and rigidity can be improved when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to each other.

The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed to have the same shape and size as the outer base 3226 . The inner diameter of the through hole 3228a of the rear second outer decoration 3228 is slightly larger than the circumference of the drive ring 3221 on which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a are arranged. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a red circular decorative portion 3228b provided in a circular shape with a constant width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners outside the circular decorative portion 3228b. and a corner decoration portion 3228c provided in the . The annular decorative portion 3228b is decorated with stylized plant leaves arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decorative portion 3228c is decorated to imitate Karahafu. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a vapor deposition layer having metallic luster and translucency. The back second outer decoration 3228 is divided into four like the outer base 3226 .

The rear second inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter slightly smaller than the same circumference along which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the rear second inner decorative body 3229 is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227, and is formed to have the same size. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a red decoration in which stylized plant leaves are arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction so as to form a pair with the annular decorative portion 3228b of the back second outer decorative body 3228. is applied. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a vapor deposition layer having metallic luster and translucency. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four like the inner base 3227 .

The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 is formed to have a length that connects the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the front-rear direction. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 has a vapor deposition layer having metallic luster and translucency.

A rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the rear second decorative substrate 3240 . The rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the lowest detection piece 3221c of the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 46).

A special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227 and is for detecting the special detection piece 3221 d of the drive ring 3221 . More specifically, the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 has moved one position clockwise (rotated 30 degrees) from the lowermost portion of the plurality of trapezoidally protruding portions in the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220. (see Figure 46).

A plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface of the back second decorative board 3240 are full-color LEDs. The rear second decorative substrate 3240 has a rectangular outer shape, and a polygonal through-hole 3240a is formed in the center. In addition, the rear second decorative substrate 3240 is formed with an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. The back second decorative board 3240 is attached to the outer base 3226 at the portion outside the insertion hole 3240b, and is attached to the inner base 3227 at the portion inside the insertion hole 3240b. The rear second decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight parts corresponding to the four divisions of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, respectively.

Next, the movement of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described. First, in the back second effect unit 3200, the shaft portions 3210a protruding rearward from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are arranged in such a manner that the inner periphery of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 are arranged from the front. , the insertion hole 3240b of the rear second decorative substrate 3240, and between the inner circumference of the outer base 3226 and the outer circumference of the inner base 3227, and the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. While being inserted, the rear end protrudes rearward from the driving ring 3221 through the shaft hole 3221a. A rotating body gear 3225 meshing with a fixed gear part 3220b of the unit base 3220 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft part 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210 .

Among the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, four special rotary decorations 3211 are moved in the counterclockwise direction from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 when viewed from the front. A shaft portion 3210a of a special rotary ornament 3211 is inserted through the shaft hole 3221a. The remaining eight normal rotary decorations 3212 have their respective shafts 3210a inserted into the remaining shaft holes in which the shafts 3210a of the special rotary decorations 3211 are not inserted.

In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment has 4 special rotating decorations 3211 out of 12 rotating decorations 3210, as shown in FIGS. They are positioned at both ends in the vertical direction and both ends in the horizontal direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotary ornaments 3211 are positioned at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock and 12 o'clock on the watch, and the remaining eight ordinary rotary ornaments 3212 are They are located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock. In this embodiment, the 6 o'clock position is the specific position of the rotary decoration 3210 .

In this normal state, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (Fig. 46).

When the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. All rotary decorations 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in good condition except for . In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 arranged behind is viewed from the front through the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229 (the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230). Visible in good condition.

In a normal state, the rotary decoration 3210 positioned at the specific position of the lowermost 6 o'clock position is the center of the substantially annular lower back first decoration 3164 in the first back effect unit 3100. , and the outside is decorated with the back first lower decoration body 3164 . In addition, the rotary decoration body 3210 at the specific position is located behind the first start opening 2002 and can decorate the rear of the first start opening 2002 .

In this normal state, when the driving gear 3223 is rotated clockwise by the rear second driving motor 3222, the transmission gear 3224 meshing with the driving gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshing with the transmission gear 3224 are rotated. , the drive ring 3221 rotates clockwise. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotating decorative body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decorative body 3210 meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, the shaft portion 3210a moves in the circumferential direction. The rotary gear 3225 rotates about the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 (here, clockwise direction). As a result, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by the rear second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 revolve clockwise while rotating clockwise. Become.

In this embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured such that when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees, each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates once. .

As described above, when the drive ring 3221 rotates clockwise, the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 revolve while rotating. The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 47(a)).

Then, when the drive ring 3221 rotates further clockwise and the special rotary decoration 3211 approaches a specific position, the special rotary decoration 3211 moves forward in the rotating direction of the drive ring 3221. The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 47(b) to (d) and FIG. 48(e). ), see (f)).

When the drive ring 3221 further rotates clockwise and the special rotary decoration 3211 reaches a specific position, the shaft 3210a of the special rotary decoration 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. The detection piece 3221c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotation decoration 3212, which is one ahead in the rotation direction of the special rotation decoration 3211, is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. A special detection piece 3221d projecting from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 48(g)). That is, when the special detection piece 3221d is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, it is detected that the special rotation decoration 3211 is positioned at the specific position.

The back second effect unit 3200 rotates the back second driving motor 3222 in the opposite direction to rotate the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the above. It is also possible to revolve in the counterclockwise direction.

Next, the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration board 3240 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 49 and the like. A plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are high-intensity full-color LEDs. These LEDs 3241 can irradiate the player side with the emitted color regardless of the decoration colors of the rotary decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229 arranged on the front side. can. That is, depending on the emission color of the LEDs 3241, the rotating decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229 can be illuminated with appropriate colors.

A plurality of LEDs 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 are in a state (normal state) in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position, and 12 LEDs are provided at the rear portion of each rotating decorative body 3210. , 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between each rotating decoration LED group 3250, and the corner decoration part 3228c of the back second outer decoration 3228. An upper left corner LED group 3256 and an upper right corner LED group 3257 that are provided at the position, a lower left corner LED group 3258 that is provided at the lower left corner behind the side unit 2200, the starting port unit 2100 and the side and a winning hole LED group 3259 provided in the rear portion of each general winning hole 2001 of the unit 2200 .

The 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 are arranged in the clockwise direction, with the first rotating decoration LED group 3250a positioned behind the lowermost specific position, the second rotating decoration LED group 3250b, and the third rotation. Decoration LED group 3250c, fourth rotary decoration LED group 3250d, fifth rotary decoration LED group 3250e, sixth rotary decoration LED group 3250f, seventh rotary decoration LED group 3250g, eighth rotary decoration LED group 3250h , a ninth rotary decoration LED group 3250i, a tenth rotary decoration LED group 3250j, an eleventh rotary decoration LED group 3250k, and a twelfth rotary decoration LED group 3250l. The LEDs 3241 provided on each of the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 can emit light independently.

Each of the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 emits radiation from the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210 through the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210, and the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210 around the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210. and a first LED group 3251 , a second LED group 3252 , a third LED group 3253 and a fourth LED group 3254 . The four first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 that constitute one rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are provided with LEDs 3241, It is possible to emit light independently

The first LED group 3251 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 is on the revolution center side (inside) of the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210, and on the counterclockwise revolution direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotary decorative body 3210 to the revolution center side with respect to the first LED group 3251 . The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise direction side) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotary decoration 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251 . The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotary decorative body 3210 to the revolution center side with respect to the third LED group 3253 .

The 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 have a first intermediate LED group 3255a that is adjacent to the lowermost specific position in the clockwise direction, and a second intermediate LED group 3255b that is clockwise. third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, A tenth intermediate LED group 3255j, an eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and a twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l are provided.

In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits light from the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decoration substrate 3240. The rotary decoration 3210 can be decorated with light. In other words, the player can see 12 circular luminous decorations arranged on the circumference. At this time, each rotary decoration 3210 can be illuminated with a different color, or the special rotary decoration 3211 can be illuminated with a different color from the normal rotary decoration 3212 .

In addition, by causing the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 to emit light in order in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotating decoration LED group 3250 is caused to emit light, an intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decoration LED group 3250 may be caused to emit light. As a result, the light emission between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 is supplemented by the light emission of the intermediate LED group 3255, so that the player can see a smoother turning light emission effect.

Further, since each rotating decoration LED group 3250 is divided into four groups of a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254, for example, the first After the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 are illuminated, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are illuminated, followed by the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect of smoother turning or a light-emitting effect of turning in small steps. Then, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, if the above-described light emission effect is performed in accordance with the revolution speed of the rotating decorative bodies 3210, it is as if the rotating decorative bodies 3210 themselves are provided with LEDs. It is possible to show the player an effect as if the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while emitting light.

Further, in each rotating decoration LED group 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, . By emitting light in this order, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in one rotary decoration LED group 3250 . As a result, when the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped in a normal state and the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light in order, It is possible to give the player the illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (rotating) without revolving.

Further, in each of the rotating decoration LED groups 3250, for example, after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light. It is possible to show the player a luminescence effect that moves to and spreads out. Alternatively, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, the player can see a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the center. be able to.

Also, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light at the same time, the player can see the ring-shaped luminous decoration. At this time, by increasing the brightness of the luminous decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see) the shape of the rotary decoration 3210 and the like. As a result, for example, in a state in which the rotary decoration 3210 is made difficult to see by increasing the brightness and is illuminated in a ring, the rotary decoration 3210 is rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotary decoration 3211, After that, by making the rotary decoration 3210 easier to see by lowering the brightness or turning off the light, the player can see the effect that the rotary decoration 3210 is moving without realizing it.

Thus, according to the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various light emission can be performed by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240. can perform. In addition, by appropriately combining the movable effects and the light emitting effects, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get bored.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54 and the like. 50 is a front perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit, and FIG. 51 is a rear perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit. Fig. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the drive mechanism and the decoration substrate in the third back effect unit with the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearing position. The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached inside the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200 .

The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached in the back box 3010, and includes a rectangular frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the upper front surface of the unit base 3301, and the unit base 3301. A lower unit 3330 provided on the lower front surface of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided on the left front surface of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided on the right front surface of the unit base 3301. and have.

The upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes an upper vertical ring decoration 3311 attached to the upper part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the left-right direction so as to be openable, and attached to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. an upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315 attached to the base 3301; a rear third upper driving motor 3320 attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301; A drive gear 3321 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotary shaft of a motor 3320, a rotary link member 3322 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotary link member 3322 and a slide link member 3323 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 .

In addition, the upper unit 3310 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the front side, and an upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the open/closed position of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. A front cover 3325, a gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from behind, and an upper vertical ring decoration 3311 bias the slide link member 3323 in a closing direction. An upper spring 3327 is provided.

The upper vertical ring ornamental body 3311 includes a first ornamental body 3312 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth at its proximal end, and a right side of the proximal end of the first ornamental body 3312. and a second decorative body 3313 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3312 and the second ornamental body 3313 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inner side of the bowstring. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3312 and the second ornamental body 3313 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3311a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3311b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3312 has a shaft hole 3312a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3312a so as to face the second ornamental body 3313 side. A first gear portion 3312b, a link piece 3312c protruding from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip end side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3312d penetrating the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. and have A transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d.

The second ornamental body 3313 has a shaft hole 3313a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3313a so as to face the first ornamental body 3312 side. and a second gear portion 3313b that meshes with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decoration 3312 is rotated, the second decoration 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3312 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is movable such that the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are opened and closed at the tip side around the base end side.

The upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313, and the first LED 3316 behind the large diameter decoration portion 3311a and the rear side of the small diameter decoration portion 3311b. A second LED 3317 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full color LED and the second LED 3317 is a single color LED.

The rear third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotary link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the left side of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 and at the same height as the rotation axis of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 . The rotary link member 3322 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the driving gear 3321, and a crankpin 3322b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of a slide link member 3323, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3323 is positioned near the rear third upper driving motor 3320, and the tip end thereof is positioned in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the portion where the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is rotatably supported). ) and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322 . The slide link member 3323 has a transmission slit 3323a extending vertically on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3323b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the decoration 3312, and a detection piece 3323c that is detected by an upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and its lower end is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and extends toward the tip side. It is curved like Further, the slide link member 3323 has a hook portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is always biased rightward by an upper spring 3327 hooked to the hook 3323d.

In the normal state, the slide link member 3323 of the upper unit 3310 is positioned at the end of movement to the right, and the tips of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are farthest apart from each other and the upper vertical ring The decorative body 3311 is in the most open standby position. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are positioned near the upper edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301 . Also, in a normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is positioned at the bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3323 c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip end sides of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 are away from the vertical line passing through the center of rotation of each, so that the gravitational force exerted on each A rotational moment acts to make the tip ends approach each other, and the rotational moment moves the slide link member 3323 to the left through the link slit 3312d of the first ornament 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. There is a force acting to move it. The force to move the slide link member 3323 to the left acts on the crank pin 3322b via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 to move the crank pin 3322b to the left.

In a normal state, the crankpin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322). However, since the crank pin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve further in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 acts, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not close (moves to the appearance position side), and the standby position remains open. is locked in this state, and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the rear third upper driving motor 3320 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3322 is rotated counterclockwise via the drive gear 3321 by the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 rises in the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides leftward against the biasing force of the upper spring 3327 . When the slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the transmission pin 3323b at the tip moves the first decoration 3312 through the link slit 3312d so that the tip side moves downward in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3312a. While rotating in the direction, the second decoration 3313 rotates clockwise about the shaft hole 3313a by the second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. That is, the tip of the first ornamental body 3312 and the tip of the second ornamental body 3313 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring ornamental body 3311 closes).

Further, when the slide link member 3323 slides leftward, the detection piece 3323c also moves leftward, so that the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

As the crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 revolves counterclockwise, the crankpin 3322b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323a and then slides downward. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is positioned in the vicinity of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 stops. In this state, the tips of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this emerging position, the biasing force of the upper spring 3327 acts to move the slide link member 3323 to the right. A force is acting to move it to the right. In this appearance position, the crankpin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322), so that the crankpin 3322b moves downward and to the right. However, since the crankpin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crankpin 3322b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crankpin 3322b revolves. never do. In other words, in the appearance position state, even if the force from the upper spring 3327 or the like acts, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 does not open (moves to the standby position side), and the appearance position state remains closed. , and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the rear third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3312 and the second ornamental body 3313 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position side, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313) enters the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in position. In addition, when moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the appearance position to the standby position, the rear third upper drive motor 3320 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

Thus, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 can be opened and closed between the open waiting position state and the closed appearing position state by the rear third upper drive motor 3320.

Further, in this embodiment, the driving gear 3321 is rotated with high torque by driving the back third upper driving motor 3320 by a constant current driving method, and the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 is moved to the standby position and the appearing position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The lower unit 3330 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes a lower vertical ring decoration 3331 attached to the lower part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the left-right direction so as to be openable, and attached to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. a lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301; A drive gear 3341 in the shape of a spur gear attached to the rotary shaft of a motor 3340, a rotary link member 3342 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3341 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotary link member 3342 and a slide link member 3343 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 .

In addition, the lower unit 3330 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the front side, and a lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the open/closed position of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. A front cover 3345, a gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from the rear, and a lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331 bias the slide link member 3343 in a closing direction. A lower spring 3347 is provided.

The lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331 includes a first ornamental body 3332 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth at its proximal end, and a left side of the proximal end of the first ornamental body 3332. and a second decorative body 3333 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3332 and the second ornamental body 3333 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inside of the bowel of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3332 and the second ornamental body 3333 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3331a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3331b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3332 has a shaft hole 3332a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3332a so as to face the second ornamental body 3333 side. A first gear portion 3332b, a link piece 3332c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the tip end side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3332d penetrating the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. and have A transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d.

The second ornamental body 3333 has a shaft hole 3333a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3333a so as to face the first ornamental body 3332 side. and a second gear portion 3333b that meshes with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decoration 3332 is rotated, the second decoration 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3332 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is movable such that the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are opened and closed at the tip side around the base end side.

The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and the first LED 3336 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3331a and the rear side of the small-diameter decorative portion 3331b. A second LED 3337 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full color LED and the second LED 3337 is a single color LED.

A motor with high drive torque is used for the rear third lower drive motor 3340 . The rotary link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the right side of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 and at the same height as the rotation axis of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 . The rotary link member 3342 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crankpin 3342b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3343 is located in the vicinity of the rear third lower drive motor 3340, and the tip end thereof is located in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the portion where the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is rotatably supported). ) and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342 . The slide link member 3343 has a transmission slit 3343a that extends vertically on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3343b slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332, and a detection piece 3343c detected by a lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is positioned to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, and its upper end is positioned above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, and extends toward the distal end side. It is curved like Further, the slide link member 3343 has a hook portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is always biased leftward by a lower spring 3347 hooked to the hook 3343d.

In the normal state of the lower unit 3330, the slide link member 3343 is positioned at the leftward movement end, and the tips of the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are farthest apart from each other and the lower vertical ring The decorative body 3331 is in the state of the most open standby position. When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are positioned near the lower edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301 . In addition, in a normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is positioned at the bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3343 c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip end sides of the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through the center of rotation of each of them. A rotational moment acts to make the tip ends approach each other, and the rotational moment moves the slide link member 3343 to the right through the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. There is a force acting to move it. The force to move the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342b through the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 to move the crank pin 3342b to the right.

In a normal state, the crankpin 3342b is positioned above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342), so that the crankpin 3342b moves upward and to the right. However, since the crank pin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve further clockwise, and the crank pin 3342b does not revolve. no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the side of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 acts, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 does not open further, and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration 3331 side to the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated counterclockwise via the drive gear 3341 by the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides rightward against the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 . When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the transmission pin 3343b at the tip moves the first decoration 3332 through the link slit 3332d so that the tip side moves upward in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3332a. While rotating in the direction, the second decoration body 3333 rotates clockwise about the shaft hole 3333a by the second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. That is, the tip of the first ornamental body 3332 and the tip of the second ornamental body 3333 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331 closes).

Further, when the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right, so that the lower detection sensor 3344 is in a non-detection state.

As the crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 revolves counterclockwise, the crankpin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a and then slides upward, so that the crankpin 3342b moves normally. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is positioned in the vicinity of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 stops. In this state, the tips of the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this emerging position, the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 acts to move the slide link member 3343 to the left. A force is acting to move it to the left. In this appearance position, the crankpin 3342b is positioned above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342), so that the crankpin 3342b is rotated counterclockwise so as to move upward and leftward. However, since the crankpin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crankpin 3342b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crankpin 3342b revolves. never do. That is, in the appearance position state, even if the force from the lower spring 3347 or the like acts, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 does not open (moves to the standby position side), and remains closed in the appearance position state. , and the load from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3332 and the second ornamental body 3333 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position side, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 (the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333) moves into the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in position. In addition, when moving the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the appearance position to the standby position, the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

Thus, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 can be opened and closed between the open waiting position state and the closed appearing position state by the rear third lower driving motor 3340.

In addition, in this embodiment, the driving gear 3341 is rotated with high torque by driving the rear third lower driving motor 3340 by a constant current driving method, and the lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331 is moved to the standby position and the appearing position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The left unit 3350 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes a left horizontal ring decoration 3351 attached to the left part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the vertical direction so that it can be opened and closed, and a left horizontal ring decoration 3351 behind the left horizontal ring decoration 3351. A left horizontal ring decoration board 3355 attached, a rear third left drive motor 3360 attached to the upper left corner on the front surface of the unit base 3301 and having a rotating shaft protruding rearward of the unit base 3301, a rear third A drive gear 3361 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotary link member 3362 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3362 and a slide link member 3363 for opening and closing the left lateral ring ornamental body 3351 by sliding in the vertical direction by rotation.

The left unit 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a left detection sensor 3364 for detecting the open/closed position of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and a part of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 from the front side. and a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the driving gear 3361 from behind.

The left lateral ring decoration 3351 includes a first decoration 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so that the proximal end can rotate about an axis extending back and forth, and an upper side of the first decoration 3352 on the proximal side. and a second decorative body 3353 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inside of the bowel of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3351a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3351b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3352 has a shaft hole 3352a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and an arcuate shape that faces the second ornamental body 3353 around the shaft hole 3352a. A first gear portion 3352b, a link piece 3352c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the tip end side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3352d penetrating the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. and have A transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d.

The second ornamental body 3353 has a shaft hole 3353a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3353a so as to face the first ornamental body 3352 side. and a second gear portion 3353b that meshes with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decoration 3352 is rotated, the second decoration 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3352 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. As a result, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are movable so that the tip side opens and closes around the base end side.

The left horizontal ring decoration board 3355 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353, and is attached to the first LED 3356 behind the large-diameter decoration portion 3351a and behind the small-diameter decoration portion 3351b. A second LED 3357 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full color LED and the second LED 3357 is a single color LED.

The rear third left driving motor 3360 uses a motor with high driving torque. The rotary link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position below the rear third left drive motor 3360 on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the rear third left drive motor 3360 . The rotary link member 3362 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the drive gear 3361, and a crankpin 3362b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of a slide link member 3363, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3363 is located in the vicinity of the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the tip end thereof is located in the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the portion where the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is rotatably supported). ) and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362 . The slide link member 3363 has a transmission slit 3363a extending laterally on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3363b slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decorative body 3352, and a detection piece 3363c detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and the right end is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and extends toward the tip side. It is curved like

In the normal state of the left unit 3350, the slide link member 3363 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the ends of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are farthest from each other, and the left horizontal ring The decorative body 3351 is in the most open standby position. When the left lateral ring decoration 3351 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are positioned near the left edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301 . Also, in a normal state, the crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is positioned at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip sides of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 approach the vertical line passing through the center of rotation, and the center of gravity is closer to the center of rotation than the center of rotation. Located on the right. Therefore, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are each subjected to a rotational moment that tends to rotate in the clockwise direction. Since the second gear portion 3353b of the second ornamental body 3353 is meshed with each other, the rotational moments applied to them are offset, and the state of the standby position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 vertically from the side of the left lateral ring ornament 3351 via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 moves leftward in the transmission slit 3363a. It revolves so as to slide in the direction, and the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the transmission pin 3363b at the tip causes the first ornament 3352 to move upward through the link slit 3352d in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3352a. At the same time, the second decoration body 3353 rotates clockwise around the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. That is, the tip of the first decoration 3352 and the tip of the second decoration 3353 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 closes).

Further, when the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward, so the left detection sensor 3364 is in a non-detection state.

As the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 revolves counterclockwise, the crank pin 3362b slides leftward in the transmission slit 3363a and then slides rightward. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is positioned near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (to the right of the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third left drive motor 3360 stops. In this state, the tips of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are close to each other so that the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this appearance position, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 extend to the right from their rotation centers. and the second ornament 3353, a rotational moment to rotate clockwise acts on them, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3353b is engaged with the second gear portion 3353b, the rotational moment applied to each of them is canceled and the appearance position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 vertically from the side of the left lateral ring ornament 3351 via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 (the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353) moves into the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in position. When moving the left lateral ring decoration 3351 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this manner, in the left unit 3350, the rear third upper driving motor 3320 can open and close the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 between the open standby position and the closed appearing position.

Further, in this embodiment, the rear third left drive motor 3360 is driven by a constant current drive method to rotate the drive gear 3361 with high torque, and the left horizontal ring ornament 3351 is moved to the standby position and the appearance position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The right unit 3370 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes a right horizontal ring decoration 3371 attached to the right part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the vertical direction so that it can be opened and closed, and a rear side of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. A right lateral ring decoration board 3375 attached, a rear third right drive motor 3380 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301 and having a rotating shaft protruding rearward from the unit base 3301, a rear third drive motor 3380 A drive gear 3381 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3382 and a slide link member 3383 for opening and closing the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 by sliding in the vertical direction due to the rotation of the .

The right unit 3370 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a right detection sensor 3384 for detecting the open/closed position of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 and a part of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the front side. and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the driving gear 3381 from behind.

The right lateral ring decoration 3371 is composed of a first decoration 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so that the proximal end can rotate about an axis extending back and forth, and the upper side of the proximal end of the first decoration 3372. and a second decorative body 3373 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3372 and the second ornamental body 3373 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inner side of the bowel of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wavy shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3372 and the second ornamental body 3373 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3371a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3371b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3372 has a shaft hole 3372a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and an arc shape that faces the second ornamental body 3373 around the shaft hole 3372a. A first gear portion 3372b, a link piece 3372c protruding from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip end side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3372d penetrating the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. and have A transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d.

The second ornamental body 3373 has a shaft hole 3373a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3373a so as to face the first ornamental body 3372 side. and a second gear portion 3373b that meshes with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decoration 3372 is rotated, the second decoration 3373 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3372 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. As a result, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 move so that the distal end side opens and closes around the base end side.

The right lateral ring decoration substrate 3375 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373, and is attached to the first LED 3376 behind the large-diameter decoration portion 3371a and behind the small-diameter decoration portion 3371b. A second LED 3377 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full color LED and the second LED 3377 is a single color LED.

The rear third right driving motor 3380 uses a motor with high driving torque. The rotary link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position above the rear third right drive motor 3380 on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the rear third right drive motor 3380 . The rotary link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the driving gear 3381, and a crankpin 3382b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of a slide link member 3383, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3383 is located near the rear third right driving motor 3380, and the tip end thereof is located in the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the part where the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382 . The slide link member 3383 has a transmission slit 3383a extending left and right on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3383b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the decoration 3372, and a detection piece 3383c that is detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382, and the left end is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. It bends to the other side.

In the normal state of the right unit 3370, the slide link member 3383 is positioned at the upper end of movement, and the ends of the first and second decorations 3372 and 3373 are farthest apart from each other, and the right lateral ring The decorative body 3371 is in the most open standby position. When the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are positioned near the right edge of the frame-like unit base 3301 . Also, in a normal state, the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is positioned at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip sides of the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 approach the vertical line passing through the center of rotation, and the center of gravity is closer to the center of rotation than the center of rotation. Located on the left. Therefore, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are each subjected to a rotational moment that tends to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. Since the second gear portion 3373b of the second decorative body 3373 is engaged with the second gear portion 3373b, the rotational moment applied to each of them is canceled and the state of the standby position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3383 vertically from the side of the right lateral ring ornament 3371 via the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third right driving motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3382 is rotated clockwise through the drive gear 3381 by the rear third right drive motor 3380, the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 moves rightward in the transmission slit 3383a. , and the slide link member 3383 slides downward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the transmission pin 3383b at the tip moves the first ornament 3372 clockwise around the shaft hole 3372a so that the tip side moves upward through the link slit 3372d. As it rotates, the second gear portion 3373b meshing with the first gear portion 3372b causes the second ornament 3373 to rotate counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3373a. In other words, the tip of the first decoration 3372 and the tip of the second decoration 3373 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decoration 3371 closes).

Further, when the slide link member 3383 slides downward, the detection piece 3383c also moves downward, so that the right detection sensor 3384 is in a non-detection state.

As the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 revolves clockwise, the crankpin 3382b slides rightward in the transmission slit 3383a and then slides leftward. After revolving 180 degrees or more from the state of , and being positioned in the vicinity of the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (to the left of the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third right driving motor 3380 stops. In this state, the ends of the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are close to each other so that the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this appearance position state, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are in a state of extending to the left from their rotation centers. and the second ornament 3373, a rotational moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction acts on each of them. are meshed with the second gear portion 3373b of the second gear portion 3373b. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3383 vertically from the side of the right lateral ring ornament 3371 via the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third right driving motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3372 and the second ornamental body 3373 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position side, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373) moves within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. It will be in position. When the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the rear third right drive motor 3380 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this way, in the right unit 3370, the right lateral ring decoration 3371 can be opened and closed between the open waiting position state and the closed appearing position state by the back third right driving motor 3380. FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rear third right drive motor 3380 is driven by a constant current drive method to rotate the drive gear 3381 with high torque, and the right lateral ring ornament 3371 is moved to the standby position and the appearing position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

In the back third effect unit 3300 of this embodiment, an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the back third effect unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. Also, in the back third effect unit 3300 , the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are provided behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 .

In this embodiment, two-phase stepping motors are used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. .

Further, in this embodiment, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are attached, 200 pps (the width of one pulse is 5 ms). Further, self-starting is possible even when excitation is performed with a pulse of 200 pps without slow-up processing from a stopped state.

In addition, the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position is completed in 130 steps. = 650 ms], and it is possible to make it appear and retreat (appear/retreat) in 650 ms.

Next, a movable effect using the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in the back third effect unit 3300 will be described. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are normally in the standby position. ing. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are in the standby position, the rear second effect unit 3200 arranged in front is positioned on the rear side. It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decorative body 3229 and is invisible from the front (player's side).

In this normal state, when the back third upper driving motor 3320 and the back third lower driving motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, At the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other, and the three rings are arranged vertically (up and down). It can be shown to the player (see Figure 57).

Also, in a normal state, when the back third left driving motor 3360 and the back third right driving motor 3380 are driven to move the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearing position. At the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other, and three rings are arranged side by side (right and left). can be shown to the player (see FIG. 58).

Furthermore, in a normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively, the upper vertical The tip of the ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other, and the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other. A player can be shown a decoration in which rings are arranged in a criss-cross pattern (see FIG. 59).

In addition, in the back third effect unit 3300, in a normal state, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. is moved to a position halfway from the standby position to the appearance position, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313) and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (the first The end portions of the decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373) are positioned inside the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229 in the back second effect unit 3200 in a front view, and are partially facing the player side. (see Figure 60). In this state, the two ends of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through-hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, and the two ends of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear. Since the two ends appear at the right upper and lower corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229 can be changed. can.

Thus, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are combined appropriately. By moving to the appearance position with , the ring decorations arranged vertically, horizontally, or crosswise can be made to appear, and the player can see a variety of movable performances.

In addition, the first LED3316 and second LED3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315, the first LED3336 and second LED3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335, the first LED3356 and second LED3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration substrate 3355, the right horizontal ring By appropriately causing the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decoration substrate 3375 to emit light, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are decorated with light emission. Therefore, various lighting effects can be shown to the player.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63 and the like. FIG. 55 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a plurality of rotary decorative bodies in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while rotating clockwise from a normal state. FIG. 56 is a front view showing an enlarged lower part of the game board with the special rotary ornament in the back second effect unit moved to a specific position. FIG. 57 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the upper vertical ring decoration and the lower vertical ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 59 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration, the lower vertical ring decoration, the left horizontal ring decoration, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit moved to the appearance position. be. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved halfway to the appearance position.

Also, FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board showing an example of an effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the upper back third effect unit. FIG. 62 is a front view of a game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during the light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 63 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the game board is facing through the game window of the door frame.

In the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, the starter unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, etc. Since they are formed transparently, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. Back first upper decoration 3161, back first left decoration 3162, back first right decoration 3163, back first lower decoration 3164, back second effect unit 3100 in the back first effect unit 3100 in the plurality of rotations The decoration 3210 (the special rotating decoration 3211 and the normal rotating decoration 3212), the back second outer decoration 3228, the back second inner decoration 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230, etc. can be visually recognized well. can be done.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 27 and the like, four special rotating decorations 3211 out of the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 in the back second effect unit 3200 are aligned with both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the revolution orbit. , at both ends in the left and right direction. In other words, one special rotary ornament 3211 is located at the lowest specific position (the 6 o'clock position on the clock) on the revolution orbit. The special rotating decorative body 3211 positioned at this specific position is positioned in the center of the substantially circular ring-shaped back first lower decoration body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100, and the outer side is the back first lower decoration body 3164. It is in a state of being decorated by In addition, the special rotating decoration 3211 (rotating decoration 3210) at a specific position is located behind the first starting port 2002 and decorates the rear of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 56).

In addition, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are in the standby position. By being positioned outside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 in front view, the front is a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the drive ring 3221, and the back second outer side. It is covered with the decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, etc., and cannot be visually recognized from the player side.

In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind is displayed on the player side (front) through the inner side of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200. can be viewed in good condition from

The game board 5 is the first back of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The production unit 3100, the second rear production unit 3200, and the third rear production unit 3300 perform a predetermined movable production.

First, the effect using the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. As an effect using a plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. , It is possible to perform a movable effect in which a plurality (12 pieces) of rotary decorations 3210 revolve clockwise while rotating clockwise. As a result, the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 revolve around the performance image visible through the inner side of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 while rotating, so that the game area is filled with the rotating decorations 3210. 5a can be made lively, and the player can be entertained.

As described above, in a state in which the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are rotated and revolved, for example, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decoration board 3170 in the back first effect unit 3100 is lighted, the rotating decoration is placed behind. Since the substantially annular back first lower decoration 3164 around which 3210 is circling emits light, the player's attention can be directed to the back first lower decoration 3164 . In addition, since the back first lower decoration 3164 is conspicuous, a desired rotating decoration 3210 (special rotating decoration 3211) is placed in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decoration 3164 for the player. Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.

At this time, only the first rotary decoration LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position among the rotary decoration LED group 3250 may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decoration 3210 passing through the rear side of the ring of the back first lower decoration 3164 can be visually recognized well, and the other rotating decorations 3210 are difficult to visually recognize, so the back first lower decoration 3164 To make a player see a performance like a roulette or a slot by using the inside of the ring as a window, and to further enhance the feeling of excitement as to whether or not a desired rotating decorative body 3210 stops at a specific position. can be done.

Then, when the desired rotary decoration 3210 (special rotary decoration 3211) stops in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decoration 3164, as shown in FIG. Since the first starting port 2002 is provided, if the player receives the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, it makes the player think that the possibility of drawing a "big hit" is extremely high. Thus, the player can be urged to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002, and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are rotated while being driven by the back second drive motor 3222, according to the movement position of each rotary decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 are appropriately turned on. You may make it emit light. For example, when one rotating decoration 3210 is located at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, second LED group 3252, third LED group 3253, and fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decoration LED group 3250 While turning on, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the first LED group 3251 and the fourth LED group 3251 and the fourth The second LED group 3252 is turned off and the middle LED group 3255 is turned on. Furthermore, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off to turn off the rotary decoration LED group 3250, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. leave it alone.

Subsequently, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves about 22 degrees from the initial position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 are turned on to turn on the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group. 3254 is kept turned off, and the intermediate LED group 3255 is kept turned on. Then, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the initial position (the next rotary decoration 3210 is positioned at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to turn on the rotary decoration LED. Group 3250 is turned on and intermediate group 3255 of LEDs is turned off. As a result, the LEDs 3241 in which the rotary decoration 3210 is located in front are turned on, and the LEDs 3241 in which the rotary decoration 3210 is not located in front are turned off. It is possible to show the player an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while emitting light as if it were provided with an LED, and it is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in interest. .

In addition, in the back second effect unit 3200, in a normal state, all the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light with high brightness, and then the back second driving motor 3222 drives a plurality of rotating decorations. Rotate and revolve the body 3210, stop the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in a state different from the normal state, and turn off or dim the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255. can be As a result, all of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high brightness, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. By changing the position of the 3210, the player can see an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

In addition, in the back second effect unit 3200, a plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decoration board 3240 can be appropriately illuminated, so that the rotating decoration LED group 3250 can be changed from the first rotating decoration LED group 3250a. , second rotary decoration LED group 3250b, third rotary decoration LED group 3250c, fourth rotary decoration LED group 3250d, fifth rotary decoration LED group 3250e, sixth rotary decoration LED group 3250f, seventh rotary decoration Body LED group 3250g, eighth rotary decoration LED group 3250h, ninth rotary decoration LED group 3250i, tenth rotary decoration LED group 3250j, eleventh rotary decoration LED group 3250k, twelfth rotary decoration LED group 3250l, and so on, it is possible to present the player with a lighting effect as if the light is rotating in a predetermined direction, thereby amusing the player. When the rotation of the light is stopped, the expectation of the player can be heightened and the player can be entertained depending on at which position the rotation of the light is stopped.

In addition, when stopping the rotation of the light, the rotation speed of the light is gradually reduced, and in the rotating decoration LED group 3250, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group The LED group 3254 and the intermediate LED group 3255 may be turned on in order so that the light moves in small steps in the direction of rotation and then slowly stops. As a result, the positions at which the light stops are made finer, making it difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of the light will stop.

In addition, as described above, the light can be rotated (orbited), so by turning it on and off in order in the circumferential direction, you can create a light-emitting effect that measures the time like a clock, and the remaining time. Suggestive light emission effect or the like can also be performed, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in each rotating decoration LED group 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, ... You may make it light-emits in order. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 at one place, and to the player, in a state where the rotating decorative body 3210 is not revolving. The illusion of rotation (rotation) can be created, and the player can be entertained.

Further, in each of the rotating decoration LED groups 3250, for example, after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light. It is possible to show the player a luminescence effect that moves to and spreads out. Alternatively, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, the player can see a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the center. be able to.

Next, the effect using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. FIG. First, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven from the normal state to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. Move from the standby position to the spawn position. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other at the center of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are vertically ( (top and bottom) can be shown to the player.

In addition, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearing position. As a result, the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other at the inner center of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 in a front view, and the three rings are laterally ( left and right) can be shown to the player.

In this embodiment, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position, and the decoration in which three rings are arranged side by side is formed. The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are displayed in the parts inside each of the three rings in the display device 1600. A variable display of three symbol rows can be provided for suggestions. As a result, compared to the case where the three symbol rows are variably displayed while the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the vertical position of the three symbol rows is Since it is physically decorated by the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the appearance position, the symbol row that is variably displayed for the player is a game such as "big win". It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that the combination of symbols that are advantageous to the player will be stop-displayed, and the player's expectation for the game can be heightened.

Furthermore, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. And the rear third right drive motor 3380 is driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the waiting position to the appearing position. move. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 approach each other at the center of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 The tip and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other, and the player can see the decoration in which five rings are arranged vertically and horizontally in a cross shape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are all moved from the standby position to the appearance position, In front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross is formed. It is possible to increase the expectation for the "jackpot" game and suppress the decline in interest.

Also, in the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. can be For example, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are moved to their appearance positions in order, or the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring are moved. The decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 may be moved to the appearance positions in this order. As a result, the five rings are arranged in a cross shape after passing through multiple stages, so that the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not to proceed to the next stage at each stage. can entertain.

By the way, in the back third effect unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. Since it is driven by torque, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are driven in an extremely short time of one second or less (here, 650 ms ) to move from the waiting position to the appearing position or from the appearing position to the waiting position. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear and disappear in an instant, giving a strong impact to the player. can be used to entertain players.

Furthermore, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. And the right horizontal ring ornament 3371 is moved to a position halfway from the standby position to the appearing position. As a result, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313) and the tip portion of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373) are formed. However, it is positioned inside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 when viewed from the front, and can be partially visually recognized from the player side.

More specifically, in the state of FIG. 60, the two ends of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, Two ends of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear at the right upper and lower corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229 a of the back second inner decoration 3229 . As a result, the inner shape of the back second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 facing the display screen of the effect display device 1600 behind changes, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body are changed for the player. It is possible to make the player easily notice the movement of 3371, to make the player feel that something will happen, and to heighten the player's expectation for the game.

When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, only the tip portions are visible. It may be moved halfway as in the following step, and then moved to the appearance position as the next step. As a result, it is possible to make the player's heart throb depending on whether it moves completely to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small steps between it and the standby position. can be made easier to notice.

In the back third effect unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and second LED 3356 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355 The second LED 3357, the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration substrate 3375 are appropriately illuminated, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, which have moved to the appearance position side, can be illuminated in various lighting modes. , can entertain the player.

By the way, in this embodiment, in the back third effect unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position. At times, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are directly behind. A decoration image 3390 similar to that is displayed (see FIG. 61).

Also, in this embodiment, for some reason, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 is , When it becomes impossible to move to the appearance position, even if the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is executed , they remain at the standby position and are not moved to the appearance position side, and the effect display device 1600 displays a decorative image 3390 (see FIG. 61). As a result, even if a problem occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, the decoration image 3390 can be seen to make it difficult for the player to recognize the problem, so that the player can prevent the problem from occurring. By recognizing this, it is possible to avoid the feeling of discomfort caused by having to interrupt the game, and it is possible to keep the player enjoying the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the effect using the back unit 3000, the effect by appropriately combining the effect by the back second effect unit 3200 and the effect by the back third effect unit 3300 can be performed. As a result, it is possible to show the player more diverse presentations, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. In addition, since it is possible to show the player more stages of production, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited at each stage, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation and suppressing the decline in interest. can.

In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when performing an appropriate light emitting effect using the first back effect unit 3100, the second back effect unit 3200, and the third back effect unit 3300, a specific A shadow effect can be performed in which the LEDs positioned on the line are extinguished and the line is moved from one side to the other side in a predetermined direction in a short time (one second or less) so as to cross the game area 5a. (See Figure 62). Thus, by turning off the LEDs on a specific line, a dark portion (shadow portion 3050) appears on the line within the game area 5a, and the shadow portion 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel "wow" and make him feel that something will happen and concentrate on the game. Note that the shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and oblique directions.

In addition, the above-mentioned shadow effect is performed during movable effects by the rotating decorative body 3210, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371, etc. It can also be executed when the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is switched. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the next movement effect, effect image, etc., using the shadow effect as a delimiter, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the game board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is divided into semi-tubular dish upper left ornaments 271, dish upper right ornaments 276, dish center upper ornaments 312a, door frame left side ornaments 404, and door frame right side ornaments. Enclosed by body 419 and door frame top decoration 453 . In addition, in the door frame 3, the plate upper left decorative body 271, the plate upper right decorative body 276, the plate central upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are provided. To the rear, the top left decoration board 273, top right top decoration board 278, top center top decoration board 314, left side door frame decoration board 402, right side door frame decoration board 418, top center decoration board 455, top left door frame. Since the decoration board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, by properly lighting the LEDs of these decoration boards, the entire outer circumference of the door window 101a (game area 5a) can be illuminated and decorated. , the light can be moved along the perimeter of the door window 101a.

And, as described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, various light emission effects can be performed. When the LED group 3252, the fourth LED group 3254, and the LEDs of the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are illuminated in order, the player can see a light emitting effect that spreads outward from the center. can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Alternatively, if the LEDs of the decorative substrates of the door frame 3, the second group of LEDs 3252 and the fourth group of LEDs 3254, and the first group of LEDs 3251 and the third group of LEDs 3253 of the second rear effect unit 3200 are caused to emit light in this order, It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the center, so that the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area 5a.

In addition, in the back second effect unit 3200, as described above, during the light emission effect in which the light rotates (rotates) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255, on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lighting effect may be executed in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a. As a result, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which the light circulates around the entire pachinko machine 1 centering on the center of the game area 5a. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can also be combined. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. The player can be entertained, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring ornament 3311 of the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the lower vertical ring decoration of the lower unit 3330 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are placed in the central part of the game area 5a (here, the back second inner circumference of the back second effect unit 3200 The inner periphery of the decorative body 3230 is rotated outward to the retracted position, whereby the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 is positioned behind the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 of the back second effect unit 3200, and rotates. An upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and a left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are formed by a decoration 3210, a back second outer decoration 3228, a back second inner decoration 3229, and a back second inner peripheral decoration 3230. , and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (front), and the player can see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, And it is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a can be favorably viewed from the player side (front). The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can enjoy the performance image.

In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are within the range of 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds (this embodiment Peripheral control board 1510 controls rear third upper driving motor 3320, rear third lower driving motor 3340, rear third driving motor 3340, and rear third upper driving motor 3320 so as to rotate (move) from the retracted position to the appearing position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds). The third left driving motor 3360 and the back third right driving motor 3380 are driven by a constant current driving method to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring. When the decoration body 3371 is rotated, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with high torque. A large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 that have stopped due to the height, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, Since the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be rotated to the appearance position at an extremely high speed, the upper vertical ring decoration which the player did not recognize. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly appear in the central part of the game area 5a. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly and instantly appear to give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to make the player strongly think that there is something good in the game, heighten the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 drives the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive method. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque, they are quickly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position. Because the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 partially block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. , the player can immediately recognize the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position. The movement of the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can greatly surprise the player.

Furthermore, the portions between the base end side and the tip end side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. Since it is positioned behind the straight line that connects the proximal side and the distal side when rotating, the shape that extends non-linearly between the proximal side and the distal side (here, an arc) shape), when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position, they are initially 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are visible. At this time, the portion (distal side) of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, which is visible from the front, is the proximal end. Since there is a non-linear shape between the side and the tip side, the directions protruding inward from the back second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 are the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. This direction is different from the base end direction of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring ornamental body 3371 . Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are stopped halfway to the appearance position side, and only the tip side is visually recognized. When the possible effect is executed (see FIG. 60), the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 differ from the player. Since the player can be given the illusion that another decoration is appearing, it is possible to show the player more colorful performances, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are placed at the center of the game area 5a (back second inner peripheral decoration). 3230) is rotatably supported on the outside, and since it is an elongated frame shape that extends to the center of the game area 5a at the tip side at the time of appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring When the decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3351 are displayed. Since the tip side of the horizontal ring decoration 3371 is located in the central part of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the appearance position can be highlighted, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.

Further, by driving the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive method by the peripheral control board 1510, , the time when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position by high torque is 0. Since the time is within the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, there is no need to use a large drive motor with unnecessarily high torque. It is possible to suppress an increase in the space required for the drive motor 3360 and the rear third right drive motor 3380. In addition, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 and other members, and the secured space allows the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. can be made larger, and large upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can entertain the players more. In addition, since it is not necessary to use a large drive motor with unnecessarily high torque or use a complicated control circuit for outputting high torque, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

In addition, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying effect images is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and includes an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a right horizontal ring. When the ornament 3371 is rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position or from the appearing position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened so that the player can see the upper vertical ring ornament 3311. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be difficult to see. The player can see an effect in which the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 suddenly appear or disappear from the central part. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can amuse the player and amuse the player. can be suppressed.

By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 with a constant current drive method, the upper vertical ring decoration can be performed. Since the body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque, the rear third upper driving motor 3320 and the rear third lower driving motor 3340, back third left drive motor 3360, back third right drive motor 3380, upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. Although there is a risk that malfunctions may occur due to early fatigue, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Since the decoration image 3390 is caused to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 by executing the effect to be displayed, a problem occurs in them, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved (rotated) to the appearance position, the decoration image 3390 allows the player to see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. , the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 move to the appearance position, and the decoration image 3390 allows the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by showing the player the same effect as the effect by the horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit 1511 and effect display control unit 1512) controls the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are invisible from the player side. Since the player moves to the retracted position, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well, and the player can enjoy the effect image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position, an appropriate At the timing when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 move from the retreat position to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 appears. A decorative image 3390 is displayed behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. A specific effect image (for example, a plurality of pattern row) is displayed, the specific effect image is clearly partitioned by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and the specific effect The image can be made conspicuous, and the effect by the specific effect image can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

Then, for some reason, even one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control board 1510 detects all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, the lower vertical ring decorations 3331, and the left horizontal ring. Since only the movement control of the decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration are displayed. When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move from the retracted position. At the same time, the effect display device 1600 displays a decoration image 3390 behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. At the same time, a specific effect image is displayed in a portion partitioned by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (decorative image 3390) at the appearance position. Since it is displayed, the player has the illusion that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have moved to the appearance position. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3390 are similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. The player can see the same effect as the effect by the decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot move to the appearance position due to a problem, the upper vertical ring A decoration image 3390 similar to the decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be shown to the player. The decoration image 3390 can show the player an effect equivalent to the effect by the decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the decoration image 3390 can make the specific effect image stand out. This allows the player to enjoy the performance of the specific performance image, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, if any one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, The movement control of all upper vertical ring decorations 3311, lower vertical ring decorations 3331, left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and right horizontal ring decorations 3371 is paused, and the upper vertical ring decorations 3311 and lower vertical ring decorations are stopped. 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, so the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the When the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is simultaneously moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearance position. A decoration image 3390 that becomes visible by not moving to the appearing position due to a problem can be avoided from performing an effect in which one of the bodies 3371 and the decoration image 3390 that becomes visible by not moving to the appearance position due to a problem can be avoided from being performed, and giving the player a sense of incompatibility. It is possible to prevent it and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Also, when the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decoration image is displayed regardless of whether the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position. Since 3390 is displayed, an image for when a problem occurs in the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is separately provided. It is not necessary, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decoration image 3390 can be reduced.

In the peripheral control board 1510, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 detect the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, And when it is detected that the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 does not move, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped in an incomplete position due to a malfunction. In addition, only movement control is suspended, and a decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. is displayed, the player can be entertained by the decoration image 3390, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is stopped by detecting a defect, the upper vertical ring decoration Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 Motor 3360 and rear third right drive motor 3380 are not overloaded, and upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and so on. It is possible to prevent other members from being damaged, and to avoid the problem from increasing.

In addition, since the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not visible in the state of the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration is for some reason. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 can be decorated as described above. Since the image 3390 is displayed, the performance by the decoration image 3390 can be enjoyed, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration at the retreat position can be enjoyed. The player notices that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move because the body 3371 cannot be seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the retreat position (normal state), Since the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the player cannot see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 in the state of the retracted position. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made difficult to notice. When the ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration which were not visible are displayed. The appearance of the body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, amuse the player, make the player think that something good is happening, and increase the player's interest in the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 detect the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. 3371 does not move to the appearance position is detected, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the retreat position are moved upward. Since detection is performed by the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring are detected by the peripheral control board 1510. When the decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are controlled to move to the appearance position, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are still detected, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are detected. , and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have not moved, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance positions. It is possible to realize a gaming machine that can detect a malfunction and that has the above-described effects.

A decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration. 3331 , the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 , and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 may be larger or smaller. When the decoration image 3390 is made larger than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the decoration image displayed on the effect display device 1600 3390 has the advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decorative image 3390 is made smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration When the ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 were moved to their appearance position, a problem occurred, causing the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration to move. There is an advantage that the player cannot recognize the decoration image 3390 unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is stopped.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the through hole 3329a penetrating back and forth. In front of the back second inner decoration 3229, in a normal state, there are four special rotating decorations 3211 with special decorations and the remaining six decorations different from the special rotating decorations 3211. Twelve rotating ornamental bodies 3210 having a plate-like translucent property, which are composed of one ordinary rotating ornamental body 3212, extend back and forth so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a. The display screen of the effect display device 1600, which is arranged on the circumference of the revolution and which is provided behind through the through hole 3229a, faces. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotary decoration 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221, Together with the shaft portion 3210a, the rotary decorative body 3210 and the rotary gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a are arranged on a circumference (revolution circle circumference). At this time, the rotating gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the unit base 3220. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotator gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolution direction of the rotator gear 3225. At the same time, the shaft portion 3210a rotates (rotates) around the longitudinally extending axis. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 with the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality (12 pieces) of the rotary decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the same direction while rotating, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, to make the player think that something good will happen, to heighten the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest. can be made

In addition, since the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 that revolve around the axis extending back and forth are formed in a flat plate shape, the surfaces of the rotary decorations 3210 face forward, and the entire rotary decorations 3210 can be seen by the player. Since it is easy to see from the side, when these rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, the player can see how the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate round and round, giving the player a lively effect. In addition, the game can give a strong impact to the player and greatly entertain the player, thereby suppressing the loss of the player's interest.

In addition, behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotation decoration 3210, a stop position on the revolution circle (one A plurality of (12) rotating decoration LED groups 3250 that are divided in the revolving direction behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 that stop revolving at a position where the rotating decoration 3210 stops revolving at a specific position), and each Since it has a plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 composed of the intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decoration LED groups 3250, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 is at the stop position In this state, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 emit light, the rotating decoration 3210 can be decorated with light. When the LED 3241 emits light, the rotary decoration 3210 can be decorated with light. Therefore, when the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are revolving while rotating, if the LEDs 3241 of the LED group 3250 of the rotary decoration and the LEDs 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light in accordance with the revolution of the rotary decoration 3210, the LEDs 3241 emit light. Since the LED 3241 moves along with the revolution of the rotary decoration 3210, the light from the LED 3241 passes through the translucent back second outer decoration 3228 and the back second inner decoration 3229 and the rotary decoration. By irradiating forward (player side) through the body 3210, the rotating decorative body 3210 can be light-emitting decorated as if the rotating decorative body 3210 is provided with an LED 3241, and a plurality of light-emitting decorated bodies can be illuminated. By showing the player the effect of the rotating decorative body 3210 revolving while rotating, the player can be greatly entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

At this time, the plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are arranged in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 such that the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254, so that the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 can be finely illuminated according to the revolution of the rotating decoration 3210, so only the LED 3241 located behind the rotating decoration 3210 can be made to emit light easily, and the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating. It is possible to make the player more amused, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since a plurality of LEDs 3241 composed of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the revolution locus of the rotating decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. , the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the winning opening LED group 3259. When all the LEDs 3241 except for the LEDs 3241 included in the winning hole LED group 3259 are illuminated, a circular light emitting effect is shown to the player. be able to. In addition, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are arranged along the circumference of the circle. By alternately emitting light in different directions, the player can see a light-emitting decoration in which the light rotates on a circle. Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the revolution locus of the rotary decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By sequentially emitting light from the outside to the outside, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the ring of light spreads outward, or by causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light from the outside to the inside of the ring in order, the ring of light can be seen. A player can be shown or given a light emission effect that converges inward. In this way, since various lighting effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored with the various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Also, when performing a light emission effect such that the light rotates in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body 3210, each rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 Since it is divided into the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254, it is possible to make the movement of the light in the revolving direction more fine, so that the player can enjoy a light emission effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. can be shown to In addition, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotary decorative body 3210 becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made slower, and the colorful light emission effect makes it difficult for the player to get bored. can be suppressed.

In addition, by appropriately combining the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while rotating, the player can enjoy effects that could not be seen in the past pachinko machines. This can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attract the player's interest, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into a plurality of rotating decoration LED groups 3250 and a plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, each rotating decoration LED group 3250 and intermediate LED group 3255 are controlled to emit light. By doing so, compared to the case where the plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled one by one to emit light, the load on the control can be reduced, and the occurrence of overload causes a problem, which makes the player's interest. can be avoided, the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 and the like can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decoration 3210, for example, only the rotating decoration LED group 3250 is turned on at regular time intervals. The speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction differs between the case of sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction and the case of alternately emitting light from the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 at the same time intervals. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the light emitting effect, and to entertain the player with the light emitting effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, thereby suppressing the loss of interest of the player. can.

In addition, since the back second outer decoration 3228 and the back second inner decoration 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the back second outer decoration 3228 And since the LED 3241 of the back second decoration board 3240 is difficult to see from the front due to the back second inner decoration 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the existence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decoration 3210. Therefore, it is possible to easily give the illusion that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210, and the impact of the luminous decoration of the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating can be further enhanced. The performance by the decorative body 3210 can be made more enjoyable, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 includes a special rotating decoration 3211 with a special decoration (a three-way decoration), the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are caused to revolve while rotating. Depending on whether or not the special rotary decorations 3211 stop revolving at a specific position, the player can feel nervous and excited, and the player can enjoy the movable performance by the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, which is interesting. A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that one rotary decoration 3210 is positioned at a specific position on the revolution circle including the stop position, and one special rotary decoration 3211 is positioned at a specific position. Since it is equipped with a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that it is located, only the rotational position detection sensor 3231 is activated when the normal rotational decoration 3212 among the plurality of rotational decorations 3210 is positioned at a specific position. is detected, and when the special rotary decoration 3211 is positioned at a specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detect it. By combining detection by the position detection sensor 3232, it is possible to detect which of the normal rotary decoration 3212 and the special rotary decoration 3211 is positioned at the specific position. Therefore, when one of the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 is stopped revolving at a specific position, by using the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, the normal rotation decoration that revolves while rotating is detected. Since either the 3212 or the special rotary decoration 3211 can stop revolving at a specific position, it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotary decoration 3211 stops revolving at the specific position. The player can be entertained by being nervous and excited, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotary decoration 3212 and the special rotary decoration 3211 positioned at a specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotary decoration 3211 positioned at a specific position. 3221d is provided on the driving ring 3221, the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d are not rotated compared to the case where the detection piece and the special detection piece are provided on the rotary decoration body 3210. , the configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized.

In addition, since a plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be revolved while being rotated by one rear second drive motor 3222, when the rotation and revolution of the rotary decorations 3210 are driven by separate drive motors In comparison, it is possible to simplify the structure of the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, to reduce the size of the drive mechanism, and to control the movement of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210. load can be reduced. In addition, as described above, since the driving mechanism for the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be made small, it is possible to relatively widen the space for arranging the plurality of rotary decorations 3210. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be made larger to make it stand out from the player's side, and a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can strongly attract the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the shaft portion 3210a is projected further rearward than the LED 3241, the rotary gear 3225 provided at the rear end is rearward of the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also rearward of the LED 3241. , rotator gear 3225, fixed gear portion 3220b, drive ring 3221, etc. do not block the light emitted forward from LED 3241, and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be reliably illuminated.

In addition, since the rear second drive motor 3222 that rotates the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the inside of the fixed gear portion 3220b (the inside of the through hole 3229a) can be widened. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect image can be exhibited more easily.

In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the fixed gear portion 3220b and the rear second drive motor 3222 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the rear second drive motor 3222 is provided at substantially the same position as the drive ring 3221 in the front-rear direction. Since two drive motors 3222 can be provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 . In addition, since the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are flat, the thickness of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. For these reasons, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so by relatively widening the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, the diameter of the rotating decorations 3210 can be increased. It can be conspicuous from the player's side, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player to the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, and it is possible to provide other members in front and behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. By performing performances using other provided members, it is possible to show more diverse performances to the players, to make it difficult for the players to get bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a along the peripheral edge from the left side passes through the gate as the privilege imparting part provided in the game area 5a. When passing through the part 2003 or being accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the second start opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 as a privilege granting part, a predetermined privilege (for example, a general lottery in which the player is advantageous) A lottery result, special lottery result, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) are given, so that the player is made to hit the game ball B aiming at a privilege giving part such as a gate part 2003. You can play games.

In the game area 5a, an upstream space portion 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 on the right side in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and on the downstream side of the upstream space portion 2511. Since the game ball B circulates through different routes according to the striking strength and the circulation passage group 2520 is provided upstream of the gate portion 2003, the first circulation constituting the circulation passage group 2520 is provided. The probability that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 on the downstream side differs for each of the passages 2521 and the second circulation passages 2522 . Therefore, the player hits the game ball B at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 with a high probability that the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 and passes through the gate portion 2003. The hitting strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the hitting strength of entering the game ball B, and the hitting operation of the game ball B Variation can be imparted to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the desired entrance of the second circulation passage 2522.例文帳に追加, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the impingement portion 1006 protrudes inward from the peripheral edge of the game area 5a near the end on the right side of the upstream space portion 2511, and the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 is provided near the impingement portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the impinging portion 1006 (for example, a hitting strength above a certain level at which the game ball B circulates (rolls) along the periphery of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B in contact with the impinging portion 1006 enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 near the impinging portion 1006 in the circulation passage group 2520 with a high probability. Therefore, when aiming at the first circulation passage 2521, the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the blocking portion 1006, and when aiming at the other second circulation passage 2522, the strength is not in contact with the blocking portion 1006. It is sufficient to hit the game ball B with , and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be sharpened, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Then, by reducing the probability that the game ball B circulating through the first circulation passage 2521 having an entrance near the impinging portion 1006 passes through the gate portion 2003 on the downstream side, there is also an opportunity to receive a privilege. Since the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any damage, the player is asked to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521. Therefore, it is possible to give variation to the operation of hitting the game ball B, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to play the game aiming at the entrance of the remaining second circulation passage 2522 for the player. The operation of hitting the ball B can be enjoyed, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is hit, the distribution passage group 2520 (the first distribution passage 2521 and the second Circulation passage 2522) can be reliably embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

In addition, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the circulation passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the desired entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522, the upstream It is necessary to strike the game ball B into the game area 5a with the striking strength to enter the space 2511 and the desired first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522. Thus, the degree of difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B can be further increased, and the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, their entrances are adjacent to each other. Since the entrance of the distribution passage into which the ball enters is likely to be different, the degree of difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B by the player can be increased, and the player enjoys the operation of hitting the game ball B to reduce the interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are aggregated to some extent, so that the inside of the game area 5a and the center The inside of the frame of the accessory 2500 can be made relatively wide, and the player can enjoy the game within the game area 5a and the performance within the frame of the center accessory 2500, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

In the above embodiment, the group of circulation passages 2520 is composed of two circulation passages, that is, the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. However, the group is not limited to this. It is good also as what is constituted by one distribution channel.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided onto the second starting entrance guidance shelf 2423 with a high probability by contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker's lower right passage 2426 with a high probability.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the same direction as the direction in which they rotate. It may revolve in the direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the problem that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position, they Although the decorative image 3390 is displayed when the effect using , the decoration image 3390 may be displayed only when a problem occurs in them.

In the above embodiment, the rear third upper driving motor 3320, the rear third lower driving motor 3340, the rear third left driving motor 3360, and the rear third right driving motor 3380 are driven by the constant current driving method. are shown, but they are not limited to this, and since they are stepping motors, they may be driven by a 2-2 phase excitation system, and high torque can be generated.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rear third upper driving motor 3320, the rear third lower driving motor 3340, the rear third left driving motor 3360, and the rear third right driving motor 3380 are stepping motors. However, it is not limited to this, and a DC motor with a large starting torque may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear third upper driving motor 3320 rotates the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. , the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 are shown, but the drive motors are not limited to these, and may be solenoids, rotary solenoids, or the like. .

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a door frame effect display device 152 and a door frame sub-controller based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. A display unit 185 and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 are provided. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 111 .

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and errors, and an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 for displaying the number of game balls collected. and a base monitor 1310h. The main control MPU 1310a has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. An opening sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 2401 and a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detect a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2506 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003, and a large winning opening 2005. A large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving opening sensor 2403, a first receiving opening sensor 2404 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first receiving opening 2007 after being detected by the receiving opening sensor 2403, and a winning opening A second receiving port sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008 after being detected by the mouth sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, Vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibrations, and out-port sensor 3032 for detecting game balls B collected by out-port 1008 provided in game area 5a divided and formed on game board 5, etc. are mainly used as detection signals. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the control input circuit.

A detection signal from a setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In addition, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in RAM). function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area of , function as an error reset switch for clearing the error displayed on the error LED display, and set values It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. Therefore, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 includes a signal (RAM clear signal) as a RAM clear switch for transmitting RAM clear and a signal (RAM clear signal) as an error release switch for transmitting error cancellation. error cancellation signal) and a signal for transmitting selection switching of set values as a setting switching button (setting value selection switching signal). While monitoring the input of the value setting change signal, it does not monitor the input of the error cancellation signal which is the control target handled by the payout control board 633 which is not related to itself.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, through a payout control input circuit and payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are without passing through the circuit, they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the first starter sensor 2101 and the second starter sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and are passed through the main control input circuit. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the general winning opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first reception opening sensor 2404, the second reception opening sensor 2405, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the out opening sensor 3032 Each detection signal from is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. ing.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit. 2414, through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and outputs the respective drive signals to the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal Respective drive signals to the holding display, first special pattern display, first special holding number display, second special pattern display, second special holding number display, round display, etc., and other boards Output directly without intervening. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 2101, the second start sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the prize winning sensor 2403 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general prize winning slot sensor 2401 and the general prize winning slot sensor 3001 are contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so that the first starting hole sensor 2101 and the second starting hole sensor 2402 , and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start sensor 2101, the second start sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big winning hole sensor 2403 . In addition, since a large amount of game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5, the game ball B can also be detected by the out-port sensor 3032. Occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the outlet sensor 3032 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 2401 and the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning slot sensor 2401 and the general winning slot sensor 3001 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches. It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board 630 of the board unit 620 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control side Capacitor”). The main control side capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during the power-off process even when the power is off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU 1310a by a signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated when the power is turned on. Then, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. It is provided with a control section 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation section that serves a plurality of functions. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area of the RAM), function as an error reset switch for resetting the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and setting It also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching values.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is the RAM clear determination period after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a is started until the determination in step S14 in the same process is performed).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has passed (by the main control MPU 1310a, when the main control side power is turned on after the RAM clear determination period has passed. In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the setting key cylinder 1311a of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the decision key of the setting key cylinder 1311a is turned on. A period until it is determined that the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Limited.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error canceling switch becomes a valid period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period have passed. In addition, during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period, even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control part 633a (payout control MPU described later), it is invalidated. It is

Note that the period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed, as described above. However, during this setting change effective period, the main control MPU 1310a does not switch the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process described later after the RAM clear determination period has passed. Since the setting key inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of 1311a continues to monitor the rotation position of the setting key cylinder, an interrupt for permitting the start of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. Permission setting (step S52 in the main control side power-on process) cannot be performed, and the fraudulent act detection process in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching valid period is a fraudulent act undetectable period.

During this setting switching effective period, that is, the fraudulent act detection undetectable period, there is a risk that an unauthorized person may make some unauthorized alterations to the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311. FIG.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 first covers the rear side of the game board 5 as described above. In order to secure a space where the state can be opened, the structure is such that the body frame 4 must be opened largely (nearly 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2 . As a result, the main body frame 4 is largely opened (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2 during the setting switching effective period, that is, the fraud detection undetectable period. If any unauthorized modification is attempted, the fraudulent act will be extremely conspicuous in the game hall, so countermeasures against such fraudulent activity can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 350 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input.

In the payout control MPU, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in WDT") that monitors the operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud are also built in.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and controls the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to inputting a signal to the effect that the pressing operation unit has been operated via the payout control I / O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, a ball cutoff detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal indicating that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310. FIG.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 350, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are sent to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. is entered.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are paid out via the payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 and the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. is entered in

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator, A command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner, and the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 558 . This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 350), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 350 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 110, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 111, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 111, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 111, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. are electrically connected to each other, and the shooting condition 3 that game ball B is permitted to be shot based on a launch permission signal from main control board 1310 is not satisfied. , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 111. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 330 by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "payout control side Capacitor”). Due to this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off in the process at the time of power cutoff. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control MPU when the power is turned on. It is completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. An effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is provided.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 Game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board through the panel driving board 1720 in the driving board unit 1700. The game board side driving data for transmitting to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted to the game board decoration drive board serial number. Transmit from the I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or drive the first elevation drive motor 175b provided on the door frame 3, the second elevation drive motor 182, etc. From door-side drive data for outputting a signal and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, or output a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC. do.

A plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the second rear effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and a left horizontal ring decoration of the third rear effect unit 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotational position, movement position, etc. of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive board 1720 .

Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 165 of the effect operation section 160 in the door frame effect device 150 provided on the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the effect display control unit 1512 that indicates that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs various sounds from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, the upper speaker 241, etc. provided on the door frame 3. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are output in accordance with the performance. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the lower speaker 153a of the door frame 3, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 are supplied with acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4ch surround signal). .1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used together with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the game board 5, are a plurality of serial numbers different from the display commands. This is performed by an input/output port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

The panel driving board 1720 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command to the LEDs (LED 121 a, LED 122 a, LED 138 a, LED 153 c, LED 159 a, grid decoration LED 195 ) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 . , LED 213a, upper outer peak LED 224, upper outer valley LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, lattice decoration LED 245, etc.), and the game board 5 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. It is also output to the LED of each decorative board.

In addition, the panel drive board 1720 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the first up-and-down drive motor 175b and the second up-and-down drive motor 182 provided in the door frame 3 and each drive provided in the game board 5. Output to a motor, etc.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, the door frame effect display device 152 and effect display. A VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of screens displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, and data stored in the image ROM and an image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame effect display device 152 . and drawing control of the effect display device 1600 . When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display commands) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining screen configurations in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order to define the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data has an order in which the screen data drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 are transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident region of the image RAM in accordance with the progress of the schedule data. stipulated.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a method in which drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and drawing for one line held in the line buffer is performed. This is a method of outputting data to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 .

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device cannot be ignored. This will affect the speed at which the device 1600 draws. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. FIG. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. For these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order") are set, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device are set. Rendered at 1600.

A sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and the main scanning that intersects with the one direction. and a sub-scan in which main scan is repeatedly performed in the direction to be driven. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, the front side of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is displayed as main scanning. From the left to the right as viewed from the top, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels of one line. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 move to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, the next line is displayed. Based on the drawing data for one line, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 as main scanning.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Next, countermeasures against discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for boards that are treated as main boards such as the power supply board, main control board, payout control board, etc., lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front surface side, and the back surface is mounted. It is necessary to solder with the solder side which is the side. However, as described above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and hybrid game machines, but other general electronics manufacturers can downsize them. surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) is used. As a result, lead-type electronic components may be discontinued due to a decrease in production numbers. Therefore, a lead-type electronic component, which can configure an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component, can be mounted on the mounting surface of the substrate treated as the main substrate.

However, when configured as this lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component becomes larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and a part or a plurality of the lead-type electronic components has protrusions. It may be formed into a distorted outer shape (shape). When a lead-type electronic component having such an external shape (shape) is mounted on the mounting surface of a board treated as a main board, it may become difficult to arrange them on the board due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. For this reason, it may be difficult to configure an SMD type electronic component as the lead type electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, SMD-type electronic components are limitedly used as main boards. Mounting on the mounting surface may be permitted.

Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. FIG. FIG. 65 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board (b). FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which SMD type electronic components as substitutes for lead type electronic components are concentrated in a predetermined area, and the lead type electronic components are used as substitute SMDs. 67 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of a substrate on which electronic components of the type are integrated and downsized, and FIG. 67 is an enlarged view of the back surface of the main control board ( 68 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. 65 and 67, except for electronic parts necessary for explanation, other various electronic parts are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

The SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is a substitute for a lead type Schmidt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type) having the same function. is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . The SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits that make up the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input. When it is missing from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, among various sensors, always determines that there is no entry for those that transmit the entry of the game ball, and illegality is the approach of the magnet and illegal vibration. It is always determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out for things that convey a fraudulent act such as. A plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control board 1310 as lead-type electronic components.

In this embodiment, a green resist is used for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It is

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b), an SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30") is mounted. and a lead-type high-frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor MC30”) capable of removing noise voltage generated by the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is mounted in the vicinity of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It has become so. It should be noted that the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted from FIG. 65(a) for ease of viewing.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is an SMD package in which six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated. In this embodiment, an SOP (Small Outline Package) having 14 pins is adopted as an SMD package for the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter, the SMD package for the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, seven leads from two opposite sides of the SMD package body are bent outward with a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, 1.27 mm in this embodiment). After being placed on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead, each lead and the surface of the main control board 1310 ( A rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x is soldered. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is larger than the width dimension of each lead and is 0.76 mm (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). is. In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body is 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length, and 1.5 mm in height. Including the length of the protruding leads, the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Although the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the solder surface in order to mount lead-type electronic components on the main control board 1310. It is described as "back surface (solder surface) of main control board 1310" (same below).

The capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a distance between leads (so-called “lead pitch”, 5 mm in this embodiment) protruding outward in parallel straight lines. 1310x and 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads. ring-shaped land pattern (also referred to as a through hole. That is, a through hole having a land pattern (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "land"). The same shall apply hereinafter.) Of the main control board 1310 surface ( After two leads are inserted from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the mounting surface 1310x toward the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y, the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is inserted. The two leads protruding from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the surface 1310y and the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are soldered. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is larger than the diameter of the two leads and is 0.7 mm (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1.5 mm). 5 mm). A land pattern through which leads of a lead-type electronic component such as the capacitor MC3 are inserted may be referred to as a lead-type land pattern.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal, the wiring pattern for supplying the power supply, and the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed are grounded (GND). , is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a “solid ground”), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is also formed of a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. , are formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a "solid ground"), in which the other areas other than the area where various land patterns are formed are grounded (GND). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are different from each other. A plurality of through-holes (both sides (front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the main control board 1310) formed on both surfaces (top (mounting surface) and back (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 (copper The same ground (GND) is established by being electrically connected through a plated hole). The inner diameter of the through-hole is 0.3 mm. The through holes include a solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. ) and are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). There are several that have a land pattern that is In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land pattern is 0.6 mm.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 65(a), a region MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is printed in white as a silk screen. A solid line (or a solid black line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. Specifically, in the region MSLKMIC30, the lead serving as the first terminal of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the lower left side and the seventh terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is the horizontal direction in FIG. 65(a). (GND) terminal) is placed on the lower right side, the lead for No. 8 terminal is placed on the upper right side, and the lead for No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) is placed on the upper left side. .

Rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads that become the 1st to 6th terminals and the 8th to 13th terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 are electrically connected to the respective wiring patterns that transmit corresponding control signals. A rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 7th terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310. , and a rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead serving as a 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern for supplying power.

On the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols, such as "ABC") and product number (the number listed in the catalog, such as "74XXYYZZ") are engraved. , or printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small, so the surface area of the package main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is small.

In addition, the main control board 1310, which will be described later in detail, is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover having a plurality of ventilation holes for heat dissipation and a transparent base. This heat-dissipating air vent can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

Then, when confirming the product numbers (the numbers listed in the catalog) of the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 ( The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (the number listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 when viewing the (mounting surface) side through the transparent cover. is small and difficult to see.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an information area is provided on the right in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC30 in FIG. The size of the MIC30 part number (listed in the catalog) MSLK MIC30p is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the part number (listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as printing. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, the white (or black) silk-screen printing is printed in white (or black) so as to be easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferably printed with As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

Also, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 is arranged near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. (The direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity.) is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30 A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the upper right. Specifically, the region MSLKMC30 is arranged such that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are arranged in the vertical direction in FIG. It instructs to insert the ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead into the lower ring-shaped land pattern paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern, respectively.

The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The ring-shaped land pattern on the lower side is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 .

Here, the advantages of mounting SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate will be briefly described. As described above, SMD type electronic components can be made smaller than lead type electronic components. can be extremely suppressed compared to the electronic component mounting density when lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Therefore, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead type electronic component on the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since the SMD type electronic components are small, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted, and to reduce the lead type electronic component to the SMD type electronic component. The area between the replaced parts can also be increased (that is, the electronic parts can be mounted in such a manner that there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate due to the replaced parts). As a result, SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board can be viewed from multiple directions, so unauthorized modification of SMD type electronic components It is possible to check the mounting state (soldering state) with the electronic component, and the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns to the SMD type electronic component. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to the detectability of tampering.

In addition, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted, and also to increase the area between the components replaced by the SMD type electronic components instead of the lead type electronic components. Therefore, for these areas (board surface (mounting surface)), the SMD type electronic component product number (the number listed in the catalog) is stamped on the SMD type electronic component package body surface or It is possible to print in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the printed product number (the number listed in the catalog), and this product number (the number listed in the catalog) number), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) can also be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the ease of recognition of SMD type electronic components.

When the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, the distance between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate is extremely short (for example, Schmidt trigger In the inverter MIC 30, the distance between the back surface of the body and the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm. There is a problem that even if a fraudulent act of forming some kind of illegal circuit is performed in the gap between the mounting surface and the mounting surface, it is difficult to find such a false circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing the formation of some kind of illegal circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

A configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals is not arranged at all in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30) A configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals is not arranged at all in the area passing through the .

In the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, a configuration is adopted in which no wiring pattern for electrical connection with the ground (GND) and no wiring pattern for supplying power are arranged. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30). A configuration is employed in which neither a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND) nor a wiring pattern for supplying power is arranged in the area passing through the .

A configuration is adopted in which no through holes are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), through holes MTH are arranged in the upper right and upper left of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, and the main control board 1310 surface corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration is adopted in which no through-hole MTH (inner diameter of through-hole: 0.3 mm) is arranged in the (mounting surface) area (in other words, the area passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30). As described above, the through-holes MTH are electrically connected by holes (copper-plated holes) passing through both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. can be set to the same ground (GND). In addition to the through-holes MTH, the main control board 1310 also has a plurality of through-holes MTH' (not shown) for routing various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control substrate 1310. Although present, such a through-hole MTH' also passes through the region of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, it passes through the lower portion of the body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30). A configuration in which through holes MTH' are not arranged at all in the region where the through holes are formed is adopted. The through hole MTH' (not shown) has an inner diameter of 0.3 mm and an outer diameter of the land pattern of 0.6 mm.

A wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of an SMD type electronic component is formed in a region on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. adopted a configuration in which the electronic components are not pulled out to the outside. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In other words, it is not arranged at all in the region passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, but is arranged from above or below the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30.

In order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component to the other lead, the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface) ), the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are not arranged at all. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In other words, it is not arranged at all in the region passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, but is arranged from above or below the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30.

By soldering each lead of an SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land pattern. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out without the Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(a), each lead of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to form a land pattern. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out without passing through each wiring pattern electrically connected to the . In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to illegally form a new circuit such as a short circuit or a disconnection circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. can be difficult. In addition, since various wiring patterns for SMD type electronic components can be visually observed, it is possible to discourage a fraudulent person from providing an illegal circuit to SMD type electronic components. can be done. Therefore, tampering with SMD type electronic components can be prevented.

In addition, by completely not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the body of the SMD type electronic component and this SMD A control signal to the SMD type electronic component so that an unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface of the main body of the type electronic component and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface). and an illegal control signal to another IC cannot be combined and used in the area of the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

In addition, by completely not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, an unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) can be detected. As for the type, it is easy to arrange control signals between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. You can make it impossible to choose things.

In addition, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in a region of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not leading the SMD type electronic component to the outside, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits the wiring pattern led to the outside.

Moreover, by soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land pattern. In order to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits the wiring pattern, it is impossible to extract the control signal from a different part from each lead of the SMD type electronic component. can do.

In addition, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead and the other lead among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding surface of the substrate ( By not arranging the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the mounting surface), the wiring patterns electrically connected to the leads of the SMD type electronic component can be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By arranging them, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the leads. Among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, unused leads (also referred to as "empty terminals") are electrically connected to a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND). Alternatively, when electrically connecting to a wiring pattern that supplies power, placing an SMD type electronic component from above or below prevents the formation of an unauthorized circuit around an empty terminal. can be done.

In addition, by arranging no through holes in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of this SMD type electronic component can be To prevent control signals from being taken out through through-holes so that unauthorized other ICs (SMD type electronic components) are not mounted between the back surface and the corresponding front surface (mounting surface) of the board. It is possible to prevent unauthorized other ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through-holes, and the through-holes are used as through-holes for control signals to flow from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. It can be made unavailable for retrieval.

In addition, by not arranging wiring patterns electrically connected to the ground (GND) and wiring patterns for supplying power in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, , An unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. It is possible to prevent the IC from becoming a driving source for other unauthorized ICs.

[6-4a. Product number visibility measures by SMD package]
Next, a configuration will be described in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate. Since SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized as described above, the size of the board itself can also be miniaturized by collectively mounting them. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as the main board, and when the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and viewed visually, the SMD package is used to measure the visibility of the product number. Another configuration (hereinafter referred to as "configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the second and third embodiments") will be described. 66(a) and 66(b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. ) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are omitted for the sake of clarity.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to second embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the leads are applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including orientation designation) for disposing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is a solid white line (or a black line) as silk printing. ), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other electronic components, alternative SMD-type electronic components having the same functions are aggregated on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310′. ) 1310x′. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310' are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for the visibility measure of the part number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. .

The main control board 1310' has a straight line that passes through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the main control board 1310'. and a part arrangement area 1310xa' for arranging various connectors, and the part number and part number (listed in the catalog) are provided in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' on the right side of the center line. number) is formed as a parts list area 1310xb' which is an information area written like a parts list of electronic parts arranged in a manner.

Specifically, in the component arrangement area 1310xa′, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (other plural connectors not shown), a resistor MR0 ~ MR4 (other resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other various IC) is mounted. In the component placement area 1310xa′, a white solid line (or a black solid line) is printed as a silkscreen to indicate the position (orientation may also be specified) at which these various electronic components and various connectors are to be placed. , and in the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors, the corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In addition, various connectors are of the lead type. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing in the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the accompanying reaction force of the wiring acts on the connector) to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the substrate.

In the parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number and the size of the part number are larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black) as A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog).

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be silk-screened in white (or black). Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, notes regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a note such as "The main control board is a security-critical board and should be handled with great care" may be used to draw attention.

In this way, the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310' can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa' and the parts list area 1310xb', so that the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' It is possible to make it easy to recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the device.

Instead of the silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the foil-extracted area and the foil-extracted area in the configuration for the visibility measure of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment to be described later. Characters may be employed, and a resist removal region using two coats of resist and white resist removal characters using two coats of resist in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for visibility measures of the product number. and may be adopted.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to third embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the leads are applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including orientation designation) for disposing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is a solid white line (or a black line) as silk printing. ), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. An area is provided in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

On the other hand, in the structure of the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other electronic components, substitute SMD-type electronic components having the same functions are aggregated on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310′. ) 1310x′. The size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced by integrating the SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310′ are the horizontal Only the dimensions are half the length (vertical dimension and thickness dimension are the same).

Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. These various electronic components and various connectors are arranged in the component arrangement area 1310xa' formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the SMD package according to the second embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number. (In other words, areas not shown that indicate the positions (orientation designations may also be included) for arranging these various electronic components and various connectors are the same arrangement and are printed in white (or , black).), and the part numbers corresponding to the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors are also printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the same arrangement. In addition, various connectors are of the lead type. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing in the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the accompanying reaction force of the wiring acts on the connector) to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the substrate.

On the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is a parts list which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration for the visibility measure of the part number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. In the area 1310xb′, a white (or black) silk-printed part number and a part number (listed in a catalog) are printed in white (or black), and a white (or , black). The size of the part number and part number (the number listed in the catalog) is compared to the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. Large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog). The product number (the number listed in the catalog) and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black). Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, notes regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a note such as "The main control board is a security-critical board and should be handled with great care" may be used to draw attention.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', each lead of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (shown as part number "MIC1" in the figure) and lead-type electronic components are mounted. The leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. The part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are the main control board 1310' so as not to overlap (avoid) this part. is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the parts list area 1310xb' formed in .

In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' is used as an area for arranging components, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is used for the part number and the part number (listed in the catalog). ) are used as an area for use as a parts list of electronic parts arranged in an aligned manner, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' and the back surface of the main control board 1310' Since the role of (solder surface) 1310y' can be distinguished, various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' can be easily recognized.

In addition, by integrating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required for mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', and the number of soldered portions is reduced. The solder surface 1310y' can be formed as a flat surface.

In addition, since various leads of lead-type electronic components protruding from the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' are soldered, when light from a fluorescent lamp or the like hits them, they are reflected and feel dazzling. Although it may be difficult to see the attached portion, as described above, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' for soldering. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of soldered portions, even if the flat surface is exposed to light from a fluorescent lamp or the like, This eliminates the problem of difficulty in visually recognizing a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which silk-printed part numbers and part numbers (listed in catalogs) are aligned.

Instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, which will be described later, is used to improve the visibility of the product number. A foil-extracted area and foil-extracted characters may be employed in the configuration, and a resist-extracted area and a two-time coating using resist in the configuration for visibility measures of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment. It is also possible to employ white resist-extracted characters using a resist.

By the way, general electric appliance manufacturers use multi-layer substrates in which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, the main control board and payout control board used in game machines are two-layer boards (double-sided board ) is adopted, and it is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, regardless of whether they are lead-type electronic components or SMD-type electronic components. For example, in order to improve security, it is necessary to mount a ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and lead-type electronic components can be mounted on the main control board. In some cases, SMD type electronic parts are not used, and lead type electronic parts are mounted.

When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board Compared to the case where only lead-type electronic components are mounted on the substrate, the number of leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the dispensing control board is reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the area used as the area for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the payout control board, and also acquire the area used as the area used for other functions. can be done.

Therefore, for example, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors are not mounted on the main control board that is produced as a mass-produced machine in the area on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board where the area has increased as described above. A mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' (see FIG. 66(b)) can be provided in which various land patterns for mounting and pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, since SMD type electronic components are not mounted on various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya', various lands in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya' The pattern and the pad pattern become non-mounted patterns, and the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' becomes an empty area.

When such a non-mounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are controlled by the area where the non-mounted pattern is formed. and the routing of various wiring patterns are subject to restrictions. The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used without being subject to restrictions on the placement of various electronic components and various connectors and the routing of various wiring patterns on the mounting surface.

In addition, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, it cannot be seen from the front surface (mounted surface) of the main control board, and the existence of the unmounted pattern can be hidden. , is preferred for security reasons.

It should be noted that part of such unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience' sake. For example, a connector (SMD type connector) may be easier to connect with wiring if it is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Further, part of such unmounted patterns may be formed as lead-type electronic components or lead-type connectors for convenience. For example, there may be a case where strong soldering strength is required, such as a connector that is inserted and pulled out many times.

Next, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the surface area of the small Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, which is an SMD package, is small. ) and another configuration of the present invention in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) is small and difficult to see, and the visibility of the part number is taken by the SMD package (hereinafter referred to as "fourth to sixth embodiments. The configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure using the SMD package” will be described. 67(a) to (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment"). ) are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to fourth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 at the position (orientation is also specified) as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed so that it is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that becomes ). It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. An area MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x. (or a black dashed line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and on the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place them near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased and printed.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number MSLKMIC30p is provided on the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the product number (number listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body. Therefore, the product number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be visually recognized with certainty.

The product number MSLKMIC30p may be the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility of the product number, or may be larger. may This is because various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p and place it near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic parts are mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p can be increased for printing.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, the white (or black) silk-screen printing is printed in white (or black) so as to have a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferably printed with As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. At a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 where the capacitor MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity), the region MSLKMC30' is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing. Along with being printed, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and in the upper left corner. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the part number is reduced in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it near the corresponding electronic component and print it, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the component number is increased. This is because it can be printed as

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to fifth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 at the position (orientation is also specified) as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed so that it is placed near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that becomes ). It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. An area MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is indicated by a dashed line as a foil extraction area at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310. In addition, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and in the upper left corner as foil-cut letters.

In the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the foil-extracted area is a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns. This is an area formed by making a hole and removing the copper foil around it. A region MSLKMIC30' formed as a foil-cut region has a notch portion 1310yMIC30 in a part on the left side in FIG. 67(b). As a result, the region MSLKMIC30′ becomes a katakana U-shape, and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 through the notch 1310y MIC30 and the U-shaped region It can be electrically connected to the inner region of the MSLKMIC 30'. Since the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 corresponding to this mounting area is grounded (GND). This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to noise (strengthened against noise) by securing the area of .

The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part numbers formed as foil-cut characters are formed as foil-cut characters larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place them near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form foil-cut characters.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number MSLKMIC30p is provided on the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a foil-cut letter so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number listed in the catalog). The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

The product number MSLKMIC30p formed as foil-cut characters is the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be there, or it may be large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is reduced in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it near the corresponding electronic components for printing, no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because it is possible to form foil-cut characters.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be formed as foil-cut characters. In this case, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 should be formed as foil-cut characters so that the size is easy to see. is preferred. As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. A region MSLKMC30′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is to be arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed as a foil extraction region by a dashed line at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 where the capacitor MC30 is located. ' and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as foil-cut letters on the upper left. In the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the foil-extracted area is a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns. This is an area formed by making a hole and removing the copper foil around it. The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part numbers formed as foil-cut characters are formed as foil-cut characters larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place them near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form foil-cut characters.

In addition, the wiring patterns forming the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are electrically insulated from various electronic components, and also include wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various wiring patterns. It is formed electrically insulated from the land pattern and solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 .

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to sixth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 at the position (orientation is also specified) as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. An area is provided in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility of the product number, green is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The entire surface is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, and the region MSLKMIC30′ is painted twice in white. The part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed by a dashed line as a white resist removal area using a resist, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30' is in the upper left. It is formed as an outline character.

Further, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, near and below the region MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as white resist-cut characters using two-coat white resist so that the size is easy to see compared to the size (the number listed in the catalog).

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The region MSLKMC30′ indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is the white resist removal region using the white resist applied twice. , and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30' and in the upper left corner as white resist removal characters using double-coated white resist.

Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with the white resist as the first of the two-coat white resist (that is, the two-coat white resist). For the first time, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely coated with a white resist except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is, as the second coat of white resist applied twice, at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. , a region MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line shape, and the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is located in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and to the upper left. is masked as characters without white resist, and an information area is provided near and below this area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area, the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as characters without white resist. , and an area MSLKMC30 indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ' is masked as a white resist removal area in a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked as white resist removal characters in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and on the upper left.

In this masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with white resist except for various land patterns. In other words, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns.

As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer, and the white resist of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is white. A part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a resist removed area by a dashed line, and a part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist removed characters. MSLKMIC30p is formed as white resist characters, a region MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed by a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is indicated. It is formed as a white resist removal character. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as characters with white resist removed, the part number is formed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white characters without resist.

When the product number MSLKMIC30p is formed as characters without white resist, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number. may be the same as or larger than This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is reduced in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic components for printing, no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because the characters can be formed as white resist removed characters.

The product number (the number listed in the catalog) and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-cut characters. In this case, the characters are formed as white resist removed characters so as to have a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferred. As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as characters without white resist, the characters are printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white characters without resist.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured such that it is solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 (mounting surface) is silk-printed to indicate the positions (which may also include specifying the orientation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed with dark solid lines such as dark green, black, gray, etc., and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as silk printing in dark green, black, gray, etc. are printed as dark characters. With this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other substrate are coated with green resist except for various land patterns. A feature that the control board 1310 can be highlighted can be provided. Also, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (when the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) is also written in addition to this ) may also be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by silk printing.

The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured to be printed by silk screen printing using two different color resists in which the color of the resist (background) and the color of the resist for the second time are different. As the first time (base), the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed in white, except for various land patterns, by silk printing. Main control board 1310 for the second time while masking the area indicating the position (orientation may also be specified) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components. The entire surface (mounting surface) of , except for various land patterns, may be silk-screen printed in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red. Even with this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other substrates are coated with a green resist, except for various land patterns, so that the other substrates are mainly It can have a feature that the control board 1310 can be highlighted. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize the area indicating the position (orientation designation may be included) of various electronic components and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured such that it is solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, an area indicating the position (orientation may also be specified) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 A solid line is formed as a white resist removal region, and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . In addition, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols)) is also It may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 as white resist-cut characters.

[6-4b. Anti-tampering measures for SMD type electronic components]
Next, miniaturized electronic components called SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and are replaced with illegal electronic components to acquire illegal game balls. I will explain the point of preventing the act.

As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension of 5.3 mm as the size of the SMD package body. is 10.8 mm, the height is 1.5 mm, and the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm, including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from being illegally altered to acquire illegal game balls. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body having a plurality of pores and a transparent base body. In the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. 68, a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw of a crimping portion 1303 or the like. This crimping part 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. Main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping cover body 1301 and base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of crimping part 1303 using one sealing mechanism. must destroy its sealing mechanism. In other words, the structure is such that the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire in the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegally removed. If a game ball is replaced with an electronic component that is not suitable for such a purpose, there is a risk that a person who makes such unauthorized alterations may acquire an illegal game ball.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in this embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. A configuration was adopted. As a result, even if the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire attached to the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be removed. The trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be removed from the main control board box 1320 through the vent 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits that make up the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input. Then, the main control MPU 1310a, of the various sensors, always determines that there is no ball entry for those that transmit the entry of a game ball, and always detects fraudulent actions such as the approach of magnets and fraudulent vibrations. It is determined that a fraudulent act is taking place. As a result, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and if the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is missing, a person who makes unauthorized alterations will not be allowed to enter the ball. By maintaining the state, illegal game balls will not be acquired, and by reporting fraudulent activity, the fact that illegal modifications have been made will be communicated to the hall computer of the game form (hall) and the game will be played. The information can also be sent to a staff member such as a store clerk in the hall. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that a fraudulent act is always taking place with respect to sensors that report fraudulent activity such as the approach of magnets and fraudulent vibrations, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a firing permission signal as described above. is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched toward the game area 5a. It cannot be done at all.

In the above-described embodiment, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD type electronic component. For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the SMD type resistor peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and passes through the ventilation hole 1301z to the main control board box 1320. The inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z must be smaller than the resistance of the SMD type so as not to protrude from the inside of the .

Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310, it is possible to visually check whether it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 or not. It may be difficult to determine Also, when the SMD type resistor peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 protrudes from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z, the inside lower side of the main control board box 1320 Since there is no trace of the SMD type resistor that has peeled off, it becomes more difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 .

Therefore, when a JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type is adopted as an SMD type resistor, the 2012 type has a length dimension of 2.0 mm and a width dimension of 1.2 mm. With such a small SMD type resistor, even if there is a problem that the main control board 1310 is bent and peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it can be removed from the inside of the main control board box 1320. In order not to protrude to the outside, the inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller one of the length dimension and the width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, 1.2 mm of the width dimension). (here, for example, 1.0 mm).

As a result, even if the small SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to visually check the peeled-off small SMD type resistor inside the main control board box 1320, and if the main control board box 1320 is shaken up and down or left and right, this A small chipped SMD type resistor collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 and the main control board 1310 to generate a sound, and this sound provides an opportunity to recognize the small chipped SMD type resistor. Obtainable. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, when electronic parts such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are used instead of lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, makes the inner diameter of vent 1301z smaller than the smallest of these dimensions.

In this way, even if small SMD type electronic components are peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310, they can be reliably ejected from inside main control board box 1320 to the outside through ventilation hole 1301z. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of discovering the defect that the SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the bending of the main control board 1310 .

In the above-described embodiments (including the configuration of the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments for visibility of the product number), SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Although the point has been described, SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board treated as the main board such as the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633 .

[6-4c. test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing institution and cannot be shipped to the gaming hall unless it is approved by the specific testing institution. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals related to games. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically and parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). , When the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, it is normally mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and on the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. A test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching a test harness to a test connector 1310k is formed. The test harness cover body side opening 1301k is not formed in the transparent cover body 1301. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-produced machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 .

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institute, the testing connector 1310k is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 in the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya. ' (see FIG. 66(b)), and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. We adopted the configuration to form As a result, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, or even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine shipped to game halls, the surface of the main control board 1310 Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the (mounting surface) is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 can be increased.

In addition, by configuring in this way, in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, the test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5, and then Subsequently, a test harness electrically connected to a test apparatus installed in a specific test institute is passed through a test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in a transparent base body 1302 to the main control board. It is electrically connected to a test connector 1310k mounted on a mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' on the back surface (solder surface) of 1310. FIG. Subsequently, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200 . In this state, the test harness can be sandwiched and held between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that the test harness can be moved toward the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibration caused by the movable body operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, it is possible to prevent twisting and disconnection of the test harness for extracting various important signals related to the game in the test of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel with the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the vertical direction). However, right-angle SMD type connectors (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) were mainly used. The side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 (transparent cover body 1301 A test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the side wall facing the test connector 1310k among the left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the upper side wall of the may be adopted. Even with this configuration, the main Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 can be increased. Also, as preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, the test operator first performs the specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. A test harness electrically connected to a test device installed in an engine is attached to the rear surface (solder surface) of the main control board through a test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in a transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the mounted test connector 1310k.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a game control device (game control board) is provided with a test firing test terminal (test connector) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a test device in a specific testing institution is connected. (for example, JP-A-2013-128621 (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, the test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when it is tested by a specific testing institution, whereas when it is used in a game hall Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board, it becomes an empty area, so there is a problem that the freedom of arrangement of various electronic components on the surface of the game control board cannot be increased due to this empty area.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, the surface mount type electronic components in the game machine described in this document may have identifiers such as product numbers corresponding to the surface mount type electronic components. There is a problem that the identifier is difficult to visually recognize due to its small size.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mounted electronic components in the game machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface-mounted electronic components may be removed by some illegal means. There is a risk that an illegal game ball may be obtained by removing it from the game control board and replacing it with an illegal electronic component.

Further, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which a tactile switch or the like is provided on a substrate so that a pressing operation part can be operated and the switch can be sensed to be turned on or off by a click feeling at the time of operation. JP-A-2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 21)). By the way, the electronic parts such as the tact switch described in this document are of a lead type in which each lead is inserted into a through hole provided in the substrate from the front surface to the back surface of the substrate and soldered on the back surface side of the substrate. electronic components. When such a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, for example, when the board bends as the lead-type electronic component is operated, the board bends. There is a risk that the soldered parts of other electronic components mounted on the board may come off and cause electrical problems.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which various control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back surface of the game board (for example, JP-A-2013-128621 (paragraphs [0032] to 3)). By the way, the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board that determines whether or not to give a profit to the player. Preventive measures are required.

Also, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mounted components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mounted components in the gaming machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, the surface-mounted components are mounted in the area of the surface of the game control board. If the wiring pattern is routed, the distance between the back surface of the surface-mounted component and the surface of the game control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is modified by some unauthorized means, it will be difficult to see, and the surface-mounted type electronic component There arises a problem that it is impossible to prevent fraudulent acts against

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a main control board for controlling a game is arranged on the back side while being housed in a case (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-214975 (paragraph [0030], paragraph [0031], and Fig. 2) By the way, like the game machine described in this document, the main control board is an important part for controlling the game, so it is housed in a case and sealed as a crime prevention measure. It is placed on the back side, and it is required to improve the crime prevention performance for important items in terms of crime prevention.

[Compatible with inspection machines for main control board surface mounting]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of how the inspection machine responds when SMD type electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 . FIG. 69 is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and a diagram (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board seen through the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board. , and is a schematic diagram (c) of a cross section taken along line WW in (a). Note that FIG. 69 omits various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") used for explanation for the sake of clarity of the drawing, and electronic parts such as capacitors are omitted. , and various foil-punched areas are also omitted for clarity of the drawing.

When performing an electrical test (function tester (so-called "FCT") or in-circuit test (so-called "ICT")) of the main control board 1310 on which only lead-type electronic components are mounted, the main control board 1310 The tip of the contact probe of the jig in the inspection machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "contact probe") is brought into contact with the lead of each electronic component to be mounted. In this electrical inspection, it is recommended that the outer diameter of the land pattern in contact with the contact probe be equal to or larger than the minimum contact probe contact diameter (1.5 mm in this embodiment), and between each land pattern (that is, one land pattern and the center point of another land pattern) is recommended to be at least the contact probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in this embodiment).

It should be noted that a through-hole having a normal land pattern capable of routing a wiring pattern on both sides (surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310 (hereinafter referred to as "normal through-hole") ), the outer diameter of a normal land pattern is 0.6 mm as described above, which is less than the contact probe minimum contact diameter (1.5 mm in this embodiment). Therefore, although a normal land pattern may be able to come into contact with the contact probe, it cannot be used in electrical inspection considering the electrical connectivity.

However, when SMD type electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to the lead type electronic components, the surface area of the pads to which the leads of the SMD type electronic components are soldered is extremely small. Since the distance between leads (lead pitch) of SMD-type electronic components is extremely narrow, when contact probes are brought into contact with the leads of SMD-type electronic components, they also come into contact with other leads adjacent to this lead. There is a problem that the contact probes used when only lead-type electronic components are mounted on the 1310 cannot be diverted.

When an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the test pads electrically connected to the leads of the SMD type electronic component are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or on the peripheral control board 1510. By providing the contact probes on the back surface (solder surface), the contact probes can be brought into contact with the test pads even if the lead-to-lead distance dimension (lead pitch) of the SMD type electronic component is extremely narrow.

However, the main control board 1310 differs from the peripheral control board 1510 in that the test pad is placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 in accordance with the rules and agreements unique to gaming machines (rules regarding certification of gaming machines, model testing, etc.). And it is prohibited to provide on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 .

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 69A, a logic IC SMD1 that is an SMD type electronic component (hereinafter referred to as "SMD type electronic component SMD1") and a logic IC SMD1 that is an SMD type electronic component ICSMD2 (hereinafter referred to as "SMD type electronic component SMD2") is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the two SMD type electronic components SMD1 and SMD2 form a logic circuit. A case where it is formed will be described.

The two SMD type electronic components SMD1 and SMD2 are the same SMD package (SOP14) as the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 described above, and the lead serving as the No. 1 terminal is located on the lower left side, and the No. 7 terminal (ground (GND) terminal). The lead for terminal 8 is arranged on the lower right side, the lead for terminal 8 is arranged on the upper right side, and the lead for terminal 14 (power supply terminal) is arranged on the upper left side. Leads are formed to protrude outward by bending with a distance between leads (so-called “lead pitch”, 1.27 mm in this embodiment), and the surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead ( After being mounted on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x, each lead and a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are formed respectively. soldered. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is larger than the width dimension of each lead and is 0.76 mm (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). is. In this embodiment, the SMD package body has a width dimension of 5.3 mm, a length dimension of 10.8 mm, and a height dimension of 1.5 mm, and protrudes from two sides of the SMD package body. Including the length of the leads, the width dimension of the two SMD type electronic components SMD1, SMD2 is 7.8 mm.

An SMD type electronic component SMD1 and an SMD type electronic component SMD2 are mounted on a surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a logic circuit is formed by the two SMD type electronic components SMD1 and SMD2. A wiring pattern for electrically connecting the leads of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 is formed on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310. becomes. In this case, as described above, since the lead-to-lead distance dimension (lead pitch) of the SMD type electronic component is extremely narrow, the contact probe is brought into contact with the lead of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 or the SMD type electronic component SMD2. Then, this lead comes into contact with other leads adjacent to it, and the contact probes used when only lead-type electronic components are mounted cannot be diverted.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b), the wiring pattern in which the leads of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the leads of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 are electrically connected has , the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310 and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y side of the main control board 1310 are connected via through holes having partially paired land patterns for inspection machines. are formed on the copper foil surface.

Specifically, the wiring pattern TR1 electrically connecting the lead serving as the 1st terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 13th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 is mainly a wiring pattern. Instead of forming a straight or bent path directly on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, a lead serving as the first terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and an SMD type Although the lead serving as the 13th terminal of the electronic component SMD2 is arranged in the vicinity, the wiring pattern TR electrically connected to the lead serving as the 12th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 becomes an obstacle. Therefore, as a normal wiring pattern routing, one end is electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern soldered to the first terminal lead of the SMD type electronic component SMD1, and the other end is for the inspection machine. A wiring pattern TR1a electrically connected to a through hole TR1at having a land pattern is electrically connected at one end to a rectangular land pattern soldered to a lead serving as the 13th terminal of an SMD type electronic component SMD2. and a wiring pattern TR1b electrically connected to a through hole MTH' (ordinary through hole MTH') having a normal land pattern at the other end thereof is a copper wiring pattern TR1b on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310. Each of the through holes MTH' (regular through holes MTH' ) is formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y side of the main control board 1310 . In this way, for the through hole TR1at having the land pattern for inspection machine between the lead serving as the 1st terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 13th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2, Electrical inspection can be performed by using the above-described contact probe as it is.

A wiring pattern TR2 for electrically connecting the lead serving as the 4th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 11th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 is a wiring pattern on the main control substrate 1310. 1310x side of the copper foil surface (mounting surface) 1310x side, instead of forming a straight path or a broken line, the lead that becomes the fourth terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1, and the SMD type electronic component SMD2 Although there are no obstacles such as other electronic components or other wiring patterns, although the lead that will be the 11th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 a wiring pattern TR2a, one end of which is electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern soldered to a lead serving as a terminal and the other end of which is electrically connected to a through hole TR2at having a land pattern for an inspection machine; One end is electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern soldered to the lead that becomes the 11th terminal of the type electronic component SMD2, and the other end is electrically connected to a through hole TR2bt having a land pattern for an inspection machine. and a wiring pattern TR2b are formed on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310, and one end thereof is electrically connected to a through hole TR2at having a land pattern for an inspection machine. A wiring pattern TR2c whose other end is electrically connected to a through hole TR2bt having a land pattern for inspection machine is formed on the copper foil surface of the main control board 1310 on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y side. In this way, the through hole TR2at having a pair of tester land patterns between the lead serving as the 4th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 11th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2. , TR2bt, electrical inspection can be performed by using the contact probe described above as it is.

A wiring pattern TR3 for electrically connecting the lead serving as the 10th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 9th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 is the wiring pattern TR3 of the SMD type electronic component SMD1. Since the lead serving as the 10th terminal and the lead serving as the 9th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 are not arranged close to each other, the lead of the wiring pattern causes the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the main surface (mounting surface) 1310x to be separated from each other. When electrically connecting across the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the control board 1310, one end of the rectangular land pattern soldered to the lead serving as the 8th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 A wiring pattern TR3a which is electrically connected and whose other end is electrically connected to a through hole TR3at having a land pattern for an inspection machine, and soldered to a lead serving as a ninth terminal of an SMD type electronic component SMD2. A wiring pattern TR3b having one end electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern and the other end electrically connected to a through hole TR3bt having a land pattern for inspection machine is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. ) are formed on the copper foil surface on the side of 1310x and are electrically connected to a through hole TR3bt having a land pattern for an inspection machine at one end and a through hole TR3bt having a land pattern for an inspection machine at the other end. A wiring pattern TR3c that is directly connected is formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 . In this way, a through hole TR3at having a pair of tester land patterns between the lead serving as the 10th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 9th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2. , TR3bt, electrical inspection can be performed by using the contact probe described above as it is.

Further, a lead through which the lead of the lead type electronic component is inserted is provided in the wiring pattern TR4 for electrically connecting the lead serving as the 13th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead of the lead type electronic component (not shown). Since the above-mentioned contact probe can be used as it is for the through hole having the land pattern for the type, the rectangular land pattern to which the lead that becomes the 13th terminal of the SMD type electronic component is soldered and one end is Wiring patterns TR4a which are electrically connected and whose other ends are electrically connected to through holes TR4at having land patterns for inspection machines are formed on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310. One end of the through hole TR4at is electrically connected to a through hole TR4at having a land pattern for an inspection machine, and the other end of the through hole has a lead type land pattern into which the lead of a lead type electronic component (not shown) is inserted. A wiring pattern TR4b electrically connected to the holes is formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y side of the main control board 1310 . In this way, between the terminals of the 13th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead of the lead type electronic component (not shown), the lead of the lead type electronic component is inserted. The above-described contact probe can be used as it is for the through-hole having the land pattern of , and the above-described contact probe can be used for the through-hole TR4at having the land pattern for the inspection machine between the terminals. can be used as it is for electrical inspection.

The through-holes TR1at, TR2at, TR2bt, TR3at, TR3bt, and TR4at having the land pattern for the inspection machine have a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 and the main ground. The same inner diameter (0.3 mm) of a plurality of through holes MTH that are electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the control substrate 1310 to form the same ground (GND). However, the outer diameter of the land pattern for the inspection machine is much larger than the outer diameter of the normal land pattern (0.6 mm in this embodiment) used for routing the wiring described above. And, the outer diameter (1.5 mm) of the lead-type land pattern through which the lead of the capacitor MC30, which is the lead-type electronic component described above, is inserted, is the same as the contact probe contact minimum diameter (in this embodiment, 1.5 mm). As a result, when the surface area of the land pattern for the inspection machine and the surface area of the land pattern through which the leads of the lead-type electronic component are inserted are compared, the inner diameter of the land pattern through which the leads of the capacitor MC30, which is the lead-type electronic component, is inserted. However, as described above, since it is 0.7 mm, the surface area of the inspection machine land pattern is larger than the surface area of the land pattern through which the leads of the lead type electronic component are inserted.

In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land pattern through which the lead of the lead type electronic component is inserted and the outer diameter of the land pattern for the inspection machine are the same size. Even if SMD type electronic components are mounted in addition to these electronic components, the contact probes used when only lead type electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 can be used as they are. can.

Further, the through holes TR1at, TR2at, TR3at, and TR4at having the land patterns for inspection machines are positioned so that the contact probes do not come into electrical contact with the leads of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 when the contact probes are in contact with each other. Through-holes MTH' (ordinary through-holes MTH') are arranged apart from the outer ends of the leads by at least the contact probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in this embodiment) and have a normal land pattern. ), a through hole TR2bt having a land pattern for an inspection machine, and through holes TR2bt and TR3bt having a land pattern for an inspection machine, the contact probes contact each lead of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 when the contact probes are in contact with each other. It is arranged at a distance of at least the contact probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in this embodiment) or more from the outer end.

Further, among the through holes TR1at, TR2at, TR3at, and TR4at having the land pattern for inspection machine, the through holes TR1at, TR2at are spaced apart on the same straight line downward to the right (that is, the through holes TR1at , TR2at are spaced apart by at least the contact probe contact prevention distance (in this embodiment, 2.5 mm) in the left-right direction, and at least by the contact probe contact prevention distance (in this embodiment, 2.5 mm) in the vertical direction. The contact probes in contact with the through-hole TR1at and the contact probes in contact with the through-hole TR2at are in electrical contact with each other because they are spaced apart by 5 mm) or more and are staggered. The through-holes TR3at and TR4at are spaced apart on the same straight line rising to the right (that is, the through-holes TR3at and TR4at have at least contact points in the horizontal direction). The probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in this embodiment) or more is spaced apart, and the contact probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in this embodiment) is spaced apart in the vertical direction at least. Therefore, the contact probes in contact with the through holes TR3at and the contact probes in contact with the through holes TR4at can be prevented from coming into electrical contact with each other. ing.

In addition, the through holes MTH' having a normal land pattern (normal through holes MTH') and the through holes TR2bt and TR3bt having land patterns for inspection machines are arranged on the same straight line sloping to the right and spaced apart from each other. (that is, the through holes MTH', TR2bt, and TR3bt are arranged vertically at least by a contact probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in the present embodiment) or more, and are vertically spaced apart by at least the contact probe The contact probes contacting the through-hole MTH' and the through-hole TR2bt are brought into contact with each other by the displaced arrangement (because they are arranged apart from each other by a contact prevention distance (in this embodiment, 2.5 mm) or more). The contact probe and the contact probe in contact with the through hole TR3bt can be prevented from making electrical contact with each other. Although the through-hole MTH' and the through-hole TR2at are arranged close to each other, the through-hole MTH' and the through-hole TR2at are separated from each other by at least the contact probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in this embodiment) in the vertical direction. While being spaced apart and arrange|positioned at least in the up-down direction at least by contact probe contact prevention distance (this embodiment 2.5 mm) or more, they are arrange|positioned.

For example, when a wiring pattern is routed to an electronic component, a through-hole is formed from the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is routed to the other copper foil surface in order to avoid obstacles such as other electronic components and other wiring patterns. It is provided on the substrate for wiring and is used to avoid obstacles. As described above, in this embodiment, the through-hole has an inner diameter of 0.3 mm and an outer diameter of the land pattern of 0.6 mm. Also in this embodiment, various substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 are formed with normal through holes (that is, through holes for avoiding obstacles).

In the present embodiment, for example, the lead serving as the 1st terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 13th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2, when the wiring pattern is routed, the SMD type Since the wiring pattern TR that is electrically connected to the lead serving as the 12th terminal of the electronic component SMD2 is an obstacle, as described above, as a normal wiring pattern routing, one of the SMD type electronic components SMD1 The wiring pattern TR1 electrically connects the lead serving as the No. 1 terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 to the lead serving as the No. 13 terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2. Although the lead serving as the 13th terminal of the electronic component SMD2 is arranged in the vicinity, one end of the rectangular land pattern soldered to the lead serving as the 1st terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 is electrically connected. A wiring pattern TR1a is connected and the other end is electrically connected to a through hole TR1at having a land pattern for an inspection machine, and a rectangular lead soldered to a lead serving as the 13th terminal of an SMD type electronic component SMD2. A wiring pattern TR1b electrically connected at one end to the land pattern and electrically connected at the other end to a through hole (that is, a through hole for avoiding an obstacle) MTH' having a normal land pattern. They are formed on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310, one end of which is electrically connected to a through hole TR1at having a land pattern for an inspection machine, and the other end of which is a normal land. A wiring pattern TR1c electrically connected to a through hole having a pattern (that is, a through hole for avoiding an obstacle) is formed on the copper foil surface on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y side of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the lead serving as the 4th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 11th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 are used when the wiring pattern is routed. Although there are no obstacles such as other wiring patterns, as described above, the lead serving as the 4th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 11th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 are connected. The wiring pattern TR2 electrically connects the wiring pattern to the surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310. The wiring pattern is not directly routed on the copper foil surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Although the lead serving as the 4th terminal of the electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 11th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 are arranged close to each other, they are purposely used as the 4th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1. A wiring pattern TR2a, one end of which is electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern soldered to a lead and the other end of which is electrically connected to a through hole TR2at having a land pattern for an inspection machine; Wiring one end of which is electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern soldered to a lead serving as the 11th terminal of the component SMD2 and the other end of which is electrically connected to a through hole TR2bt having a land pattern for an inspection machine. Patterns TR2b and TR2b are formed on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x side of the main control board 1310, one end of which is electrically connected to a through hole TR2at having a land pattern for inspection machine, and the other. A wiring pattern TR2c whose end is electrically connected to a through hole TR2bt having a land pattern for an inspection machine is formed on the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y side of the main control board 1310 .

In other words, in the present embodiment, the through holes TR2at and TR2bt having the land pattern for the inspection machine are provided in order to avoid obstacles such as other electronic components and other wiring patterns when routing the wiring patterns to the electronic components. Completely different from ordinary through-holes (that is, through-holes for avoiding obstacles) that are provided in a board to route wiring from the copper foil side that runs the wiring pattern to the other copper foil side, contact probes and electrical It is provided so that it can be physically connected.

In this embodiment, a normal through hole (that is, a through hole for avoiding an obstacle) may be soldered, covered with a resist, or soldered. The copper foil surface which is not covered with the resist at all may be exposed.

Here, since the through holes TR1at, TR2at, TR2bt, TR3at, TR3bt, and TR4at having the land pattern for the inspection machine with which the contact probes come into contact have the same structure, the through hole TR3at having the land pattern for the inspection machine will be explained. do.

As shown in FIG. 69(c), the through-hole TR3at having the land pattern for inspection machine is formed in the base material 1310o of the main control board 1310, and is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the land patterns for inspection machine having an outer diameter TR3atD1 are formed respectively. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the inspection machine land pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are have the same outer diameter TR3atD1.

On the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, for example, a region is formed in which the periphery of the through hole TR3at having the land pattern for the inspection machine and the wiring pattern TR3a is removed. Although the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer 1310xr is formed by applying the liquid, the area of the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer 1310xr corresponding to the inspection machine land pattern is not coated with the resist liquid. do not have. In addition, on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, for example, a region is formed in which the periphery of the through hole TR3at having the land pattern for the inspection machine and the wiring pattern TR3c is removed. Although the back (solder surface) side resist layer 1310yr is formed by applying the resist solution, the resist solution is not applied to the area of the back (solder surface) side resist layer 1310yr corresponding to the land pattern for the inspection machine. not

The surface of the through-hole TR3at having the land pattern for the tester with which the contact probe PRB contacts (that is, the surface of the land pattern for the tester formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the surface of the land pattern for the tester formed on the main control board 1310 The surface of the inspection machine land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y is soldered.

Thus, the wiring pattern for electrically connecting the leads of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 is connected to the main control board 1310 via the through hole having the inspection machine land pattern. and the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, through By using the hole as a test pad and bringing it into contact with the contact probe PRB, an electrical test can be performed using the electrical connection between the lead of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead of the SMD type electronic component SMD2. .

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, for example, the surface of the through hole TR3at having the land pattern for the inspection machine with which the contact probe PRB is brought into contact (that is, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x for the inspection machine formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 The surface of the land pattern and the surface of the inspection machine land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 were soldered, but the copper foil was exposed without soldering. state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the through hole TR3at having the land pattern for inspection machine with which the contact probe PRB is brought into contact, for example, is formed between the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. ) 1310y, the land pattern for the inspection machine was formed on each of them. If one surface is determined, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are not formed. may be formed on the surface of

Further, through holes having a land pattern for an inspection machine may be provided for all the leads of the SMD type electronic component in the above-described embodiment. By doing so, the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern can be increased, so that the artwork of the main control board 1310 can be efficiently performed. At this time, it is necessary to check whether the through holes having the land pattern for the inspection machine are paired. Even if the through holes having the land pattern for inspection machine are not paired, there is no problem as long as the inspection can be performed in the electrical inspection.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when SMD type electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310, the through holes having the land pattern for the inspection machine are provided in the main control board 1310, but the through holes are treated as the main board. In addition to the main control board 1310, when mounting a plurality of SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 and the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, it has a land pattern for inspection machine By providing the through-holes in the power supply board 630 and the dispensing control board 633, the through-holes having the land pattern for the inspection machine can be used as test pads and brought into contact with the contact probes, whereby electrical components among the plurality of SMD type electronic components can be detected. An electrical test can be performed using the electrical connections between the leads of SMD type electronic components connected to the .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring pattern TR2 electrically connecting the lead serving as the fourth terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD1 and the lead serving as the 11th terminal of the SMD type electronic component SMD2 includes: Through holes TR2at and TR2bt having land patterns for inspection machines were used, but one of the pair of through holes TR2at and TR2bt having land patterns for inspection machines was replaced with a through hole having a normal land pattern (normal through hole MTH' (that is, through holes for obstacle avoidance)) MTH' may be used. For example, if it is difficult to arrange the land pattern for the inspection machine at a distance of more than the contact probe contact prevention distance (2.5 mm in this embodiment) due to the routing of the wiring pattern, instead of the land pattern for the inspection machine, This is because, even if a normal through-hole is used, electrical inspection can be performed using the other inspection through-hole. For example, instead of the through hole TR2bt having the land pattern for the inspection machine, a through hole having a normal land pattern (a normal through hole MTH' (that is, a through hole for avoiding obstacles)) MTH' can be used. can be done.

In the above-described embodiment, the two SMD type electronic components SMD1 and SMD2 have the same SMD package (SOP14) as the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. was used, but not only between ICs, but also wiring patterns between terminals of SMD type electronic components (for example, wiring patterns between terminals of SMD type electronic components, IC and resistor, IC and capacitor wiring pattern between terminals, wiring pattern between terminals of resistors, wiring pattern between terminals of capacitors and resistors, wiring pattern between terminals of capacitors and resistors, wiring pattern between terminals of ICs and diodes). Through holes may be used.

[6-5. Countermeasures against electromagnetic noise entering through the setting key switch]
Next, a detailed description will be given of countermeasures against electromagnetic noise entering through the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311, with reference to FIG. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is available in a resin type and a metal type. A countermeasure against electromagnetic noise for the setting key switch 1311a will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram (a) showing the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the method of connecting the metal frame plate of the setting key switch to the ground (GND). is a view (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 in the method of connecting the setting change board 1311 to the ground (GND), and setting change in the method of insulating the metal frame plate of the setting key switch from the ground (GND). FIG. (c) shows the front surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311, and FIG. d).

[Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for resin type setting key switches]
As described above, the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a non-conductive resin cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a setting key is inserted into the outer cylinder 1311aa and rotated. A non-conductive resin-made setting key cylinder 1311ab is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa, and a non-conductive resin-made setting key cylinder 1311ab is connected to turn operation of the setting key cylinder 1311ab to turn the contact on or off. A rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac and a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa are formed so as to cover the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac and protrude backward from the base body 1311ac. and a metal frame plate 1311ad having a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on both side surfaces (the front side surface and the rear side surface in the figure). The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is provided with an insertion port 1311aba into which a metal setting key is inserted.

In the resin-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded of non-conductive resin. Even if the front surface of the key switch 1311a (that is, the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is touched, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge may enter the setting change board 1311 via the setting key switch 1311a. and the end of the rib 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 made of non-conductive resin. Since the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the key switch 1311a is separated by a distance d (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment), the non-conductive resin cover body is charged with static electricity. Even if the through hole 1301z of 1301 and its surroundings are touched, it becomes difficult for electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a through the through hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za. Thus, intrusion into the setting change board 1311 via the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented.

In this way, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the setting change board 1311 through itself. A method of fixing a metal frame plate 1311ad of a resin type setting key switch 1311a to a setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, and a resin type setting key switch. a method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as not to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 but insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311; There is

[Resin type: Method of electrically connecting metal frame plate and ground]
In the method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, FIG. As shown in b), the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is formed so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged at the center point where the center lines of the setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions intersect. Long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter simply referred to as "long through holes SLH1, SLH2") are formed on the vertical center line of the setting change board 1311, and two lead terminals are formed on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. through-holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through-holes SLTH1 and SLTH2") having a pair of lands through which terminals A and B are respectively inserted; Through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 (hereinafter simply referred to as "through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4") having a pair of lands through which two lead terminals, COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac can be respectively inserted. ) and , are formed on the horizontal center line of the setting change board 1311 with a 90-degree rotation angle with a pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2. Further, a through hole SSTD, which is provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, is formed in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311, through which a cylindrical projecting portion (not shown) can be inserted. is formed in a region surrounded by through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

Also, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switches 1311a are mounted has various pin terminals ( 4 through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4 (hereinafter simply referred to as "through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4"). ) is formed.

Among these four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3 and SSTH4, the uppermost through hole SSTH1 through which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is located on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the back surface of the setting change board 1311 (solder surface).

Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the through hole SSTH2, which is located below the through hole SSTH1 and through which the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, is used for the setting key switch 1311a. The setting of the wiring pattern SPTN2 is changed so that it is electrically connected to the through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 through which the two lead terminals, COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac can be inserted. It is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 .

Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the through hole SSTH3, which is located below the through hole SSTH2 and through which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, is used for the setting key switch 1311a. The setting of the wiring pattern SPTN3 is changed so that it is electrically connected to the through hole SLTH3 through which the B terminal of the two lead terminals, A terminal and B terminal, formed on the right side of the base body 1311ac can be inserted. It is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 .

Among the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the lowermost through hole SSTH4, which is arranged below the through hole SSTH3 and through which the fourth pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, It is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the modified substrate 1311 .

On the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, a copper plane includes through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, and SLTH4 for the setting key switches 1311a, and through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH2 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A foil-punched area formed by removing a copper foil is formed around and around the SSTH 3, respectively. These foil-punched regions are in a state of being electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. . On the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. The pair of long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 facing each other and having an elongated hole shape elongated along the direction are provided with long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 so that the heat that melts the solder is not removed from the peripheries of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 during soldering. Areas are formed in which the copper foil is removed from substantially around the holes SLH1 and SLH2, and thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are provided at both ends of each long hole in the longitudinal direction. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground) by this thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern).

On the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, a copper plane is formed around through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, and SLTH4 for the setting key switches 1311a, and through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH2 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. Around the SSTH3 and around the wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, and SPTN3 described above, foil-punched areas are formed by removing the copper foil. These foil-punched regions are in a state of being electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. . A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted through the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. The pair of long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 facing each other and having an elongated hole shape elongated along the direction are provided with long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 so that the heat that melts the solder is not removed from the peripheries of the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 during soldering. Areas are formed in which the copper foil is removed from substantially around the holes SLH1 and SLH2, and thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are provided at both ends of each long hole in the longitudinal direction. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 are electrically connected to the solid ground (substrate ground) by this thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern).

Through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, respectively. These four through-holes STH are a solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 and a solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 ( substrate ground) are electrically connected to form the same ground (GND).

The front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 are coated with a solid resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. On the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, a region SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged is silk-printed on the resist of the predetermined color and has a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. A region SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be arranged is silk-printed as a region SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be arranged, in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. printed with a solid line of the same color as The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and mounted in the area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311). In this state, the line of the area SSLKSW1 (solid square line) is arranged outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the line (solid line of the square) of the area SSLKSW1 from overlapping. As for the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, as with the area SSLKSW1, even if this connector SMCN is mounted, the connector SMCN does not overlap the boundary line (U-shaped solid line) of the area SSLKCN1. It's like

In this way, in the method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, the resin type A pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on a metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are electrically connected to the solid ground (board ground) of the setting change board 1311 through long through holes SLH1, SLH2. Therefore, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically floating with respect to the setting change board 1311. FIG. In other words, an electrically floating metal may function as an antenna that picks up noise and become a noise source. As a result, in a state where the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the solid ground (board ground) of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can be operated. A metal frame plate 1311ad is housed in a main control board box 1320, is constructed so as not to be directly touched by a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a, and is electrically stabilized to function as an antenna that picks up noise. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change board 1311 and the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game. No change is given to the Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

[Resin type: How to insulate the metal frame plate from the ground]
The setting change board is designed so that the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 but is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. 70(c) and 70(d), the setting key switch 1311a is arranged at the center point where the vertical and horizontal center lines of the setting change board 1311 intersect. A pair of opposed long through-holes elongated in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the key switch 1311a can be inserted. SLH1 and SLH2 are formed on the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the vertical direction, and two lead terminals A terminal and B terminal formed on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a are connected respectively. A pair of through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 through which the two lead terminals COM1 and COM2 formed on the left side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 are formed on the horizontal center line of the setting change board 1311 with a 90-degree rotation angle from the pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2. Further, a through hole SSTD, which is provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a and into which a cylindrical projecting portion (not shown) for designating the arrangement direction of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted, is formed in the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311. is formed in a region surrounded by through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

Also, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switches 1311a are mounted has various pin terminals ( Four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3 and SSTH4 are formed through which the first to fourth pin terminals) can be inserted.

Among these four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3 and SSTH4, the uppermost through hole SSTH1 through which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is located on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the back surface of the setting change board 1311 (solder surface).

Of the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the through hole SSTH2, which is located below the through hole SSTH1 and through which the second pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, is used for the setting key switch 1311a. The setting of the wiring pattern SPTN2 is changed so that it is electrically connected to the through holes SLTH3 and SLTH4 through which the two lead terminals, COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, formed on the left side surface of the base body 1311ac can be inserted. It is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 .

Of the four through-holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the through-hole SSTH3, which is located below the through-hole SSTH2 and through which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, is used for the setting key switch 1311a. The setting of the wiring pattern SPTN3 is changed so as to be electrically connected to the through hole SLTH3 through which the B terminal of the two lead terminals, A terminal and B terminal, formed on the right side surface of the base body 1311ac can be inserted. It is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1311 .

Among the four through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3, and SSTH4, the lowermost through hole SSTH4, which is arranged below the through hole SSTH3 and through which the fourth pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted, It is electrically connected to solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on a front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and a rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the modified substrate 1311 .

On the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, on a copper plane, there are rectangles surrounding the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 for the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3 and SLTH4 for the setting key switch 1311a. A foil extraction area SINSx having a shape is formed. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3 and SLTH4 are solid grounds formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 by the foil extraction area SINSx. (substrate ground). A surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 is formed by removing copper foil around the through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 in a copper plane. Defoil regions are also formed respectively. These foil-punched regions are in a state of being electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. .

On the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, a copper plane is provided at a position corresponding to the foil extraction area SINSx formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311. Except for the wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, and SPTN3 described above, a foil extraction area SINSy is formed by removing the copper foil. This foil area SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2, SPTN3 up to the peripheries of the through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 . With this foil removal area SINSy, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, the through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3 and SLTH4, the wiring patterns SPTN1, SPTN2 and SPTN3, and the through holes SSTH1, SSTH2 and SSTH3 are formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. surface) 1311x and a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y.

Through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, respectively. These four through-holes STH are a solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 and a solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 ( substrate ground) are electrically connected to form the same ground (GND).

The entire surfaces of the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 are coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. On the surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311, a region SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged is silk-printed on the resist of the predetermined color and has a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. A region SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be arranged is silk-printed as a region SSLKSW1 showing the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be arranged in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. printed with a solid line of the same color as The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and mounted in the area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311). In this state, the line (solid square line) of the area SSLKSW1 is arranged outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. That is, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the line (solid line of the square) of the area SSLKSW1 from overlapping. As for the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, as with the area SSLKSW1, even if this connector SMCN is mounted, the connector SMCN does not overlap the boundary line (U-shaped solid line) of the area SSLKCN1. It's like

Here, the reason why the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 will be described. By forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can be made of metal. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having long elongated hole shapes along the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad of the setting change board 1311 can be inserted. It can be electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the modified substrate 1311 . The board ground of the setting change board 1311 can be kept away from a pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a. As a result, the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin-made setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 and soldered, so that the metallic Even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into the frame plate 1311ad, the electromagnetic wave noise is set via the foil-extracted areas SINSx and SINSy formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. Intrusion into solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the modified substrate 1311 is prevented, and is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. In other words, electromagnetic wave noise from the metal frame plate 1311ad can be prevented from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy. As a result, the entry of electromagnetic noise from the metal frame plate 1311ad can be blocked on the setting change board 1311 side. The progress to the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310, which is the control substrate, can be reliably stopped, and the ground line transmitting the substrate ground (ground) will not be changed.

In this manner, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, but is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In the method of fixing to the setting change board 1311, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 and soldered. In this state, even if electromagnetic wave noise penetrates the metal frame plate 1311ad, this electromagnetic wave noise will be emitted from the foil punching formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. Intrusion into solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 via the areas SINSx and SINSy is prevented, and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself is prevented from entering. Therefore, the intruding electromagnetic wave noise is reliably prevented from advancing to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, through the setting change board 1311, and the board ground (ground ) is not affected by the ground line that transmits the Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

[Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for metal type setting key switches]
As described above, the metal type setting key switch 1311a includes a metal cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key that is rotated by inserting a setting key into the inner side of the outer cylinder 1311aa. The key cylinder 1311ab has the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a in that the material is different from that of the resin type setting key switch 1311a.

In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are formed of metal as described above, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. It is in a state of Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to the non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa. It covers the surface and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac. That is, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic wave noise enters through the metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is electrically connected, there is a problem that electromagnetic wave noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad.

Thus, unlike the resin type setting key switch 1311a described above, the metal type setting key switch 1311a cannot prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the setting change board 1311 through itself. Therefore, as a countermeasure against electromagnetic noise, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. There is a method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to insulate.

[Metal type: Method of insulating the metal frame plate from the ground]
The setting change board is designed so that the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 but is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. 1311 is fixed to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without electrically connecting the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 as described above. Since this is the same as the method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from the GND), the explanation is omitted, but the settings are made in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311. The reason for forming the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy of the modified substrate 1311 will be described.

By forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the metal frame of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is formed. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having long long hole shapes extending in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the plate 1311ad can be inserted are formed in the setting change board. It can be in a state of being electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of 1311 .

In other words, the board ground of the setting change board 1311 can be kept away from the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a. The board ground of the change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad). It's becoming As a result, the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 and soldered. Even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the outer cylinder 1311aa made of metal, the setting key cylinder 1311ab made of metal, and the frame plate 1311ad made of metal, this electromagnetic wave noise passes through the metal frame plate 1311ad and reaches the surface of the setting change board 1311. A solid ground ( Intrusion into the substrate ground) is prevented and damped by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. In other words, electromagnetic noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad is prevented from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy. can be done. As a result, the setting change board 1311 can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad. to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, through the setting change board 1311. It does not give any change to

In this manner, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311, but is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In the method of fixing to the setting change board 1311, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 and soldered. In this state, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad, the electromagnetic wave noise does not pass through the metal frame plate 1311ad. 1311x and 1311y of the setting change board 1311 via the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. Intrusion into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed in the space is blocked and is attenuated by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself, so that the intruding electromagnetic waves Noise is surely stopped from advancing to the board ground of the main control board 1310 which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game through the setting change board 1311, and the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground) gives no change. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

The space between the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab is filled with non-conductive resin (insulating resin) so that the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab is placed against the metal outer cylinder 1311aa. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab are not electrically connected but insulated. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the metal frame plate 1311ad and passes through the front surface 1311x (mounting surface) and the rear surface of the setting change board 1311. Intrusion into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 via the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy formed on the (solder surface) 1311y. is damped by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. That is, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy. As a result, the setting change board 1311 can prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from entering from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa. The progress to the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310, which is the control substrate, can be reliably stopped, and the ground line transmitting the substrate ground (ground) will not be changed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

In addition, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is configured such that the entire or front side of the metal outer cylinder 1311aa is covered with a non-conductive resin cap or rubber cap (lid body). A cap (lid body) may be exposed from a through hole 1301z formed in . An opening is provided on the front surface of such a cap (lid) at a position corresponding to the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab made of metal.

[How to select the setting key switch]
Here, the selection method of the setting key switch 1311a will be briefly described. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a includes a resin type and a metal type. As described above, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the setting change board 1311 through itself. a method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as to electrically connect it to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311; a method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as not to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 but insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311; , there is. In the metal type setting key switch, as described above, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. There is only a method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from the 1311 ground (GND). Basically, a resin type setting key switch 1311a is used as the setting key switch 1311a. A method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to be connected is adopted.

In addition, in the electromagnetic wave noise resistance test, if problems such as malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or malfunction of electronic parts are caused by the influence of electromagnetic wave noise, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is adopted. The setting change board 1311 is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 but is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. Adopt a method of fixing to In this case, a metal type setting key switch 1311a is adopted instead of the resin type setting key switch 1311a, and the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is connected to the ground of the setting change board 1311 ( A method of fixing to the setting change board 1311 so as to be insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 without being electrically connected to the setting change board 1311 can also be adopted.

[When electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch]
A state in which electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch 1311a will be described. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current set values, etc., in addition to changing the set values, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are permitted to possess it. limited to 2-3 people. For this reason, when confirming the setting value or when changing the setting value, first, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the metal A person who has the setting key accesses the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, the person who opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a may differ.

As a result, a game hall clerk who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 charges himself when inserting a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and turning it. Electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 through a regular metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the frame ground via the door frame metal ground wire. It is electrically connected to the substrate 559 . This frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the island facility ground wire. In other words, a game hall clerk who opens the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 charges himself and discharges static electricity when inserting a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127. By transmitting the electromagnetic noise caused by this to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key, the cylinder lock 127, the door frame reinforcement unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground substrate 559, the island equipment ground wire, and It is transmitted to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall and can be removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁On the other hand, the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is charged with electricity by not touching the cylinder lock 127, and the electromagnetic wave noise caused by the static electricity is discharged through a regular metal key. 1311a.

Since the resin type setting key switch 1311a can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the setting change board 1311 through itself, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is used for the purpose of further strengthening the resistance to electromagnetic wave noise. A method of fixing the metal frame plate 1311ad of the key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311 so as not to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 but insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. , the metal frame plate 1311ad of the metal type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311 but is insulated from the ground (GND) of the setting change board 1311. In the method of fixing to the change board 1311, by forming foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, , Electromagnetic wave noise caused by static electricity discharged by electrifying the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is eliminated by the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a (in the case of the metal type setting key switch 1311a, the metal It further includes an outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab.). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311, which is caused by static electricity discharged by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with various decorative parts, and electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and is transferred to the door frame metal. It is transmitted to the frame ground board 559 via the ground wire, then transmitted from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Various decorative parts decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and are arranged on substantially the entire door frame 3. Therefore, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is conscious of the door frame 3 when accessing. If the door frame 3 is touched without the door frame 3, the door frame 3 is touched with various decorative parts, and electromagnetic wave noise due to self-charging and static electricity discharge is eventually transmitted to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁It is designed to be

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed in copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, and these foil extraction areas SINSx, In the SINSy, a pair of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. The long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 facing each other are formed. 1311y may be electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed in 1311y, or the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 may be connected to the surface of the setting change substrate 1311 via corresponding resistors. It may be configured to be electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y. In this way, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge caused by electrification of the person accessing the setting key switch 1311a can be eliminated by the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a (in the case of the metal type setting key switch 1311a, It further includes a metal outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab.) to the resistance, and can be damped by the resistance. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311, which is caused by static electricity discharged by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

In this embodiment, an electrostatic removal pad capable of removing electromagnetic noise may be provided at a predetermined location on the front surface of the door frame 3, and when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, The left side of the main body frame 4 in the front view in the vertical direction on which the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 are arranged is the opposite side to the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4. The right side in the vertical direction when viewed from the front may be provided on the open side portion of the body frame 4 . In addition, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows facing back to the island facilities of the game hall, when the body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is released from the outer frame 2, this one pachinko machine 1 faces back. An attendant such as a store clerk of a game hall can reach the rear side of the other pachinko machine 1 which is set to be. When the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is released from the outer frame 2 for some reason, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall moves behind the other pachinko machine 1 facing back to the one pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加You can also access the side. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the staff members such as game hall staff being charged and discharged. It may be provided on the rear surface side of the back cover 640, may be provided on the rear surface side of the interface board cover 636, may be provided on the rear surface side of the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632, or may be provided on the rear surface of the dispensing device 350. Can be placed on the side.

Further, in the present embodiment, the body frame base unit 300 of the body frame 5 may be formed by molding a conductive resin. Since the body frame base unit 300 has the body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal attached to the left side in front view, the body frame base unit 300 and the body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected. . The body frame reinforcement frame 530 is electrically connected to the above-described frame ground board 559 via a body frame metal ground wire (not shown). The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall or a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a can, for example, touch the main body frame base unit 300 on the open side of the main body frame 4. Since the left hand can be placed to support the body and the right hand can be extended to the rear side of the main body frame 4 or the rear side of the game board 5, when the left hand is placed on the main body frame base unit 300, it is charged with static electricity. When the electromagnetic wave noise caused by the discharge is transmitted to the main body frame base unit 300 and then to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, it is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the door frame metal ground wire, and then from the frame ground substrate 559 to the island equipment ground. It is transmitted to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the wire and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 as described above, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the door frame metal ground. The frame ground substrate 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire of the island equipment. The wire is not electrically connected to the frame grounding board 559, but is electrically connected to the terminal of the power supply board 630 of the body frame 4, and the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 are electrically connected. can be The door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and has various decorative parts. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The frame ground board 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall through the island facility ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was not electrically connected to the frame ground board 559, and the main body frame The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 may be electrically connected by electrically connecting to the terminals of the power supply board 630 of No. 4. The power board 630 is supplied with AC 24V from the island facilities of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board 630 to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply substrate 630 is connected to the ground side. Therefore, the power supply substrate 630 is provided with a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board 630 by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the pachinko machine 1. be done.

[Arrangement of main control board box and drive board box]
Here, the arrangement of the main control board box 1320 and the drive board box 1730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board.

As described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has the drive board box 1730 attached to the rear surface as described above. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, as shown in FIG. is arranged near the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 .

To explain this arrangement, the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with the insertion opening 1311aba into which the metal setting key is inserted, as described above. The outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab are flush with the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. That is, the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab do not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. FIG. When a worker attaches the game board 5 to the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed on the island facility of the game hall, first, it is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. When the game board 5 is removed from the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. For this reason, the worker's legs accidentally hit the game board 5 while working on the temporarily placed game board 5, and the operator may fall over.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is has a distance da from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5 . As a result, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5, and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls over, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5, Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the main control board box 1320, the setting The outer cylinder 1311aa of the key switch 1311a and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between them and the floor of the game hall.

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch a light emitting means such as a short circuit, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 , the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is the cover of the drive board box 1730 . Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with the distance da from the rear surface of the body, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, The cover body of the drive board box 1730 prevents entry into the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring is the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 and the setting key cylinder. It is possible to reliably prevent contact with the front portion of 1311ab.

Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring contacts the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a of the resin type does not have the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab. Since the key cylinder 1311ab is made of non-conductive resin, there is no problem. As described above, by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is metallized. A pair of opposed long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 having an elongated hole shape extending in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad made by The setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is electrically insulated from solid grounds (board grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310). ) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game through the setting change board 1311, is not affected at all. No fluctuations are given to the ground line that transmits the ground (ground). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other. 640 and cover body 1301 of main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

[Modification]
Although the setting key switch 1311a described above has a predetermined number of tumbler pins arranged in the setting key cylinder accommodated therein, a switch having a larger number of tumbler pins may be employed. In this way, security can be further enhanced, and if the product is mass-produced and widely available in the market, the unit price can be lowered, contributing to cost reduction. Regarding the case of mounting a setting key switch 1311a′ accommodating a setting key cylinder having more tumbler pins than the setting key cylinder accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311, refer to FIG. explain. FIG. 72 is a modified example 1(a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the main control board box attached to the game board. It is a modified example 2 (b) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board in . In addition, in FIG. 72, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as described above.

When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the state shown in FIG. , the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab protrude from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a' are projected. has a distance dimension db with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged to protrude rearward of the game board 5 . In order to protect the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab projecting from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, a protective cover 1304 is attached to the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320. It is supported so that it can be freely opened and closed. A locking projection (not shown) is formed in the protective cover 1304 , and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking projection is formed in the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 . When the locking protrusions of the protective cover 1304 are released from the locking grooves of the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, the protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported to open from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the setting key switch is operated. 1311a' can be accessed.

By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the operator may accidentally Even if the legs hit the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 falls toward the floor of the game hall, the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 contacts the floor of the game hall. The outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between them and the floor of the game hall. can.

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch a light emitting means such as a short circuit, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it is blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the unconnected wiring can be reliably prevented from contacting the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' provided on the setting change board 1311 and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. The cover body of the drive board box 1730, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are molded from non-conductive resin.

In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 do not contact each other and are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction. The cover body 1301 of the control board box 1320 is arranged substantially parallel to the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are separated from each other. They are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

A board holder 1200 in which the length of the board holder 1200 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in front view is shorter than that of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. ', when the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface, as shown in FIG. Although the front surface protrudes from the cover 1301′ of the main control board box 1320, the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a′ and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab are separated from the rear surface of the cover of the drive board box 1730 by a distance dimension. It has dc and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5 . As a result, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5, and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls over, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5, Even if the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall because the cover body of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the main control board box 1320, the setting The outer cylinder 1311aa of the key switch 1311a' and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between them and the floor of the game hall. In other words, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. In order to prevent the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab from coming into contact with the floor of the game hall even if the board holder 1200' falls over, the board holder 1200' That is, the length in the depth direction) is adjusted. In order to prevent the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' and the front portion of the setting key cylinder 1311ab from coming into contact with the floor of the game hall, the board holder 1200' is positioned in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, in the depth direction). In addition to the length, a recess is formed in the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 to which the substrate holder 1200' is attached, and the depth of this recess (the length of the front-rear direction (that is, depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1) ), or the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 by the recess and the substrate holder 1200' may be adjusted.

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch a light emitting means such as a short circuit, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200′, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is positioned behind the driving board box 1730. Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with the distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, , the cover body of the drive board box 1730 prevents entry into the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring is blocked by the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' provided on the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a'. Contact with the front portion of the key cylinder 1311ab can be reliably prevented. The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin.

In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are not in contact with each other and are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction. 640 and cover body 1301 of main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a main control board for controlling a game is arranged on the back side while being accommodated in a case (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-214975 (paragraph [0030], paragraph [0031], and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the game machine described in this document, although the main control board is housed in the case, for example, if it is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge, the control and management of the game machine like the main control board There has been a problem that the important board that performs

[Method of electrical connection between main body frame and game board 5]
Next, a method of electrically connecting the body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided on the body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically electrically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board that is connected to the main body frame 4, and a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is played. Each terminal of the board-side drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal PN of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 .

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN of the main body frame 4 will be described. In addition, it has a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction, and a plate-like base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body DCNa to form an English letter T shape as a whole. there is

Around the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is provided from the front surface of the opening DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa for a predetermined distance. Inclined portions DCNaaa are respectively formed for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. The game board side drawer connectors of the game board 5 are connected to the central part (one place) and the left and right parts (one place on the left part and one place on the right part) of the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa. (convex type) is turned upside down in a direction different from the normal direction and inserted into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is prevented from being turned upside down and inserted into the DCN. The horizontal position of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when it is inserted into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in the correct direction. A groove DCNaab is formed from the vicinity of the front surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa to prevent misalignment and enhance the engagement between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5. They are formed toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa.

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, pin-type terminals PN are arranged in two rows in the left-right direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction). ) passes through the box-like body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

Mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba are formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is first inserted into the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba. A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front side of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74), and the end portion is crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74). As a result, the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74).

Also, on the back surface of the base body DCNb, when mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74), the main body frame side drawer A cylindrical protruding portion DCNbb is formed so that the connector (concave type) DCN is mounted in the regular direction.

The body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74) has a DIP (dual connector) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN. Inline Package) type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) type) and each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side are electrically connected to connect the game board via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed by the main control board 1310 provided in 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the body frame 4 .

In addition, the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4, and the main body frame side drawer connector ( In addition to the concave type) DCN, another not-shown body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' is provided on the body frame side relay board KB' not shown, which is separate from the body frame side relay board KB. This body frame side relay board KB' is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN' in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN'. type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative substrate and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the main body frame 4, and is connected to each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown). By electrically connecting each terminal PN of (concave type) DCN', a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and a door are connected via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals are formed by various decorative substrates, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 . The structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) is the same as that of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'. is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) is the same as the method of fixing the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). there is

Also, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board (not shown); Another game board side relay board (not shown) of another game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (this other game board side relay board is , the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The fixing method to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method (fixing method using rivets) to the body frame side relay board KB.

The use of rivets when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74) is because the drawer connector is used to connect the game board 5 to the main body. Although the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be electrically connected automatically just by mounting the game board 5 on the frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer of the game board 5 is removed. A large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. This is to prevent the soldered surface of the terminal PN from peeling off from the rear surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74). A bolt and nut are used to fix the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 74), and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is shown in the figure. In the case of fixing to the game board side relay board which does not, there is a drawback that the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the body frame 4.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, a pin type is used as each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contacts between the terminals and the contacts (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows in the contacts for various voltage supply lines) are welded. becomes. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the body frame 4 in this welded state, the contact of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN may be bent and broken, or the game board 5 may be broken. When removing from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the contact is peeled off and damaged, making the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN unusable.

In addition, if the terminals and contacts are welded together, the connector may be damaged, which may cause various control boards to malfunction or damage the electronic components mounted on the various control boards. problem that needs to be established.

In the present embodiment, the above-described problem does not occur at all by using pin type terminals PN for the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. In other words, even if an operator mistakenly attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the frame 4 are not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, solder short-circuit prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 74 shows diagrams (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridges of terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and is a DIP type that is electrically connected to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame side. FIGS. 4(d) to 4(f) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the miniature connector of FIG. In FIG. 74, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing. Further, in FIG. 74, the solid arrow indicates the direction in which solder flows when the substrate is flowed into the solder bath, and the dashed-dotted arrow indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

The body frame side relay board KB arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the body frame 4 includes the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN of the body frame 4 as well as this body frame side drawer connector ( Concave type) A small DIP type connector that is electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small connector are pin type terminals arranged in two rows. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the horizontal direction on the main body frame side relay board KB. and a columnar projecting portion DCNbb are arranged (predetermined position for drawer connector), whereas the DIP type small connector is arranged in the vertical direction on the body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type small connector Each terminal lined up in two rows of the small connector is arranged so that each terminal PN lined up in two rows of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is rotated 90 degrees (predetermined position for small connector) .

When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, each of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. Terminals PN are inserted into through holes KTH1 having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “lands KTH1”), and the columnar projecting portion DCNbb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the positioning hole. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN's mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba communicate with each other to form the main body. Rivets (not shown) are inserted from the front of the frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN into the mounting through-holes DCNba, DCNba, respectively, and the ends are crimped and fixed to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame-side relay board KB. . When a DIP type small connector is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector is provided with a through hole KTH2 having a land. (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH2”).

When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at the predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, there are two stages in the vertical direction, the first stage from the bottom. The six terminals PN in one row and the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for a small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, there are six stages in the vertical direction, the first stage from the bottom. Two terminals PN in the first row, two terminals PN in the second row on the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN on the third row on the third row from the bottom, and two terminals PN on the fourth row from the bottom Two terminals PN on the fourth row, two terminals PN on the fifth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN on the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN on the sixth row from the bottom are arranged in parallel. becomes.

On the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, and a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each terminal of the DIP type small connector protrude from the rear surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 are relayed to the body frame side by flowing the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB to the solder bath. To be able to solder to the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the substrate KB, and to solder each terminal and each land KTH2 of the DIP type small connector to the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay substrate KB on the body frame side. can be done.

The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath is from the bottom of the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. It is directed to the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row, and is the first row from the bottom from the two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom of the small DIP type connector. It is oriented toward the two terminals of the first row. In other words, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final row, and in the DIP type small connector, they are the first row from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the terminals in the final stage.

When the back surface (solder surface) of the board is poured into the solder bath, pin-type terminals such as the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and DIP type small connector terminals are aligned and placed in the solder bath. If the solder is flown downward, there is a risk that solder bridges will occur along the flow direction, particularly between the terminal in the final stage and the terminal in the preceding stage. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal in the final stage.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage. Each land KTH1 is connected to a rectangular solder escape pattern KNP1 whose width is the same as the outer diameter of the land KTH1. They are formed on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB so that the land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are electrically connected.

In the DIP type compact connector, as described above, the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage. The solder escape pattern KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2 is connected (that is, each land KTH2 of the two terminals in the first row and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are connected to each other). KNP2 are electrically connected to each other), respectively, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB.

Thus, by forming a solder escape pattern on the terminal in the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges in the terminal in the final stage and contribute to the prevention of solder short circuits. may occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing), A method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each stage by silk printing and printing vertical lines on the boundaries of lands and solder escape patterns of terminals adjacent to each other in the left and right direction (countermeasure 2 by silk printing), silk printing on resist A method of enclosing the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure by printing and painting the area (countermeasure 3 by silk printing) can be mentioned.

[Measure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on a resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN. In other words, the horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and cross the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH1, which looks like a mountain range. A horizontal line KSH1 at the boundary between six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical direction by the force of separating the solder when the solder tends to stay in the resist due to the wall.

As shown in FIG. 74(d), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. and a horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between and, two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and four rows from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth row, which are the eyes, and the fourth row, which is the fourth row from the bottom. a horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals of and the two terminals of the third row which is the third row from the bottom, A horizontal line KSH2 is drawn by silk-printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. Soldering surface) KBy, horizontal line KSH2 by silk printing on the boundary between two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. In other words, the horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. are connected. As a result, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and cross the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH2, which is like a mountain range. , two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom. Solder bridging can be suppressed in terminals adjacent to each other in the vertical direction by exerting a force to separate the solder when the solder tends to stay in the resist due to the walls. A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the third row from the bottom; A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the second row from the bottom and the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. As with the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row, the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH2, which looks like a mountain range, causes the solder to stay on the resist and separate the solder. Due to the force acting thereon, solder bridges can be suppressed in the vertically adjacent terminals and lands KTH2.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a horizontal line is printed on the boundary of each stage by silk printing on the resist, and a vertical line is printed on the land of each terminal adjacent to the left and right and the solder escape pattern. A method (measure 2 by silk printing) of printing on the boundary of each will be described. In countermeasure 2 by silk printing, in addition to countermeasure 1 by silk printing, vertical lines are printed by silk printing on the lands of the terminals adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundaries of the solder escape patterns adjacent in the left-right direction. Measure 1 by silk printing will be omitted.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row and the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, the terminals PN and lands KTH1 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction; A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In other words, the vertical lines KSV1 are printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. vertical walls are lined up. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall of the vertical line KSV1, which looks like a mountain range. The solder that flows on the vertical wall like the mountain range of the vertical line KSV1 tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left side of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall across the vertical wall like the mountain range of the vertical line KSV1. Due to the force that separates the solder at , it is possible to suppress solder bridges in the laterally adjacent terminals PN and lands KTH1 and in the laterally adjacent solder escape patterns KNP1.

In addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. From the two terminals and lands KTH2 in one row to the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder adjacent in the left-right direction A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the relief pattern KNP2. In other words, the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. Vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall of the vertical line KSV2, which is like a mountain range. The solder flowing on the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV2 tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left side of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall across the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV2. As a result, a force for separating the solder acts, so that solder bridges can be suppressed in the laterally adjacent terminals and lands KTH2 and in the laterally adjacent solder escape patterns KNP2.

[Measure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridging, a method of enclosing the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by silk printing on the resist and painting the area (measure 3 by silk printing). explain.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. , is surrounded by a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side. Print to fill the area excluding the area. That is, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are enclosed in a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled in, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 can be seen from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder. The relief pattern KNP1 is a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 is a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1, and to prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When the solder flows, it cannot get over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which becomes a depressed area, and tries to stay there. Accordingly, solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and in the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

As shown in FIG. 74(f), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP2, which are connected to the body frame side relay board KB. The rear surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction by silk printing, and of the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape, the area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 is painted out. Print. That is, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are surrounded by a rectangular area KSA2 by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be filled in, when each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are viewed from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP2 becomes a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2, and to prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When the solder flows, it tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the area KSA2 silk-printed from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which becomes a depressed area, and the force of separating the solder acts. Solder bridging can be suppressed in each of the terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the direction and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the left-right direction.

Compared to connectors that have not been subjected to measures 1 to 3 by silk printing, the silk-printed parts are extremely conspicuous in connectors that have been subjected to measures 1 to 3 by silk printing. When performing the work of visually confirming whether or not an error has occurred, the worker can quickly direct his or her line of sight because the marker serves as a mark for where to look on the board.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, when the board is flown into the solder bath, the measures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above are applied to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and to prevent solder short circuits. Countermeasures 1 to 3 can also be used as a mark indicating which connector the worker directly solders to the board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the board is flowed into the solder bath, the countermeasure 3 by silk printing described above is applied, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a rectangular shape shown in FIG. 74(c). The enclosed area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP-type small connector have the area KSA2 enclosed in the rectangular shape shown in FIG. Instead of the rectangular shape, a region surrounded by another shape may be used to prevent solder bridging and prevent solder short-circuiting. FIG. 75 is a diagram (a) showing a modification of FIG. 74(c), and a diagram (b) showing a modification of FIG. 74(f). 75 that are the same as those in FIG. 74 are denoted by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 75, the solid arrow indicates the direction in which solder flows when the substrate is flowed into the solder bath, and the dashed-dotted arrow indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 75(a), there are lands KTH1 through which terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN are inserted, and solder relief patterns KNP1. , and is surrounded by silk printing on the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side. The area except for the escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled. Further, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1', and the land KTH1 and the solder escape pattern KNP1, which are recessed areas formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1', When the solder flows into the lands, the solder is separated from the lands KTH1 and the solder escape patterns KNP1, which are recessed areas, by trying to stay without getting over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. By applying force, it is possible to suppress solder bridges in the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 75(b), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and each shape of each solder escape pattern KNP2. The rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side is surrounded by a shape about three times larger by silk printing, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are excluded from the area KSA2' surrounded by this shape. print so as to fill the area Also, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2'. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA2', and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'. When the solder flows into the lands KTH2 and the solder escape patterns KNP2, which are recessed areas, the solder tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the area KSA2' silk-printed from the lands KTH2 and the solder escape patterns KNP2. Accordingly, solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected to each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side, but they are separated by a predetermined distance. may be formed by FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a modification in which the final stage terminal and the solder escape pattern are spaced apart by a predetermined distance.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN at the final stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertically long land KTH1. A solder escape pattern KNP1' having a rectangular shape whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (or may have a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) is separated by a predetermined distance ( For example, they are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB with a distance of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. good too. This solder escape pattern KNP1' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 76(a), the land KTH2 through which the terminal at the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the width of the land KTH2, which is long in the horizontal direction, is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A solder escape pattern KNP2' having a rectangular shape (which may have a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) is separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a third of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). They may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB with a distance of 1 to 1/2 of the length. This solder escape pattern KNP2' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN at the final stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and The solder escape pattern KNP1'' has a rectangular shape whose width is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and has a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 (a rectangular shape whose one side is the outer diameter of the land KTH1. and may have a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1. ) on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1'' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the land KTH2 through which the terminal at the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the width of the land KTH2, which is long in the left-right direction, is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A rectangular solder escape pattern KNP2'' having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2). and are spaced apart by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH2), and the rear surface of the body frame side relay board KB (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2'' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 76(c), a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN at the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertical Solder escape pattern KNP1''' having a rectangular shape whose width is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 (a rectangular shape whose one side is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and may have a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1''' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 76(c), the land KTH2 through which the terminal at the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the land KTH2 which is long in the horizontal direction and whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A rectangular solder escape pattern KNP2''' having a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2). ) and are spaced apart by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) on the rear surface of the body frame side relay board KB ( (Solder surface) KBy may be formed on the copper foil surface. This solder escape pattern KNP2''' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the solder relief pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escaping pattern on the opposite side that is not exposed may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 76(b)) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 76(c)).

In addition, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the direction in which the board is flowed into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed-dotted arrows in FIGS. 74(a) to (c)) is predetermined. If the board can be flowed in the opposite direction as well as in this direction (that is, if the board can be flowed into the solder bath from both directions), take measures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above. It is also possible to prevent solder short-circuiting by preventing the occurrence of solder bridging. In this case, depending on the flow direction, a rectangular solder escape pattern is connected to the land through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side, which is not connected to the final terminal, is semicircular (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 76(b)) or triangular (see the triangular shape in FIG. 76(c)). See also.) Also, the terminal in the last stage and the solder escape pattern may be formed with a predetermined distance therebetween. The above-described solder escape pattern may be formed at both ends of the connector in the direction in which the board is flown into the solder bath. Further, when designing a board, if it is not known in which direction the board is to be flowed, the above-described solder escape patterns are formed in both directions so that the board can be flowed in either direction.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the game machine described in this document, various boards are flowed into a solder bath and the terminals of components are soldered. was there.

[Prevention of stripping by over resist]
Next, prevention of stripping by over resist will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. First, the over resist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side will be described, and the over resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram (a) of an over resist applied to each terminal of a drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 79 is a continuation of FIG. 78 and is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). 77 to 79, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for the sake of clarity.

[Over-resist applied to each terminal of drawer connector (concave type) on the frame side]
To explain the over resist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, as shown in FIGS. KTH1".) has through holes formed in the base material KBo of the body frame side relay board KB, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, By removing the copper foil from the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, a land having an outer diameter KTHD1 is formed. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB are different. They have an outer diameter KTHD1 and have the same size.

On the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, a resist solution is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. In addition, on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, a resist liquid is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, but the back surface (solder surface) is not formed. A backside (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1.

In this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and a substrate ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB (GND) (that is, solid ground) is electrically connected to the same ground (GND) by a through hole (not shown).

As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having a is applied. As a result, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist. can be made uniform.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByra is formed, over resist is applied so that the outer periphery of the land KTH1 is covered with resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. It is As a result, the resist covers the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. can be made uniform.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surfaces, compared to the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is less. and solder joints are stronger.

By the way, when fixing the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB, rivets are used as described above. By using the drawer connector, the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be electrically connected automatically just by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4. A large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 when it is attached to the frame 4. This is to prevent the soldered surfaces of the pin-type terminals PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side from peeling off from the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board KB on the body frame side due to a large force.

However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is separated from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are separated from the base material KBo together with the lands KTH1. may do so.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, over resist is applied to the land KTH1 to form copper. By increasing the peeling strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector can be used to connect the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN when the game board 5 is attached or removed. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB is the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and peeling of various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1.

The outer diameter KTHD1 of the over-resisted land KTH1 takes into consideration the area where each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of a land without over resist. This is because when the terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is soldered to the land KTH1 on which over resist is applied, the joint area is the terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN This is to make the bonding area larger than that in the case of soldering to a land that is not over-resisted. As a result, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 on which the over resist is applied can be made greater than the bonding strength to the land on which the over resist is not applied.

Depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, when over-resist is not applied, the land has a normal outer diameter, and when over-resist is applied, it has a normal size. It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the normal size at the board design stage. There is a problem that the connection with the lands is insufficient and solder failure may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resisting, for a board having even one land to which over-resisting is applied (for example, main body frame side relay board KB), all lands are , the same land as the land subjected to over resist is arranged as a land not subjected to over resist. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land becomes sufficient, and the occurrence of defective soldering can be reliably prevented.

It should be noted that the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted is also provided with a land. is subjected to the above-described over resist. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, there is another main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) connected to the main body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) separately from the main body frame side relay board KB. The above-described over-resist is applied to the lands of the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown). In addition, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the main body frame 4 (this other game board drawer connector (convex type) is connected to the main body frame A side drawer connector (concave type) which is different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the DCN) is mounted on another game board side relay board (not shown) (this The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay board (not shown) in which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. which is different from the substrate), the above-described over resist is applied to the lands.

In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB are different. Although the outer diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size, compared to the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the body frame side relay board KB The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the surface) side resist opening KBxra.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the land of the body frame side relay board KB on which the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to which the external force is applied is mounted is over-registered as described above. The above-described over resist may be applied to the land of the setting change board 1311 on which the switch 1311a is mounted. The above-described over resist may be applied to the lands (the above-described long through holes SLH1 and SLH2), and other substrates (for example, DIP When a type connector is mounted, in addition to the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc., peripheral control board 1510, power supply board 630, interface board 635, various decoration boards, various relay boards, various drive The above-described over resist may be applied to the land of the substrate (substrate, etc.), or in the case where the substrate is provided on a movable body that is driven by an electric drive source, the movable body can be moved as the movable body is operated. When a load is applied to the board of the movable body due to wiring or harnesses electrically connected to the board of the body, the above-described over-resist may be applied to the land of the board of the movable body on which the DIP type connector is mounted. For lands having lead terminals mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate and soldered on the back surface (solder surface) of various switches such as various switches having a pressing operation portion The above-mentioned over resist may be applied, and even if some external force is applied to the board, the board on which lead type or DIP type electronic parts such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, and ICs are mounted. The over resist described above may be applied to the land.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resisting, for a substrate having at least one land to which over-resisting is applied (for example, main body frame side relay substrate KB), all lands , the same land as the land on which over resist is applied is arranged as a land without over resist. A land having an outer diameter of a normal size smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 that is being used) may be placed. In other words, lands to which over resist is applied and lands having an outer diameter of a normal size when over resist is not applied may coexist. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, if over-resist is not applied, the land has a normal outer diameter, and if over-resist is applied, it has a normal size. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage.

[Over-resist applied to fixed land of surface mount type connector housing]
78(a), (b), and FIGS. 79(c), (d) will explain the over resist applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC. , a pad KSP having a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which each terminal (for example, six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered; various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP; A vertically elongated rectangle fixed by soldering both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides) to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, thereby attaching each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and fixing each housing. Pads KSPF are formed respectively. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

Each pad KSP and the periphery KCxa of various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP are connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) is electrically unconnected and insulated from On the other hand, the four corners of each housing fixing pad KSPF in the periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each housing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. A thermal pattern KCxb is provided in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) via a cross-shaped pattern. With this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides respectively) are attached to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC (mounting surface) KCx. It is possible to prevent the heat that melts the solder from being removed from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF when the KSPF is soldered. Both sides of the housing of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By soldering the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC, the fixing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC can be strengthened compared to the case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. Both sides of the housing of the surface mounting type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) of the housing are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC, and surface mounting is performed. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for the signals connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist liquid is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. In the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and an area corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF. is formed with a housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF. A resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) are electrically connected to each other through through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the region of the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF has an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for housing fixing pad having a shape is formed, the housing fixing pad is formed from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. As a result, on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the entire outer peripheral portion of each housing fixing pad KSPF can be covered with the resist. can be uniform for loads from

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KCo of the substrate KC are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface are more difficult than the bonding between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

By the way, as the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, in this embodiment, for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633 and the like can be mentioned. Various wires and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used when removing dust and cigarette tar accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, when performing various inspections, and the like. , is removed by an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall, and then reconnected after work. However, in most cases, staff such as game hall clerks who perform such work are unfamiliar with handling boards, and when removing various wirings and harnesses from connectors and when connecting various wirings and harnesses to connectors, , may be done by brute force (that is, with excessive force).

Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. is mounted on the board KC, if a staff member such as a game hall clerk performs the work described above, the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN will be applied to the surface mount type connector KCN. Due to this large force, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the copper foil of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is separated from the substrate KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC separates from the substrate KCo. In some cases, the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp are peeled off from the substrate KCo together with the pads KSP.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, over resist is applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not separate from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if the surface mount type connector KCN is subjected to the force associated with the insertion and extraction of the harness to and from the surface mount type connector KCN, the peel strength is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF attached to the base does not peel off from the base material KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC peels off from the base material KCo, It is possible to reliably prevent various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with the pads KSP.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the above-described over resist is applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which external force is applied is mounted. When a surface mount type connector into which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted in addition to the boards such as the control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply board 630, the interface board 635, various decoration boards, and various relay boards are mounted. The above-described over resist may be applied to housing fixing pads of substrates such as substrates and various drive substrates. When a load is applied to the board of the movable body by wiring or harnesses that are electrically connected to the board of the movable body as the body moves, the housing of the board of the movable body in which a surface mount type connector is mounted. The above-described over-resist may be applied to the fixing pad, and in the case of various switches having a pressing operation part and being a surface mount type that is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, various The above-described over resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the board for fixing the switch, and if some external force is applied to the board, the resistance, capacitor, diode, transistor, IC, etc. The above-described over resist may be applied to the pads of the board to which various terminals of lead type or surface mount type electronic components are soldered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF is formed in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. Since the housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the outer circumference of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF Over-resisting was performed so that the outer peripheral portion of the housing fixing pad KSPF was covered with resist, but the over-resisting was not applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF, and the through hole had a land around the housing fixing pad KSPF. may be formed and over-resist may be applied to each land. FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a board on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modification, and a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board. be. FIG. 81 is a continuation of FIG. 80, and is an enlarged view of the B part of FIG. d) is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line ZZ in c). 80 and 81, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing.

A modification example in which a plurality of through-holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pads KSPF without applying over-resist to the housing fixing pads KSPF, and over-resisting is applied to each land will be described. As shown in FIGS. 81(b), 81(c) and 81(d), each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape to be soldered. pads KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the surface of the substrate KC ( housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction fixed by soldering to the mounting surface), a plurality of through holes KCTH having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "lands KCTH"), The solid ground connection wiring pattern that connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid ground is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Various wiring patterns connected to KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each solid ground connection wiring pattern are formed. Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. The solid ground connection wiring pattern connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH and the solid ground also has a function as a thermal pattern for the housing fixing pad KSPF.

For the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side, two rows of three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction so as to be adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF. For the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, two rows of three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. Also, on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) resist layer KCyr. A backside (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. In this modified example, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra are the same size. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) are electrically connected to each other through through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH in the area corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. ) side resist opening KBxra is formed, over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, over-resist is applied such that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. This makes it possible to increase the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp by applying over resist to each land KCTH does not separate from the substrate KCo.

As described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and the rows are adjacent to the right housing fixing pad KSPF. , and the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above, and the left housing fixing pad KSPF are placed next to each other on the left side of the As a result, even if the housing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, each land KCTH is over-resisted, so that the housing fixing pad KSPF and each land KCTH form the solid ground connection wiring pattern described above. Due to the connection, even if the surface mount type connector KCN is subjected to the force associated with the insertion and removal of the harness to the surface mount type connector KCN, the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC is formed. When the housing fixing pad KSPF attached is about to peel off from the base material KCo, the peeling strength is increased by each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. This makes it difficult for the housing fixing pad KSPF to separate from the base material KCo.

In this modified example, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. However, compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC is can be made larger or smaller. In addition, in this modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter of the backside (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

In addition, in this modification, as described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction. are arranged adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side. Although it is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left of the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, instead of or together with this, two lands are provided on the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side at regular intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows in which the KCTHs are arranged may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above and/or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side. Two rows in which two lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above and/or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Since the connector provided on the board is subjected to a load due to insertion and removal of the wiring, for example, when a person unfamiliar with handling the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector, excessive force is applied. There was a problem that the copper foil on the board peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 83 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 84 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 . 83, terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are inserted into the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. , but is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having an open rear and a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 and an electric It has a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is directly connected, and a base body 1502 which closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

[Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, and peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and connected to the same ground. (GND).

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. , lower side, and right side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e projecting rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a has an air-cooling fan FAN attached at a slightly upper right side of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, there are provided cylindrical predetermined through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal seated pan head screws (screws having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) are screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front, and a volume control switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is defined as one closed, substantially horizontally long rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) as a connector recess. 1501ac faces the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to protrude. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. formed. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged along its lower side when viewed from the front thereof so that the positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned by 1. Connector recess 1501ad is positioned lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed oblong rectangular regions (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Further, the connector recess 1501ad and the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. are exposed from each other.

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae along its left side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and is an abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are covered with an insulator). It is possible to do so. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and projects outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are opened. are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing it in, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Become. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where It is Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal round head screw, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face of the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face of the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rf1 to 1530rf having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed toward the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are closed. are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to secure the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other. The seat surface of the pan head screw made by Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. A rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side and a rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is designed to be

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation expels the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby removing the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , the space inside the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled by taking in via these ventilation holes 1501az. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

[Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in opaque black. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned along the lower side at predetermined intervals so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wires to these connectors CN2 to CN7 (positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals). Disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 that are elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501, the above-described peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding various ROM functions) and effect display control unit 1512 (various ROM functions). ), CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces etc. A peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs capable of controlling the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while the player is waiting), and various schedule data that define the progress of the effects. and SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1, 1510c2 to which various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored. a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume; a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when power is cut off; It is provided with a power source generation circuit (not shown) to be generated and various connectors CN1 to CN7.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, using SPI communication and I2C communication, electrical drive sources provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors and various solenoids, communicating via the connector CN6.) and door frames Send drive data to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or send drive data to the game board 5 side light emission data to the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side , receives signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via connector CN3 are communicating.) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate of SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate of I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530 are further provided. I have. A surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . A surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there are LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+37 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state of DC +5V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +5V being supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V DC is supplied. The LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state of DC +37V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +37V being supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are so structured that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs respectively, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided on the 1530x are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is oriented forward and backward when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the direction of the back and front of the machine 1 . The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 will be the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of 1501a.

The special connector SCN4 socket on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the special connector SCN2 plug on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the plug and the socket are connected. Mate. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket moves forward and backward (pachinko machine 1 The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the housing. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the .

Here, the reasons for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce costs, contribute to a reduction in power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the effect of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 socket on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface 1510x, By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, along with this peripheral control board 1510, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the game effect (for example, An image to convey that a jackpot game state will occur which is more advantageous than the normal state, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey the fact that the game is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 socket provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 must be fixed to the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. By adopting the special connector SCN4 socket provided with a floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed into the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. The mounting surface 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501a1 and 1501a1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made by the manufacturer and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a are absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. This is because it is possible to

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In the state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is covered with a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other (surface contact). The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y. As described above, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are brought into a conductive state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) when viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the inner space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is first placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side of the cover body 1501.) side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is (located close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when the body 1501 is viewed from the back). In the procedure for mounting various substrates as described above, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when the plugs and sockets are pushed in can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). In addition, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are, for example, multiple types of methods of video signals input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is employed, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can flow to the ground (GND) of various substrates, so that the noise can be removed. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, there is no need to equip each substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which contributes to cost reduction of each substrate.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the multidirectional angle In order to confirm the state of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the top, they are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. can contribute to

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. can be checked through a vent 1501az having a In addition, the LEDML3, which is arranged near the special connector SCN1, maintains its lighting state when +37V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have the function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply. The special connector SCN3 and the special connector SCN3 function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the board-to-board connector, so that the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) 1520x can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in the 1520x.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) are distributed and arranged so that As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be performed using a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is designed to keep the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the board-to-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to the improvement of sexuality.

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and The SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c1, 1510c2 are designed so that the type and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the status of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. As a result, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12 V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and of a type with weak directivity. is adopted, it is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By turning on the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the area on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the emitted light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflecting portions (not shown) may be colored paint having a bright color such as white, or colored paint having gloss, or a metallic sheet having luster may be adhered.

In the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. , the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become noise sources and be affected by noise. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is adopted. As a result, noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the like. Noise can be removed by flowing it to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

[Partial removal of foil from solid ground]
By the way, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the area other than the area where the wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, the wiring pattern for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed is grounded (GND). , is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 also has wiring patterns for transmitting control signals and wiring patterns for supplying power. , are formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a "solid ground"), in which the other areas other than the area where various land patterns are formed are grounded (GND). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are different from each other. A plurality of through-holes (both sides (front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of peripheral control board 1510) formed on both surfaces (top (mounting surface) and back (solder surface)) of 1510 (holes (copper The same ground (GND) is established by being electrically connected through a plated hole).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side when viewed from the front. Position (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510 protruding from the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the connector 1510, the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at a position that does not interfere with the protruding terminals causes the peripheral Elongated disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above, , the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502 is formed. 1502aa3 are brought into contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG.

Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can flow to the ground (GND) of various substrates, and the noise can be removed. It has become.

By the way, the front surfaces of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. A solid ground was formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this abutted portion, and the solid ground was covered with a resist. A solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board 1510 and covered with a resist, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in the contact portion is covered with a resist without forming a solid ground. 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in the contact portion was covered with a resist instead of forming a solid ground. .

When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise intrudes through such an unexpected route, disconnection prevention ribs are formed on the base body 1502 to form electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to these electronic components. If the front surfaces of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portions in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

In addition, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts which one of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 on the front side. Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the noise will enter, it is difficult to place electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to these electronic components away from specific disconnection prevention ribs.

A high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and becomes solid. When the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the solid-state ground are in contact with each other through a resist in order to intrude into the brand, high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise entering the base body 1502 is applied to the contacting portion. As a result, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring is formed through which electromagnetic noise enters from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the solid plane.

Here, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is solid. The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid ground at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the peripheral control board, and a schematic diagram (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the corresponding positions and their peripheries are, as shown in FIG. 1510yp respectively. In other words, a region where a part of the solid plane is removed (removed) is formed on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

These foil-free regions 1510ya have a distance dimension dg0 between the left side thereof and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, which is equal to or greater than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. formed respectively. The length of the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In this embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, in these foil extraction regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil extraction region 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

That is, by forming the foil extraction area 1510ya on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil extraction area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid ground. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. is formed. Disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil extraction region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil extraction area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil-punched regions of the same shape are formed at all.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) to form the same ground ( GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise entering the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 through the foil extraction region 1510ya to perform peripheral control. A "route through which noise does not escape" is formed, which cannot penetrate into the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and the noise penetrates into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 as described above. Noise can be removed by forming a "noise exiting route" that flows to the ground (GND) of various substrates via a metal round head screw.

[Reuse of peripheral control boards]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and is a board that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is surrounded by circular soldering copper foil (so-called " lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering having a circular shape (so-called lands) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 faces the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface 1510x is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to open the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw (the bearing surface of the head).

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan portion of the metal pan screw (the seat surface of the head). By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeatedly screwing and removing the metal pan screws. lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are rubbed against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The base of the peripheral control board 1510 rubs against the seat surface of the screw head (the seat surface of the head), and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 If the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board is exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot be reused due to oxidation and poor electrical connectivity. There is a problem of difficulty.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have They are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw are electrically connected together. It is covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and can be prevented from being oxidized. It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state in which the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. electrical connection between the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw due to the viscosity of can improve the properties.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the ground (GND) of each board through the metal pan screw. By reliably forming such a "route through which noise escapes", the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be stably maintained.

Further, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are separated as described above. , are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed. As described above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws, so they are soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness of the applied solder is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder rises), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw will be separated from each other. There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. As described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 serve as mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) for the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, if the thickness of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, is not made uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 must be uniform. The contact area between the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. It should be noted that if the thickness of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal round head screw and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral Distortion of the control board 1510 will occur, and it may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw abuts, is A metal mask is placed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (something like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, is made uniform as the plate thickness of the metal mask. can be done. In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 which contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed into a metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). The solder paste is applied through the holes, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have their surfaces are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed, but the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 abuts against the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, respectively, and is in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side of 1510x, may be coated with a resist solution and covered. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist solution. be. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screws. state can be In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer coated on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness. 1510r4 and inserting metal pan head screws into mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 of the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied through the holes formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. ) can be flowed into the solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should be soldered so that the soldering does not partially bulge. need to be uniform. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width of the resist is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 86(c), a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are arranged in a ring around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. and horizontal lines (the resist may have a predetermined width and only vertical lines may be formed in a plurality of lines spaced apart by a predetermined distance, or the resist may have a predetermined width). It may be a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed only in the horizontal direction with a predetermined distance between them.), and as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines are formed obliquely downward to the right), and a small circular shape (not shown). An aggregated shape and the like can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). Any material may be used as long as it can exhibit the effect of suppressing the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In the above-described embodiment, a metal pan screw was used to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chrysanthemum washer”).

In the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a are formed. are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the land 1510rb1 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rb4 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are brought into contact with each other, so that the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan head screw. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. A metal cover 1501′ may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. FIG. In this case, the base body 1502 closing the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of the conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or may be made of metal.

An amplifier board having circuits for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is accommodated in the metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. noise may intrude into the partial case of Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, so that the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of amplifier boards formed on the amplifier board The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of a plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the rear surface side of the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case are brought into contact with each other. , the plurality of lands formed on the back side (solder side) of the amplifier board and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the board box made of metal is electrically connected to a plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal part case of the metal board box The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case through the metal round head screws, thereby efficiently dissipating the heat to the outside air. can also

In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (flat cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screws. Thus, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used in a two-story board (so-called "turtle child board"). can. For example, a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, a plurality of lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board. and multiple lands of the sub-board are screwed to both ends of metal struts (spacers), respectively. can be directly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin accommodates the peripheral control board 1510, but the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are accommodated. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to regulations, and a conductive resin is used. However, the board box for housing the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for housing various relay boards are made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. It may be fixed in the same way. In this way, the same noise countermeasure effect as the above-mentioned peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be obtained for the board box that houses the power board and various relay board boxes that house various relay boards. can.

[7. Game content]
The contents of games played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111. The more the handle 111 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Also, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp entrance 2501. .

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 to the left of the highest part in front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510), While contacting a plurality of obstructing nails N, it flows down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 . When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, the center release portion 2503a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the general winning opening 2001.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the first shelf portion 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200, or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general prize winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a is located on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510). 2511), it passes through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, and is discharged above the gate portion 2003 of the center role 2500. After coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the portion 2003, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first distribution passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impingement portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. and a second circulation passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first circulation passage 2521, enters the upstream space portion 2511, and hits the impingement portion 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not touch (strength that is somewhat weaker than hitting to the right), it enters the second distribution passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B struck into the upstream space 2511 circulates through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 according to the striking strength.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 is guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by a plurality of obstructing nails N planted above the gate portion 2003, and the gate portion 2003 passes through the gate portion 2003. It circulates on the right side of the gate section 2003 without passing through. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is guided more to the left than the right side of the gate 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the gate 2003 with a high probability. It passes through the gate unit 2003 with probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result of the lottery is "normal hit", the attacker unit 2400 The closed second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 .

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). This general lottery result suggestion is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

A game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate portion 2003 has a very high probability of being placed on the right side of the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. Attacker right passage 2422 of . On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate portion 2003 is blocked by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to the left side of the attacker's right passage 2422 with a very high probability, and enters the attacker's left passage 2421 with a high probability.

In addition, the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422, and when the game ball B is received in this general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 .

Game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422, by contacting the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, passes through the communication port 2425 with a high probability and enters onto the second starting port guidance shelf 2423, and is closed. It circulates on the second starting door 2411 . When the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422 does not enter onto the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423, it enters the attacker's lower right passage 2426 and is involved in the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008 without. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the closed second starting opening door 2411 .

Then, when the game ball B enters onto the second start opening guidance shelf 2423, the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 is "ordinary hit", and the second start opening door 2411 is opened. In the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 350 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B, which entered onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and was not accepted by the second starting opening 2004, was released to the big winning opening guiding rack 2424 side and rolled on the closed big winning opening door 2413. Later, it is released into the game area 5a and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second starting entrance guide shelf 2423 and the big winning entrance guide shelf 2424, and the intermediate passage 2427 is opened, the second starting entrance guide The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424 side enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is ejected from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved in the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加

From the above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 so much, so that the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 causes the second start port 2004 to open. It is rare that the ordinary lottery result is drawn, and the game ball B is not often accepted in the second start port 2004.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. There is a high possibility that a "normal hit") will be drawn, and a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

For this reason, since the player performs the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the hitting strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the hitting strength at which the game ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by giving a change to the hitting operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the deterioration of interest by making the player enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加can be made

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. ”) will be drawn for special lottery results. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "15R big win A", "15R big win B", and the like. .

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 350 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 130. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

If the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 becomes an open state capable of accepting the game ball B, or a predetermined time to the large winning opening 2005 An opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which, when any of the conditions of acceptance of the number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, the game balls B are in a closed state in which the game balls B cannot be accepted; Repeat for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it is a "15R big hit", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", when the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state due to the big winning game state, if the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the distribution piece 2415, the big winning game is played. After the state ends, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is a probability change that changes the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" will be drawn during a predetermined specific number of times of fluctuation, and a time reduction that changes the display time of a performance image suggesting the special lottery result. state is maintained.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In addition, as described above, by the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, when the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state, the second distribution passage When the player hits the game ball B aiming at the entrance of 2522, it is necessary to finely adjust the hitting operation. There is a fear that the interest in the game will be reduced. However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the third Since the game ball B can be circulated to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (big winning opening 2005 side) via the second start opening guiding shelf 2423, it is easy to adjust the delicate driving operation. The game ball B can be accepted into the big prize winning opening 2005 by the hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous game state, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be sharpened according to the game state. can be attached, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 indicate the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 . The function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, 15R big win game A, 15R big win game B, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until it is displayed is different from that of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450, which is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame 3 is performed according to the special lottery result of the lottery. A player-participation-type effect can be performed by operating the unit 161 . In the player participatory performance, the pressing operation part 161 can be raised and conspicuous by the first elevation drive motor 180a and the second elevation drive motor 182, and the player participatory performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation part 160. be able to.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, and the back first effect unit 3100 and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 , and the back third effect unit 3300, etc., can be used as appropriate to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., and various effects can entertain the player, reducing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, according to the special lottery result drawn, the first back of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 is displayed. By appropriately using the production unit 3100, the second rear production unit 3200, the third rear production unit 3300, etc., it is possible to perform light-emitting production, movable production, display production, etc., and the player can be attracted by various productions. It is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[8. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 64 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 92. FIG. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 87, and FIG. 89 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control are explained, followed by movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation Display processing will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[8-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor winning symbols derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the winning type), and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc are provided. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the reception of the game ball of the second start port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination An initial value determination random number for determination of a normal symbol hit for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the processing when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power failure processing (at power failure). When clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol per determination is stored in the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU incorporates extracts the ID code from, based on the extracted ID code, executes an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol per determination, and this derived fixed value is set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution is taken to prevent analysis by taking a two-step security measure.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed so that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004. game state cannot be generated.

[8-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancel switch) that also serves three functions. Acts as a RAM clear switch function to completely erase the information. In this judgment, the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear is not performed when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI. While it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, if the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) is to be erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a setting key input to the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. is inserted, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) to turn on the setting key switch. The setting key 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is an extremely short period of time. , the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch is activated based on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later). 1311ab is turned ON) is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit setting change and confirmation display of the set values 1 to 6). A value of 1 is set when performing confirmation display is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when setting change of set values and confirmation display are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. In addition, since the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510 at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 is controlled by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU ) can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1. (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value change permission conditions are satisfied. judge.

When the main control MPU determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1. Also, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, so that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined to erase various information in the same manner as when a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied.

When the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0. Also, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is established. judge.

In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the predetermined set value display permission condition is established. When it is determined that there is, a set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, which will be described later in detail, the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S28 or in the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0), a checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S29, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning clockwise 60 degrees and turning ON, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. This routine is performed again. is started. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. At the same time, in the determination of step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. is set key ON, and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. 1 and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and following the setting change processing of step S37, which will be described later, In the process of step S38, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method”).

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab remains at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since the switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned ON and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-described step S20B, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the above-described step S26. is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. In step S38, which will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM (or it is unreliable), there are two canceling methods: the first RAM error canceling method and the second RAM error canceling method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has ended normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processing, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- is set. If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, the predetermined set value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, setting change processing is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be detailed later, is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. FIG. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also serves three functions. Works as a button function. Every time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal (set value selection switching signal) is input to change the set value and display it on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned off from the ON operation, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU. do.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the predetermined Although the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, when it is determined to erase various information in the same way as when the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area to clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" means a set value dedicated area in which set values are stored, and a count of the number of game balls collected through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. and an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores set values to be changed in setting change processing described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores game balls collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball counting process described later. The number count result (total number) is stored.

In addition, the main control MPU may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, the main control MPU is when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that conveys that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated When erasing various information by instructing RAM clearing, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power failure processing is not completed normally, the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU A unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and an initial value derivation process is carried out for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern based on the taken out ID code. A fixed value is set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update the hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined When all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S54, when the main control MPU judges that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs non-hit-or-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, stops outputting drive signals to various displays of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power failure processing, and the main control side power ON processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing is not stored immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied due to the fact that the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S29 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, in the determination of step S25, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. If so, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. -FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. Similarly, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, it is completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38, except for a specific area, out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. In this way, when the pressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation is performed), even if it is not a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU performs setting change processing), the main The control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a state of probability variation (probability variation) winning, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business starts. Therefore, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, the game hall clerk or other staff member needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. In the case of deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed, even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to confirm the current setting value that has been set. Only 2 or 3 people are allowed to possess it. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as a game hall clerk clears (clears) the game backup information. When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch when it is necessary to perform the game backup information by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. It can be erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, the problem in the case where the processing after step S26 is performed after the wait time waiting processing of step S22 will be described.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. DC +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as a DC +5V to the island of the game hall. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and just before reaching the standby time, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. is applied as DC +5V, within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control-side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that the aforementioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication of intention by a hall clerk or other attendant.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 can be determined to match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, supplies game information and other information (e.g., the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU of the main control MPU, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) are reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405 . Here, first, the problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, Next, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed for the main control return destination command at the time of power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven to open and close the big winning port 2005. The state of being closed by the member is transferred to the state of being open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the main control board issues a large winning hole 1 count display command to convey the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 2005. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member, for example, when finishing the 4th round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state. The main control board 1310 sends a large winning gate 1 closed display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the main control board 1310 is to shift from the closed state to the closed state (that is, start closing the big winning gate 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 between rounds). , and when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and opens the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning hole opening 5th display command that instructs the transition to the state where the large winning hole 2005 is opened (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the large winning hole 2005). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen according to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state, and when the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the start opening solenoid 2404 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2004 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not understand what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the command at power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 to shift to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is in a jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. The big winning slot is open. It is possible to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. In a state in which a game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and in a state in which the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen notifying that the drive of the starting port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2004 (for example, "The movable piece is open. Play the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting port.”) is displayed on the display area of the performance display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the front surface of the pachinko machine. A game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored to the player seated on the seat can be instructed.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off processing even once, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S29, in step S30 In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the RWM clear button of the payout control board 633 When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information instructing that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, Including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), any of the above-mentioned low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state state (probability and time saving state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine, etc.) is such that probability fluctuations occur in the state where the game is played.

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when the power is turned on), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by looking at the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[8-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 89 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 detection signal, the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 Signal (Since the signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, it may be masked to omit reading.), the door frame open switch 4a A detection signal from, a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the board 633 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are read, respectively, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is stored in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 2101, a start win prize command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2402 When there is a detection signal of , the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In the present embodiment, the state in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is changed when this switch input processing is started. , are read first, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, A detection signal from the big winning mouth sensor 2403, a detection signal from the out mouth sensor 3032, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (this RWM The signal from the clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, so it may be masked to omit reading.), the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a. , a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone empty terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU judges that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display to inform that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 is input to the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the out-port sensor 3032 detects game balls collected by the provided out-port 1008, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls collected by the out-port 1008 is incremented by 1. Perform an (increment) operation. The main control MPU stores the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls recovered through the out port 1008, and stores it in the dedicated area for counting out balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, when the value of the recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls recovered at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the main control MPU creates a ball recovery command to notify that effect. and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. It should be noted that the main control MPU, when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 65535) and further adds (increments) the value of the recovered ball counter by 1 to the value of the recovered ball counter, The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value of 0, and an operation to add from this value of 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10. Therefore, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball When the payout control board 633 does not receive a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It creates it and transmits it to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. , second starting hole 2004, and big winning hole 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5"). It counts the number of game balls to be put out, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, although the second starting opening door 2411 is not in the open state, there is a ball entering the game ball B in the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening door 2413 is not in the open state. First, it is confirmed whether there is an abnormal state regarding the winning ball, such as the entry of the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005 . In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred in the fraudulent act detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side is sent via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 Therefore, the main control MPU outputs a security signal, which contributes to the early detection of an abnormal state of the prize ball by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall. In addition, the security signal output when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred is the security signal output when it is determined that the magnet goto described later is being performed, or the vibration signal described later. This signal is the same as the security signal that is output when it is determined that a goto is being performed. In addition, the security signal is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side through the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 by the main control MPU. However, after the main control MPU has sent a command for instructing the output of the security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU, through the external terminal plate 558 connected to the payout control board 633, the game hall side A security signal may be output to a hall computer installed in the hall.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnetic goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that a magnet counter has been played in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. is set to a value of 0 (zero). When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent activity detection processing. ), a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display for notifying that the magnet goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a magnet is being played in the fraudulent act detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is By outputting the security signal from the control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can find the magnetic goto at an early stage.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, the fraud by vibration (hereinafter referred to as "vibration goto") ) is being performed, and the value of the vibration counter is incremented by one. The value of this vibrating counter is incremented each time it is determined that a vibrating counter is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. is set to a value of 0 (zero). When the value of the vibration goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent act detection processing. ), a vibrating goto notification command classified into a notice display indicating that the vibrating goto is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the vibrating goto is being performed in the fraudulent act detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is By outputting the security signal from the control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can find the vibrating goto at an early stage.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not in the jackpot gaming state (big winning opening 2005 when a game ball enters), etc.), a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. .

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the magnet goto and/or the vibrating goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the magnet goto and the vibrating goto are detected. When not detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud is not detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing enable signal setting process (step S113). In this shooting permission signal setting process, the logic of the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the shooting of the game ball B is allowed is set. Specifically, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0 based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, the main control MPU determines that fraud has not been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is set by hardware including the main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic. Although it is configured, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), it is set to the firing permission logic.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and set this obtained random number as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 2101, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2402 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win game state, etc.) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set so as to light the round indicator lamp, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. A function display unit 1400 for setting the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so as to light the 15-round display lamp, storing it in the output information storage area as output information, and lighting the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning prize winning information in the second region of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening the movable piece, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the value of the random number for judging the symbol per pattern does not match the judgment value of the normal per symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. , Creating various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, storing as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and lighting the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the main payout control board 633 Or, when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the big winning port 2005, and output a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece In addition, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special design display information output signal, normal design display information output signal, short time medium information output signal, start winning prize information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, or a launch permission signal set to the firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. Or output a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, or store it in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM It outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power on, various commands categorized as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role effects related, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display Commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 is scheduled to pay out prize balls based on the game balls that enter various winning holes provided on the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize ball number information. number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies each time the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10 balls, and set values are set). A setting change command that informs that a change has been made, an error display command that informs that there is an abnormality (or is unreliable) in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM A setting value confirmation display command, etc., for notifying that the setting values stored in the setting value exclusive area described later are to be confirmed are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. can be done. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation settings of the command to be performed, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter when power is turned on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the output determination counter notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

When the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the received ball. For each collection command, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (that is, collected at the out port 1008 update the information that associates the total number of game balls played) with the updated date and time). It should be noted that, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the business hours of the game hall without being able to receive the ball recovery command, the last counted value (that is, the game balls recovered at the outlet 1008) Ball recovery information in which the total number of balls (total number of balls) and the updated date and time are associated is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 starts operating the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the day, and the ball recovery information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball recovery history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. output to the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control is to be returned to the peripheral control board 1510 when power is turned on. It is possible to do so. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[8-4. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting values as shown in FIG. 90 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main-control-side power-off processing (at power-off) in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 87, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag indicating whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are set values 1 to 6, which are within the normal range. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process of step S210 may proceed to set the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value obtained in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also serves three functions. Works as a button function. This determination reads a signal (setting value selection switching signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and reads the setting change signal of the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z. It is determined whether or not a detection signal is input. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated when the setting value selection switching signal is input from the RWM clear button 633z, while the main control MPU determines that the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z is changed. When the selection switching signal has not been input, it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the main control MPU adds (increments) the set value by 1 to update it (step S218). ). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned off. (step S222). In this determination, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and turning it off. When an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. is not turned off.

When determining in step S222 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. . In the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU judges that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the processing of steps S218 and S220 is performed again, the judgment of step S222 is made, and the setting key is pressed. is not turned off, the process returns to the judgment of step S216, and the set value is changed each time the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is turned off. The value is incremented by 1 and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the set value updated by the operation of the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z immediately before is set and displayed. displayed on device 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned off, the setting values updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are mainly used. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal control RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing of step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

Following step S224, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting indicator 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. is hidden (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting change and confirmation display of the setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of setting value 1 to setting value 6). is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when the setting change of the setting value and confirmation display are not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing setting change of setting values and confirmation display thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. A determination is made as to whether or not it is in any of the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, that set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting of step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 prior to the serial communication initial setting of step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, it is prioritized before the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved and set at step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S233 that it is not in the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current set values as shown in FIG. 91 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S350, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range (step S352). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value acquired in step S350 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S354).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S352 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S356) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

After step S354, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S358). In this determination, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to the initial position (that is, The setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a. It is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. If no input has been made, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S358 and repeats the determination in step S358 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it sends a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S360).

After step S360, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S361). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). This is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow setting change and confirmation display of the setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of setting value 1 to setting value 6). is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when the setting change of the setting value and confirmation display are not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing setting change of setting values and confirmation display thereafter.

Following step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S362), then creates a setting value confirmation display command and sets transmission information (step S364), and then in step S364 A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the set transmission information (set value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S366), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S362, the transmission information (set value confirmation display command) set in step S364 is performed prior to the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This is in order to preferentially inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the confirmation of the setting value has been completed by the setting value confirmation display command. The setting value confirmation display command indicates that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has ended (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). ).

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 87, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 87), and the processing performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 87 (step S356 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 91 It is a process performed in

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 92 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process, which is this routine, is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 87 and the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 90) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 88), the main control MPU can perform the interrupt permission setting of step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 89 cannot be performed, and the firing enable signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function, at the time of power recovery, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire enable logic.

Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 87, and the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. One process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 90) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 91), the main control MPU, in step S400, after the power is restored and the error display processing of this routine is started, Also, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot, the logic of the shooting permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and the reset function is performed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the discharge control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the attached main control output circuit.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 includes the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 90, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. This processing is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Control board transmission command transmission processing, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 91, and peripheral control board transmission in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. This process is the same as the command transmission process. The error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 87, and the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 91) and step S356 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. Update.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a blue background image in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a white background saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." In addition to performing control to display a message image of characters, the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to announce "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Controls the output from various speakers by forcibly setting the maximum volume without depending on the The processing of notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the processing with the highest priority. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command notifying the other error, the RAM error notification is performed. with the highest priority.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 147 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 93, and FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancellation switch) that also serves three functions, and here, it is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM Acts as a RAM clear switch function to completely erase the information. In this determination, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, it is determined that the RAM is not cleared, and the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is depressing. While it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, if the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. It is determined that the pressing operation part is being operated.

In the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) over a predetermined period of time from the power-on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in the determination of step S528, that is, When it is determined that the processing at the time of power failure of the payout control unit has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S540, when the payout control MPU judges that there is no power failure warning signal input, it judges whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, the payout motor 584 is controlled by payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command) have been received normally. Various information such as drive information, information on the number of winning balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on an error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error clearing switch, it becomes an error clearing signal for notifying that the error displayed on the error LED indicator has been cleared), A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, which are transmitted by the command transmission process described later. The main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has received the various commands normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit is checked. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. Thus, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 350 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, when the game balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, a logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, for example, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 350 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting processing, As an error status output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output to notify that the payout operation to pay out the rental balls is impossible when the CR unit is not in communication. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 350 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the full-tank determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is conveyed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control unit main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Incidentally, the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[9-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 93 to 95 .

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register (step S590), as shown in FIG. Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 147 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 100 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral controller power-on processing is started, the peripheral controller MPU performs initialization processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU itself, but the time required for the processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect and the pachinko game output from the main control board 1310 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU as the current time. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU with a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, executed on this occasion. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. repeatedly determined. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the peripheral control MPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 1. is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300”). Various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the production progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described level set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is set so as to achieve the specified brightness specified value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve), while the rotary operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the pallet A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0 (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the gradation information described above along predetermined mathematical expressions (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light When setting the brightness of each, the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 by the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) for the brightness of the LED used as direct light While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The brightness designation value by the operation of 303 and the corresponding special palette value are set. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off), and the first brightness specified value that is the next highest level of brightness), and in conjunction with this In addition, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark Therefore, the brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process to be described later, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU and generates one screen ( 1 frame) drawing data is output. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent delays in the processing time. It is a mechanism that can give priority to production.

Following step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the tone generator of the peripheral control MPU reads out sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channels in the sound data creation process described later. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the number of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that is originally supposed to be instructed.

Following step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyzes various commands received. Based on the analyzed various commands, the peripheral control MPU reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM. and) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Note that the peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to become the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value. When one specified brightness value is set up to the 31st specified brightness value, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so that the brightness specified value is set. It is possible.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a starting winning prize command for instructing the start of a starting winning prize effect, the number of normal symbols to be held Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), variation pattern command for instructing the start of variable production such as variable display of decorative patterns in production display device 1600 in synchronization with variable display of special patterns, It is analyzed whether it is a pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and in which game state is currently being played. recognize that there is

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands classified as related to figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the performance display control section 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. , and outputs it to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads out the image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 for one screen ( 1 frame) drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM, incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and outputs the sound data. Set the output channel to use according to the channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume control switch. Output sound data to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into 1024 steps of values up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control MPU is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from various speakers. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from various speakers by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used.

Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. seconds), the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In practice, the sound is amplified up to a master volume value, which is the sound volume that flows from various speakers, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the volume flowing from various speakers is the maximum allowable volume. is set to be Specifically, for the sound effect, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound becomes the volume actually flowing from various speakers. Amplify up to the master volume value, serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data. The maximum volume, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound and is based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, is synthesized with the maximum volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually adjusted. , the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, a brief description will be given of the control of playing a notification sound in order to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is being played from various speakers. Forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track that contains the sound effect to mute, and the sound data of the track that contains this sound effect, the sub-volume value that is set to mute, and the notification sound. Synthesize the sound data of the track and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and use the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound as the volume actually flowing from various speakers. is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the various speakers are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the sound effects are muted, the sound effects are progressing according to the above-described schedule data for sound generation, although they do not flow from the various speakers.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from various speakers for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound that is being played is set again as a sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the sound volume adjustment switch (at this time, the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned. When the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the operation, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound), and is played from various speakers.

In this way, when the effect sound is played from various speakers, the volume of the effect sound is increased when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1. Although the muted informational sound is played from various speakers, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. The sound does not start playing again from the point at which the informative sound started playing, but starts playing again from the point at which the informative sound has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the informative sound started playing.

In addition, the notification sound and announcement sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sound source can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up to a regular process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Make a backup by copying to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control units (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and sets the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, in step S1008, the value 1 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set when a V blank signal is input from VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU. do. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1045 that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), ie, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the routine continues. finish. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next processing will be performed by the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) of FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 97, will be described. . When the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral controller MPU determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100), as shown in FIG. As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. Sometimes this routine just ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it in step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids which are arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. According to the drive data, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order. do. As a result, electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, electrical drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electrical drive sources provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) , is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input, thereby providing history information (for example, original data) of detection signals from various sensors. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. or by obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sounds output from various speakers can be adjusted, and a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs.

Following step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to a backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the peripheral control MPU uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU as 1 byte (8 bits). The information is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral controller MPU determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 100 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the judgment of step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1 byte reception period timer has not timed out. If it is determined that it is within the period for receiving data, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC (step S1204). ). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, after the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the peripheral control MPU determines the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). . In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, static electricity is discharged and noise is generated. It is in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In the judgment in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU judges that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. Then, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216), Exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the peripheral control MPU receives 1-byte (8-bit) information out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the receivable period has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU stores the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value in step S1212. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in (1) and (1) do not match, this routine ends.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 101, the peripheral control MPU first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) and checks whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. Determine (step S1302). When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input. Sometimes, this routine ends as it is, but when it is determined that a power failure warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed ( step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Following step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to a regular process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU for backup.

Following step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. judge. In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this manner, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it becomes unable to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the MPU is reset, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 97 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset immediately before the power failure occurs. It has become. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[11. Control processing of the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S2031), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. The first start opening passage processing such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S2032). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S2033), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S2034).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S2035), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S2039) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) at the time of stopping the variable display is a mode suggesting "15R big hit A", A distribution piece 2415 that controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R jackpot game state A, and distributes the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. Drive control is performed, and the process of setting the active state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed. Further, when the state of suggesting "15R big win B" is reached, the big winning hole 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 15R big win game state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is transferred to the first receiving hole. 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 to drive and control the sorting piece 2415, and execute the process of setting to the valid state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be sorted to the second receiving port 2008.

Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be explained. First, in this embodiment, as a state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, it has an "effective state". Here, the "effective state" means that in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008, and after the jackpot game state is completed, It is a state in which control to a stochastic state is allowed (enabled). Therefore, by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008 in the "effective state", it will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Further, in this embodiment, as a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second receiving opening 2008, there is an "ineffective state" different from the "effective state". Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to control to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state is finished. In addition, the "invalid state" enables notification of information on the occurrence of such an abnormality to the hall management side when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 due to an abnormality such as fraud. Therefore, it is a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B has been received by the second receiving port 2008 . In addition, in this embodiment, in a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game ball B is set to the "effective state", and the second receiving port 2008 Whenever the ball B is accepted, the game is controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state is finished. Also, in a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which game balls B are not distributed to the second receiving port 2008, it is set to "disabled state", but may be set to "enabled state". Even if the "effective state" is set in all the rounds in the jackpot game state, in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 14th rounds. As in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B can be received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round when the "valid state" is set.

Also, in the jackpot control process (step S2041), after performing the opening control of the big winning opening 2005, each set process of a high probability flag, a time saving flag, and a time saving number counter is executed. A high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpots (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 15th rounds in which the jackpot 2005 is opened. When the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set by controlling to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. Although it is set, when the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. Since it does not, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, when the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 113 described later or A high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and after the end of the big hit game state, the big hit (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) that is controlled to the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) It is set when ending the big hit game state based on. Then, when the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time-saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time-saving state continues, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving state (high probability When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled in the time saving state, the low probability time saving state) is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, and the time saving number counter is set. , the counter value is counted down every time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0". is reset by the first special symbol stop processing or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (returns the counter value to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S2036), executes the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S2037), the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S2036), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S2038). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passing process (step S2032).

Now, in the processing of step S2031, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 2101 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2041.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S2042). In the processing of this step S2042, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2043 to the following steps S2043 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S2045 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S2044, the random numbers obtained in step S2041 are stored in the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S2041, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S2045), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2042, when it is determined that the number of the first reserved memory is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S2043 to S2045, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved memory changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the random number obtained in the pre-determination table (not shown) and the above step S2041, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will occur, and if a big win will not occur, a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加The mode type of game production is specified (step S2061).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determining process for the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first starting opening passing process, the specified pre-determining information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S2062).

Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the generated starting winning is a big win, the kind of big win when it becomes a big win, and executed by the performance display device 1600 when it does not become a big win. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 executes the ready-to-win effect as the game effect to be executed, or pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed, before starting the variable display according to the start winning. becomes comprehensible.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storage areas, and the peripheral control MPU stores the advance judgment information indicated by the received advance judgment command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing such as, for example, when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S2034).

Now, in the process of step S2033, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2051.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "4" (step S2052). In the processing of this step S2052, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2053- The process of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2053, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S2054, each random number obtained in step S2051, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

On the other hand, in the processing of step S2052, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S2053 to S2054, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of second reserved storage changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S2037). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. Read the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed first special Design normal processing (step S2080)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S2082) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S2083) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S2084) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S2080) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 87).

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S2080).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S2102, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. Random numbers (for example, first special random numbers, first pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random numbers are read out from the RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is memorized so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S2105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S2106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081), this process is terminated.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S2105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S2111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. Select the jackpot determination table (step S2112), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S2111), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 109 (A) (step S2113), select The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S2114).

The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 109 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) and a jackpot determination table for high probability used when the game state is high probability (high probability time saving state). Then, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, and 1/299 when the setting value is 4 1/289 when the set value is 5, 1/279 when the set value is 6, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other such that the first special random numbers other than the first special random numbers match with the loss determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. In addition, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, in the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first Like the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and when the setting value is 3 1/299, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. The second special random number wins the jackpot. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the big hit determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the loss.

Also, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, 1/31.9 when the set value is 1, 1/30.9 when the set value is 2, 1/29.9 when the set value is 3, 1/28.9 when the set value is 4, 1/27.9 when the set value is 5, and 1/26.9 when the set value is 6. The first special random number (low probability including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table.) matches the jackpot determination value, and the other first special random numbers match the loss determination value. A special random number is associated with each. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), for each setting value, the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state)) is increased 10 times. In addition, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, in the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first Similar to the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the special random numbers, 1/31.9 when the set value is 1, 1/30.9 when the set value is 2, and the set value 3 1/29.9 if the set value is 4, 1/28.9 if the set value is 4, 1/27.9 if the set value is 5, and 1/26.9 if the set value is 6. With a probability, the second special random number (including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot judgment table at low probability) matches the jackpot judgment value, and the other second special random numbers are out. Each of the second special random numbers is associated so as to match the judgment value.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S2115 ), the big hit flag indicating that the variation has been elected to the big hit is set to end the process (step S2116), the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S2102 (step S2117). Then, as a result of comparing the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S2102, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S2118), the reach flag indicating that the change is the reach is set and the process is performed. End (step S2119).

FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 110, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S2105) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S2121).

If the big hit flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. (Step S2122), the type of big hit is determined, and the mode (stop design of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined kind of big hit is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S2121, it is determined to be a missing symbol as a mode of stopping the variation of the first special symbol (step S2124).

As shown in FIG. 109(B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) associated with each judgment result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1.15R Opens and closes the big winning hole 2005 in accordance with the big win game state A. In the 15th round, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (opened so that the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easy). For example, 20 seconds), the effective state state to be controlled to a high probability state after the end), and when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, special after the end of the jackpot game state While controlling the high probability time saving state until the fluctuation display of the pattern (first special pattern and second special pattern) is executed 100 times, the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round. If not accepted, the 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state.
2.15R Opening and closing control of the big winning hole 2005 according to the big winning game state B, and the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opened so that the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds), it is set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state), and the effective state is set in the 15th round. When the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the state, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed 100 times. While controlling to the probability time saving state, if the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, special symbols (first special symbol and second One of the two types of jackpots, 15R jackpot B controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until variable display of two special symbols) is executed 100 times, is determined.

In the 15R jackpot game state A of the present example, as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the intra-round interval time is a predetermined time (4.5 seconds). Seconds) are set to open the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds). Further, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short opening (0.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. However, when starting the long-time opening (20 seconds) of the big winning port 2005, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the sorting pieces 2415 is started, and during the operation period of the sorting pieces 2415, the second receiving port 2008 It is set so that the game ball B can be accepted at . In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state ).

On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is set so that the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short opening (0.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005 is started, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. However, it is set so that the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the sorting piece 2415 . In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state ).

As described above, both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B are valid in the 15th round (when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, the high probability state is reached after the jackpot game state ends). However, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when it is opened for the second time in the 15th round. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be received, and furthermore, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period in which the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the received game balls B to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2008 . Thus, in the 15R jackpot game state A, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the valid state is extremely high, control is performed to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. The odds of doing so are extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, since the big winning hole 2005 is only opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball B to be accepted into the big winning hole 2005. Since the sorting piece 2415 is operated only for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period in which the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the receiving port 2008 . Thus, in the 15R jackpot game state B, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the valid state is extremely low, control is performed to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. The odds of doing so are extremely low.

The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is as follows: the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has passed, the sorting piece 2415 is released for a long time (10 seconds). second), and when starting the 15th round in the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, such an operation of the sorting piece 2415 I'm trying to start scheduling. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 to a single operation schedule, the amount of data regarding the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is kept from increasing as much as possible.

In the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the big win gate 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big prize gate 2005 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds. is set to Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the sorting piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is placed in the first receiving port 2007 instead of the second receiving port 2008 during that period. is set to accept In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008, and after the jackpot game state is set to a state that will not be controlled to a high probability state). Thus, in both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, in the 1st to 14th rounds, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big winning port 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. A game is simply played to see if the game ball B can be accepted when the big winning opening 2005 is opened, without playing a game as to whether it is (accepted) or not.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the allocation of the judgment value is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the decision ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, among the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B, the 15R big win A (15 rounds) that is relatively advantageous to the player 50 determination values are distributed for a jackpot with a high probability that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state of the eyes and a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. is set, 15R jackpot B (the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot game state ends 50 judgment values are set for a jackpot with a low probability of being controlled to a high probability state later. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B, 65 determination values are set for the 15R big win A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, 35 determination values are set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, at the time of the first special symbol side big win, either the 15R big win A or the 15R big win B with different degrees of advantage for the player is determined, so what kind of big win is determined at the time of the first big win. can draw attention to. In addition, in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball B to enter the second start port 2004) is performed, but the second special At the time of the big hit on the pattern side, the 15R big hit game A is decided with a higher probability than at the time of the first special pattern side, so it is possible to pay attention to how much prize balls can be obtained at the time of consecutive games. can. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous because the game characteristics change between the time of the first big win and the time of consecutive games.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R big win A is decided, the 15R big win A pattern is decided as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win B is decided, the 15R big win B pattern is decided as the big win pattern. In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R big hit A is determined, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S2125, these lottery results (type of jackpot, reach loss, or loss) are indicated (specify the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that )) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . And after that, as the process of step S2126, this process ends when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082). The peripheral control MPU starts variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns based on the received determination result notification command and variable pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern. The display of the effect display device 1600 is controlled as follows.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU selects 15 R out of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the jackpot A is specified, the 15R jackpot A pattern (combination of the same decorative patterns) is determined, and when the 15R jackpot B is specified, the 15R jackpot B pattern (common with the 15R jackpot A pattern) is decided and fluctuated. When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the ready-to-win effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. In this way, when the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed and stopped in either the 15R big win A symbols or the 15R big win B symbols, it is possible to determine from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols that it is a big win. However, since common symbols are used for the 15R big win A symbol and the 15R big win B symbol, it is impossible to distinguish between the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop pattern) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, determines that the out-of-reach design is accompanied by the out-of-reach when the out-of-reach is specified from the received judgment result notification command. (Combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same.) If the deviation is specified, the lost pattern that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same.) are not the same), and display control is performed on the effect display device 1600 for the determined stop symbol when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S2141), the type of big hit determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the current game state are selected (step S2142), if the reach flag is set (step S2143), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach corresponding to the current gaming state (step S2144), both the jackpot flag and the reach flag If it is not set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the ready-to-win effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S2145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S2146), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S2147). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S2148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Also, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, next as the process of step S2149, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S2083). This process ends when the update is completed.

In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol variation time information set to about 1 second during time saving is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), while non A variation pattern of special symbols is set in such a way that variation time information of special symbols set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the time is shortened. That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during time saving, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during non-time saving, so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short, the special Pattern fluctuation time information is set.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S2083).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S2082) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, in the process of this step S2173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084), this process is terminated.

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter for which the number of times the time saving state continues is set is "0". (Step S2183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S2184), it further determines whether the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S2185). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). In addition, when it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S2183, or when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S2185 , at which point the process proceeds to step S2187.

Also, when the big hit flag is set (step S2187), set a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game state (step S2189), start the big hit game state (set the big hit round start command). A waiting time (a period for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S2190). And next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and further the counter value of the time saving number counter is When it is not "0", after resetting the counter value (returning to "0"), a jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S2192), this process is terminated.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S2039).

In step S2189, the waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state is set in the interval timer, but in the process of step S2401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has passed, the As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005, and in the 15th round the effective state (the big winning game state by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving opening 2008). After the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process (step S2402) to be set to the state to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 in the 15th round to the second receiving opening 2008 Driving control of the distribution piece 2415 so as to enable distribution, and opening and closing of the second receiving port for monitoring whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. processing (step S2403) and are executed in order.

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing process (step S2402).

Now, in the process of step S2411, if it is determined that the big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the big winning hole 2005 as shown in FIG. according to the operation schedule, when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when open for a long time, 0.5 seconds when open for a short time) has passed since the opening state of the big winning opening 2005 (step S2412), or When the maximum winning number (for example, 9) of game balls B is won in the open state big winning hole 2005 (step S2413), the open state big winning hole 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S2414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is to end by closing the big winning port 2005 (step S2415), the command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 is the type of jackpot and the number of current rounds. A jackpot round end command corresponding to is set (step S2416), and the process proceeds to step S2428.

Also, in the process of step S2411, if it is determined that the big winning hole 2005 is in a closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 closes the big winning hole 2005 as shown in FIG. When it is time to open the big winning hole 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S2417), when it is determined to start a new round by controlling the big winning hole 2005 to open. (step S2418), sets a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the number of new rounds as a command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). Then, according to the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2008, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds to open the big winning port 2005 If it is time to start (step S2420), the valid state flag is set (step S2421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the fifteenth round in step S2420, the valid state flag must be reset at the end of the fifteenth round. Then, the large winning opening 2005 in the closed state or the large winning opening 2005 is controlled to open (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. If it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to be open (second opening in the same round, etc.) (step S2418), or the valid state flag (not at the start of the fifteenth round) (step S2420), the closed state big winning port 2005 is controlled to be opened (step S2422), step S2428 transition to Thus, an effect corresponding to the type of big win and the current number of rounds indicated by the big win round start command and the big win round end command can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

It should be noted that the valid state flag indicates that it is set to a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state). flag to indicate In the 15th round out of the 1st to 15th rounds for opening the big winning opening 2005, the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 in the second receiving opening opening/closing process (step S2403) described later is transferred to the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, by driving and controlling the distribution piece 2415 distributed to one of the second receiving ports 2008, the second receiving port 2008 can receive the game ball B and is set to the valid state.

Also, in the process of step S2428, if it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the big winning hole 2005, as shown in FIG. A large prize winning slot entry command is set as a command to be sent to 1510 (step S2429), and this process ends. As a result, when the command for entering the game ball B into the big winning hole 2005 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. can be executed by

Also, in the process of step S2417, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the big winning port 2005, as shown in FIG. When all the round numbers are completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the prize winning opening 2005 (step S2423), the jackpot execution flag is reset (step S2424). Then, when it is determined that the second acceptance port passing flag described later is set (step S2425), the high probability flag is set (step S2426), the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S2427), this process ends. In addition, when it is determined that the second acceptance port passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, and the time saving flag is set to the counter value of the time saving number counter. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S2427), this process ends. Thus, when it is determined that the second receiving port passage flag is set (the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), a high probability flag And the time saving flag is set and controlled to a high probability time saving state, but the second acceptance port passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted at the second acceptance port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round If it is determined that, only the time-saving flag is set, and control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second reception port opening/closing process (step S2403).

Now, in the process of step S2431, if it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in an open state (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the distribution piece 2415), then the same FIG. , the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2415 from the open state of the second receiving port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when open for a long time). , 0.2 seconds when it is open for a short time) has passed (step S2432), or when the current round (15th round) is ended by controlling the big winning hole 2005 to the closed state (step S2433), the second receiving port 2008 in the open state is controlled to a closed state (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007 side by the distributing piece 2415) (step S2434).

Further, in the processing of step S2431, if it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second receiving port 2008 (step S2435), the closed second receiving port 2008 is controlled to open (step S2436).

Next, in the process of step S2437, if it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. determines whether or not the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round while the valid state flag is being set (step S2438). Then, when it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S2438), the second receiving during the valid state in the 15th round When the second receiving port passing flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S2439), the second receiving port passing flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 When the command to pass through the second receiving port is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441), this process ends. Thus, as long as the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second receiving port passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. is not set, there is no control to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, when the second receiving port passing command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. can be executed by

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S2802, first, obtains the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Run.

Then, in the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal design normal process (step S2803) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal design is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2803).
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S2804) in which lottery processing and the like are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S2805) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The normal symbol display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Normal design stop processing (step S2806) to stop the fluctuation display of the design
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the second start port door 2411 rotates and the game to the second start port 2004 Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S2807) for executing the process of controlling the acceptance of the ball B

Incidentally, the normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2803) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 87).

FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S2802).

Now, in the process of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is ON and the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2811.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU. (step S2812). In the processing of this step S2812, when it is determined that the number of pending symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S2813 to S2814 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols. processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2813, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S2814, each random number obtained in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. .

However, in the process of step S2812, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not suspended anew. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S2813 to S2814, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S2803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the processing of step S2822, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU Of the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers), the random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 is stored from the first (foremost) area. Store in order. When the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. is stored, and when the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is established, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S2826), the normal figure per determination table (not shown) ) is selected (step S2826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) (step S2825), the normal figure per determination table (not shown) at non-time saving is selected (step S2827), the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal pattern normal process are compared (step S2828).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is time saving (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-shortening working hours used when the game state is non-shortening working hours (low probability non-shortening working hours state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is always elected per normal figure, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to the second start opening 2004 is controlled to allow acceptance of the game ball B.

In addition, in the non-short-time general pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 251 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working hours, even if there is a passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, since there is no winning per normal figure, the second start door 2411 rotates and the second There is no possibility to control the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S2822 of normal pattern normal processing, when it is determined to be per normal pattern (step S2829 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S2830), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S2831), on the other hand, as a result of comparison with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal design normal process with the selected normal design per determination table, when it is determined that it is lost, the normal fluctuation of the design A normal pattern loss pattern is determined as a mode (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S2832). And after that, when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated (step S2833) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S2804), this process ends.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal design is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal design always wins, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal design is extremely is shortened to a much shorter predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal pattern becomes a hit, the second starting port 2004 is controlled by an opening/closing pattern in which the opening state is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the control of the time-saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will win is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second start port 2004 is open. Due to the long time, etc., it is much easier to win the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and it is more efficient to aim at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. You can win B. In addition, in the control of the non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal pattern does not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. Also, the game ball B cannot enter the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the game ball B cannot be won in the second start port 2004, so the first start port 2002 In order for the game ball B to win a prize, the game ball B must be shot aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "left hitting"). In addition, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at suitable positions, and the game ball B is attached to the obstacle nail. By coming into contact with N, the game ball B is given various movements and flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, the first starting port 2002 is not necessarily won, and the first starting port 2002 is won. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, since it is possible to efficiently win the game ball B by aiming at the second start port 2004 rather than the first start port 2002, the game is played at the second start port 2004 In order for the ball B to win a prize, the game ball B must be shot aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right hitting"). In addition, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate part 2003 The passing game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time-saving state, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (ejected to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time-saving state is performed. Compared to the first starting port 2002 in the inside, the game ball B comes to win the second starting port 2004 very efficiently.

Further, during control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will win is extremely high, and the variable display of the normal symbol The time required for control is constant and short, and the time of the open state of the second start port 2004 is long. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-time saving state. The variable display control of the special symbols (suspension of the variable display control of the special symbols) can be digested. That is, when the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, by hitting the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004, it becomes a jackpot again in a short time. It is possible to expect to obtain many game balls B by controlling to a big winning game state. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B to be paid out by the winning of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is set to one, so the game to the second start port 2004 Even if the winning of the ball B occurs frequently, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced while increasing the interest of the player.

[12. Behavior of pachinko machine when power is turned on]
In this embodiment, as the functions of the pachinko machine 1, a function of changing setting values and a function of confirming and displaying the setting values are installed. Specifically, by executing the setting change process in step S37 described above, the setting value can be changed, and by executing the setting value confirmation display process in step S28, the confirmation display of the setting value is displayed. allowing it to be done. In order to change the setting of such a set value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a In order to confirm and display the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating it. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z also functions as a RAM clear switch, a setting switching button, and an error release switch.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 120 (A) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and Figure 120 (B) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power is turned on. 120(C) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. is a time chart showing

As shown in FIG. 120, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and is stabilized. ) is set.

At timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU operates the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch. It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). After step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch is activated based on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and it is determined whether or not there is an opening of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key. The determination result is stored as operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z can operate the pachinko machine while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. 1, and the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a must turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

After the operation information is stored at timing tx, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts up (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. , and is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination of the values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG and the values of the setting key ON flags CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S26, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S27, a predetermined set value display permission is given. When the condition is established, the set value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and it is determined whether or not there is an opening of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key. The judgment result is stored as operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. It is intended to maintain the memory of information. At the timing ty, based on the stored operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 120 (A), when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the RWM clear button 633z pressing operation unit is operated, the setting key switch 1311a need not be turned on. As described above, when the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. At timing ty, it is decided to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the stored operation information. Step S38) is to be performed.

In addition, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx, but at the timing ty, the RWM clear button 633z There is no need for the pressing operation part to be operated. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. It is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

As shown in FIG. 120(B), when changing the setting of the set value, at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. and the setting key switch 1311a must be ON. As described above, when the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is decided to perform the setting change processing (step S37) based on the stored operation information, and from the timing ty, the setting change processing (step S37) is to be performed. . After starting the setting change process (step S37) at timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off from the ON state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx. However, at timing ty, there is no need to operate the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, and similarly, it is not necessary for the setting key switch 1311a to be ON-operated. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. It is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated. It is possible to However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state before the timing ty arrives, after starting the setting change process (step S37) at the timing ty, The state in which the setting key switch 1311a has been ON must be changed to the state in which it is OFF again, and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a has been ON must be changed to the state in which it is OFF. This is because, in the judgment of step S222 of the setting change process, the main control MPU judges whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the switch is turned off.

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change process (step S37). Anything that does. In this example, at timing tx, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1. Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed from the timing ty after the setting change process (step S37) and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed. It is sufficient if the value is reset to 0 before the time.

As shown in FIG. 120(C), when confirming and displaying the set values, at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. On the other hand, the setting key switch 1311a must be ON. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is determined to perform the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the timing ty, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed. I am planning to do it. After starting the set value confirmation display process (step S28) at the timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off from the ON state, the set value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is completed (timing t4).

It should be noted that, in order to confirm and display the setting value, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing tx, but at the timing ty, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. No need. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. The state in which the switch 1311a is ON can be changed to the state in which it is OFF. However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state before the timing ty arrives, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is started at the timing ty. Afterwards, it is necessary to turn the setting key switch 1311a from the ON state to the OFF state, and to turn the ON state of the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF state. This is because, in the judgment of step S358 of the set value confirmation display process, the main control MPU judges whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the state is changed from the ON state to the OFF state.

In this example, at timing tx, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to 0, but the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed between timing ty and timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that resets the value to 0 will suffice.

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and in FIGS. This assumes that the situation continues. In this respect, the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing tx. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information is restricted so as not to be set to a value of 1 (to be set to a value of 0). there is This is because during the business hours of the game hall, etc., the setting is changed illegally under the condition that the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (under a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice). This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing. The main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, and the outer frame 2 is opened from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. According to this, even if some kind of abnormality or malfunction occurs in the body frame open switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM can be cleared. By making it possible to set the notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming unexecutable. Further, even if some abnormality or trouble occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles in the game start itself as much as possible.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key ON flag as the second operation information The value of CS-FLG is set, and their operation information is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Based on this, it is determined whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), to perform setting change processing (step S37), or to perform set value confirmation display processing (step S28), and the determined processing I am trying to do In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx and before the arrival of the timing ty, it is possible to change the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a. Even if there is, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained without being changed. As a result, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the hall manager may mistake the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a. By maintaining the operation information stored at the timing tx so as not to be changed even when the operation mode is changed, there is no need to newly turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine After turning on the power of 1, the processing intended by the hall manager (initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is quickly executed. can do.

Further, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, besides operating the power switch 630a, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed without operating the setting key switch 1311a. In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a in addition to operating the power switch 630a. In order to perform confirmation display, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z in addition to operating the power switch 630a. At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information , and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and at timing ty, the hall manager intended processing (initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is executed. For example, when the main control internal RAM is initialized, when the setting value is changed, and when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, if an operation unit is provided for each of the cases, other than the power switch 630a Although it is necessary to provide three operation units for the operation information, by differentiating the processing executed after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 depending on the combination of operation information, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the power switch 630a and the setting key switch 1311a, and the number of parts required for the operation portion can be saved.

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as second operation information, and as shown in FIGS. 120B and 120C, the period from timing tx to timing ty is The set state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held as the second operation information, so that it does not matter whether the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 . In other words, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, opening and closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be repeated any number of times. On the other hand, after the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 is moved to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. When it is closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at timing tx is reset, and at timing ty, setting change processing (step S37) and setting value confirmation display processing are performed. (step S28), or without resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx, the setting change process (step S37) at the timing ty. Alternatively, it may not be determined that the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is to be performed. That is, even if the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing tx, if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives, may be restricted so that the setting value cannot be changed or the setting value confirmation display cannot be performed. According to this, as described above, during the business hours of the game hall, etc., under the situation where the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (under the circumstances where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice) It is possible to prevent unauthorized setting confirmation.

Further, in this example, in step S14 of the main control side power-on process, on the condition that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated even temporarily, the RAM clear notification flag is set as the first operation information. Although RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been pressed long. It may be a condition that Similarly, in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, on the condition that the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated even temporarily, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. is set, the condition may be that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if the hall manager accidentally touches the RWM clear button 633z pressing operation section or the setting key switch 1311a temporarily, processing unintended by the hall manager will not occur. can be prevented from being executed.

Further, although details will be described later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted so as not to be executed. . In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, the hall manager changes the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z from the operating state to the non-operating state, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. It is possible to change from the state of being on to the state of being turned off, but it is restricted so that fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. . As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it will be detected as a fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent that it is being done, and suppress the obstruction of regular work.

[12-1. Modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, when the setting value is changed, and when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the pressing operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 The timing for determining whether or not the unit is operated is the same as the timing for determining whether or not there is an opening of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key. The timing for determining whether or not there is a key ON operation may be different from the timing for determining whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. A modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing a modification of the main-control-side power-on process. Also, FIG. 122(A) is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. 122(C) is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case of changing the settings of the set values when the power of the machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when performing. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z also functions as a RAM clear switch, a setting switching button, and an error release switch.

As shown in FIG. 122, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the main control MPU performs RAM access permission setting (step S10), and then performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and is stabilized. ) is set.

At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (step S14). When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. ing. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z can operate the pachinko machine while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. 1 must be powered up.

After the first operation information is stored at timing tx, following step S16A or step S16B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts up (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. , and is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch is activated based on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). That is, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not there is an opening of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the second operation information. is doing. Thus, in the modified example, the first operation information is stored at the timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time waiting process, whereas at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process , the second operation information is stored. As the period from timing t3 to timing ty1, at least 10 seconds (s), which is the standby time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time standby process (step S22), is set. may turn ON the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, but after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the main The setting key switch 1311a may be turned ON until the timing ty1 at which the control MPU completes the wait time standby process.

At timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU changes the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS. - Determine which combination of FLG values are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S26, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S27, a predetermined set value display permission is given. When the condition is established, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. However, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. On the other hand, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as second operation information. However, the storage of the second operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. At the timing ty2, based on the stored operation information, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step S37) is performed. It is decided whether to perform step S28).

As shown in FIG. 122 (A), when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, the setting key switch 1311a must not be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the timing ty1, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation information. It is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. At timing ty2, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the stored operation information. Step S38) is to be performed.

When the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, it is necessary that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx. It is not necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the button 633z. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated to the state in which it is not being operated.

Further, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at timing ty1, but at timing tx or timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a It may be turned ON. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the state in which it is OFF during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. there is

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty2, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to 0 from timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

As shown in FIG. 122(B), when changing the setting of the set value, at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. must have been As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, to change the set value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned on at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process after timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation information. It is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting change processing (step S37) based on the stored operation information, and from the timing ty2, the setting change processing (step S37) is to be performed. . After starting the setting change process (step S37) at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off from the ON state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

In order to change the setting of the set value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx. There is no need to operate the pressing operation part of . That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated to the state in which it is not being operated.

In order to change the set value, the setting key switch 1311a must be ON at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is ON at timing tx or ty2. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the ON state and the OFF state of the setting key switch 1311a during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. there is

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty2, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). In this example, at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the setting key Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed from the timing ty2 after the setting change process (step S37) and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed. It is sufficient if the value is reset to 0 before the time.

As shown in FIG. 122(C), when confirming and displaying the set values, at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. Should not have been. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, in order to confirm and display the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation information. It is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is determined to perform the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the stored operation information, and from the timing ty2, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed. I am planning to do it. After starting the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is switched from ON to OFF, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is completed (timing t4).

In addition, in order to confirm and display the setting value, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing ty1. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the ON state and the OFF state of the setting key switch 1311a during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. there is

In this example, at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to a value of 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (step S28). Anything that resets to

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the second operation information, and in FIGS. This assumes that the situation continues. In this respect, the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing ty1 arrives, or the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing ty1. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information is restricted so as not to be set to a value of 1 (to be set to a value of 0). there is This is because during the business hours of the game hall, etc., the setting is changed illegally under the condition that the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (under a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice). This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing. The main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, and the outer frame 2 is opened from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. According to this, even if some kind of abnormality or malfunction occurs in the body frame open switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM can be cleared. By making it possible to set the notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming unexecutable. Further, even if some abnormality or trouble occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles in the game start itself as much as possible.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information, and the first operation information is used as the main control. The first operation information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the MPU, and the first operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. At timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and the second operation information is transferred to the main control MPU. , and the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. At the timing ty2, based on the stored operation information, the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step S37) is performed. It is determined whether to perform step S28), and the determined process is performed. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx and until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON state and in the OFF state. It is possible to freely change the state of At timing ty1, the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. After that, at timing ty2, based on the stored operation information, it is determined whether the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the set value is confirmed. Whether or not to perform the display processing (step S28) is determined, and the determined processing is performed. As a result, when the setting value is changed or the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the hall manager erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3. Even if the user forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the setting key switch 1311a can be changed to the ON state until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored. There is no need to turn on the power again, and the processing intended by the hall manager after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (any of step S28)) can be executed quickly. Also, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, even if the hall manager erroneously turns ON the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, By changing the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF state until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored arrives, there is no need to change the setting of the setting value again, and the pachinko machine 1 After the power is turned on, the processing intended by the hall manager (initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is quickly executed. be able to.

As described above, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the period from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 to the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, It is configured to be longer than the period until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, there is no need to simultaneously operate the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pushed after the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. An ON operation is possible, and the hall manager can easily operate a plurality of operation units.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in order to initialize the main control built-in RAM or change the setting of the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, but the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, not at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. This is because the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is composed of a press-type switch that does not maintain the operation state, and after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, until timing ty1 arrives. , even if an attempt is made to continue operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, it is unclear whether or not the timing ty1 has arrived. It may stop. For this reason, as for the timing of operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, by setting the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z can be operated for a long period of time. There is no need to keep doing this, and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the setting change process (step S37) can be reliably executed as intended by the hall manager.

Also, as mentioned above. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts up (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. , and is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). At the time when the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, a command specifying that it is waiting for determination whether or not there is an ON operation of the setting key at timing ty1 is sent to the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ), after the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, until the timing ty1 arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is operated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. is ON-operated. This setting key operable notification consists of a repeated voice message "Setting key can be operated", a message "Setting key can be operated!" The lamp is illuminated in a color corresponding to whether or not it is being operated.

Further, although details will be described later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted so as not to be executed. . In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty2, the hall manager changes the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z from the operating state to the non-operating state, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. It is possible to change from a state of being turned off to a state of being turned on, or from a state of being turned off to a state of being turned on. is restricted to not perform fraud monitoring using As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it will be detected as a fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent that it is being done, and suppress the obstruction of regular work.

[13. Behavior of pachinko machine in change permission state and confirmation display state]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where setting value change permission and setting value confirmation display are performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. FIG. 123 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during setting change of the setting values, and FIGS. 124 and 125 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of the setting values. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different in the state where the setting value is changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, compared to the state where the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed. It is a thing. In addition, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of the set values is substantially the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting change of the set values. 1 is not operated, even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, various information at the time of turning off the power is retained.

As shown in FIG. 123, when changing the settings of the set values, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state. In some cases, it is necessary to cut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 (timing t1), insert a metal setting key into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch, and turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), setting It becomes a state in which it is possible to change the value setting (change permission state). In such a change permission state, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a setting switching button is pressed. After that, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned ON to the original position, and then the setting key cylinder is turned OFF. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off (timing t4). In other words, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value is changed. It becomes a state in which it is impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the metal setting key from the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play the game. can be performed.

In addition, when the setting value is changed, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Until then, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, after that, The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the special symbol and special electric accessory control of step S114 Processing, normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing in step S116, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. In other words, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permission state), but the first starting gate 2002, the second starting gate 2004, and the big prize winning gate 2005 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the gate section 2003, the input of the detection signal is not validated, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the second start opening This is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the big winning opening door 2413, the sorting operation of the sorting piece 2415, etc. are not performed.

As shown in FIG. 124, in the case of confirming and displaying the set values currently set, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If it is, it is necessary to cut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 (timing t1), insert a metal setting key into the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on (timing t2). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), the setting value can be confirmed and displayed ( confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, the setting display 1310g shows the current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). is displayed, and then the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, and is turned OFF (timing t4), the setting display 1310g is switched from displaying the setting values to not displaying them. In other words, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). It becomes a state in which it is impossible to perform confirmation display (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the metal setting key from the insertion opening 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play the game. can be performed.

It should be noted that, in the case of confirming and displaying the set value currently set, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on processing. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display processing), and from timing t3. During the period up to timing t4, subsequent step S52 interrupt permission setting is prohibited, and the execution timing of step S52 interrupt permission setting is delayed compared to normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the special symbol and special electric accessory control of step S114 Processing, normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing in step S116, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. In other words, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is in a state (confirmation display state) in which it is possible to confirm and display the setting value, but the first start gate 2002, the second start gate 2004, and the big winning gate 2005 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the gate section 2003, the input of the detection signal is not validated, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the second start opening This is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the big winning opening door 2413, the sorting operation of the sorting piece 2415, etc. are not performed.

[13-1. About special symbols, various ball detection, and payout device]
As shown in FIG. 123, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) has not started, A state in which it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 (variation Disabled state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can perform variable display of special symbols (variable state).

It should be noted that after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, in the case of starting the jackpot game at timing t6, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the detection signal Even though the input is valid, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot variably display the special symbol (unvariable state B). Thus, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that they are in a state in which it is impossible to variably display the special symbols on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, but the non-variable state In A, the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second The difference is that the input of the detection signal is validated when the game ball B has won the second start port 2004 .

Also, when the power supply is cut off at timing t0, if the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is performing the variable display of the special symbols, or if the variable display of the special symbols is stored as pending. , when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control power-on processing is terminated, and then in step S38, a specific region out of all regions of the main control built-in RAM Since it is cleared except for , information regarding the variable display of special symbols will be lost. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display becomes possible, but the variable display of the special symbols, which was interrupted when the power was cut off, is not resumed. In addition, when the power supply is cut off, the variable display of the special symbols stored as pending is not performed.

Also, in the variable state, a fraud-related error (for example, a serious error during magnetism detection or vibration detection) that makes it impossible to play a game such as a variable display of special symbols due to some fraudulent act occurred. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU performs display processing of fraud-related error information that notifies that fact on a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 1600), or performs a display process of fraud-related error information that notifies that fact, or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of LED 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) to perform light emission processing in a fraud-related error mode that notifies that effect, or to a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) to notify that effect. The fraud-related error output process of outputting the related error sound is performed, but in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display of special symbols cannot be performed ( Although it is in the immutable state A), the fraud-related error output process described above is not performed. It is assumed that the hall clerk opens the body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 to change the setting value in the change permitted state from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is to emphasize the work efficiency of the hall clerk rather than the necessity of the fraud-related error output processing intended to suggest to the hall staff, and to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, all of the above-described fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing are disabled. However, in order to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is exemplified that output processing of a fraud-related error sound that is loud and can reduce the work efficiency of the worker is not performed, while other processing is performed as usual.

In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started, so the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 , the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the like, and when the game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each are controlled by the main controller. There is no input by the MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the game ball B itself may not be detected by the detection sensor, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be treated as invalid even though it is input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, pattern fluctuation (special pattern fluctuation) display), and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed. Even if the ball is entered at 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B is paid out. , the provision of the high-probability state will no longer be performed, and as a result, the game ball B may accidentally enter the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2007 during the normal operation of displaying the set value Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to various winning openings and gates (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , second starting port 2004, big winning port 2005, first receiving port 2007, second receiving port 2008, etc. When game ball B enters various winning ports such as gate portion 2003, detection sensors corresponding to each The main control MPU receives the detection signal of , and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation display of special symbol) , the game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the state is set to "effective state" as the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

In this example, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big prize winning port 2005, and the first receiving port 2007 start from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends. , When the game ball B enters various winning ports such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has passed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid. This is because before the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, making it difficult to actually start the game. Because there is

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 350. , and the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350. - 特許庁That is, it is possible for the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 350 in the change permitted state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. However, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various winning openings and gates (gates) as described above. Therefore, even if the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, or the big winning hole 2005 in the change permission state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

Incidentally, when the power supply is cut off at the timing t0, if the game ball B enters the various winning holes and the game ball B is being paid out from the payout device 350, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while operating, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z is input to the payout control board 633 from the main control board 1310, and the payout control built-in RAM Since the entire area is cleared, the information regarding the payout of the game ball B is lost. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, it becomes possible to pay out the game balls B from the payout device 350, but the game balls B that have not yet been paid out at the time the power is turned off cannot be paid out. It is designed not to restart.

As shown in FIG. 124, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) is not started, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 are displayed variably. becomes a state in which it is impossible to change (unchangeable state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can perform variable display of special symbols (variable state).

It should be noted that after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, in the case of starting the jackpot game at timing t6, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the detection signal Even though the input is valid, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot variably display the special symbols (unvariable state B). Thus, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that they are states in which the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot variably display the special symbols, but the non-variable state In A, the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second The difference is that the input of the detection signal is validated when the game ball B has won the second start port 2004 .

Also, when the power supply is cut off at timing t0, if the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is performing the variable display of the special symbols, or if the variable display of the special symbols is stored as pending. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 while operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (when changing the setting value). At this point, the setting change process in step S37 of the main control power-on process is terminated, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that the special symbols fluctuate. While the information about the display is lost, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed), the timing When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at t4, the set value confirmation display processing of step S28 of the main control power-on processing is completed, but the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed as after the setting change processing of step S37. Since the process of step S38 for clearing is not executed except for the specific area, the information regarding the variable display of the special symbol is retained. For this reason, after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display of the special symbols, which was interrupted when the power was cut off, is resumed when the variable state becomes possible. In addition, when the power supply is cut off, the variable display of the special symbols stored as pending is performed.

Also, as described above, in the variable state, some fraudulent act is performed and it is impossible to play games such as variable display of special symbols. If an error occurs, the peripheral control MPU performs processing for displaying illegality-related error information that notifies that effect on a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 1600), or performs a display process on a predetermined light emitting device. (For example, a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.), light emission processing of a fraud-related error mode that notifies that effect, or a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) A fraud-related error output process for outputting a fraud-related error sound notifying that is performed. , Although it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (variable state A), the fraud-related error output process described above is not performed. In the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and performs confirmation display of the setting value. This is to emphasize the work efficiency of the hall clerk rather than the necessity of the fraud-related error output processing intended to suggest to the hall staff, and to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, all of the above-described fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing are disabled. However, in order to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is exemplified that output processing of a fraud-related error sound that is loud and can reduce the work efficiency of the worker is not performed, while other processing is performed as usual. In addition, in order not to perform fraud-related error output processing, there is a prohibition processing according to the difference between the control performed in the above-mentioned change permission state and the event that hinders the work of the hall clerk. You may make it differ in the kind, number, etc. of . For example, in the change permission state, if any fraud-related error occurs, all fraud-related error output processing is not performed, while in the confirmation display state, if some fraud-related error occurs, output the fraud-related error Only a part of the processing is not performed, or in the change permission state, all fraud-related error output processing is not performed when some fraud-related error occurs, while in the confirmation display state Then, when some fraud-related error occurs, a part of the fraud-related error output processing can be prevented from being performed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started, so the first start port 2002, when the game ball B enters various prize winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate section 2003, detection sensors corresponding to each of them. The detection signal from the main control MPU is not input, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the game ball B itself may not be detected by the detection sensor, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be treated as invalid even though it is input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, pattern fluctuation (special pattern fluctuation) display) and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed, and as a result, the game ball B will not be placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the ball is entered at 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when invalidating the detection of the game ball B, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B is paid out. , the provision of the high-probability state will no longer be performed, and as a result, the game ball B may accidentally enter the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2007 during the normal operation of displaying the set value Even if the ball enters the second receiving slot 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not receive detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to various prize winning openings and gate sections (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B ejected from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B ejected from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h is detected. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , second starting port 2004, big winning port 2005, first receiving port 2007, second receiving port 2008, etc. When game ball B enters various winning ports such as gate portion 2003, detection sensors corresponding to each The main control MPU inputs the detection signal of , and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation display of special symbol) , the game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the state is set to "effective state" as the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

In this example, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big prize winning port 2005, and the first receiving port 2007 start from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the confirmation display state ends. , When the game ball B enters various winning ports such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has passed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid. This is because before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, and it is difficult to actually start the game. Because there is

Also, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 350. , and the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350. - 特許庁That is, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 350 in the same manner as in the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various prize winning openings and gates (gates) as described above. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, or the big winning hole 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

Incidentally, when the power supply is cut off at the timing t0, if the game ball B enters the various winning holes and the game ball B is being paid out from the payout device 350, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 (when changing the setting of the set value), at that time, the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 RWM clear button 633z operation By inputting a signal (detection signal) and clearing the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM, the information on the payout of the game ball B is lost. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 (when confirmation display of the set value is performed), the process of clearing the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is not executed at that time, so the game ball Information about the payout of B is to be held. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, it becomes possible to pay out the game balls B from the payout device 350, and the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time when the power is turned off. to resume the payment of

In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the setting value 1 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). 6) is displayed, but in the confirmation display state in which game balls B that have not yet been paid out at the time the power is turned off as described above are being paid out, there is a problem such as running out of balls. When a payout-related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies the fact to a display other than the setting display 1310g (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633). Payout-related error output processing that performs display processing of related error information, or performs light emission processing in a payout-related error mode for notifying that to a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of LEDs 121a and a plurality of LEDs 213a) I am trying to do it. As a result, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to determine whether the payout of the game ball B, which has not yet been paid out at the time the power supply is shut off, has been completed, or whether an error related to payout such as a ball running out has occurred and the game ball B has been paid out. It is possible to discriminate whether or not there is a loss, thereby preventing the player from suffering a loss. Regarding payout-related error processing, since it is an important event for the smooth operation of the game later, we decided to focus on payout maintenance regardless of the work efficiency of the hall clerk. We are trying to perform the same processing as normal without setting any restrictions and without any restrictions.

As described above, when the power supply is cut off at the timing t0, if the game ball B has entered the various winning holes and the game ball B is being paid out from the payout device 350, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part (when confirmation display of the set value is performed), at that time, the game balls that have not been paid out when the power is cut off. The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, special symbols (first special symbols) in the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 , second special symbol) is in a state where it is impossible to perform variable display (variable state A), so at the time of shutting off the power supply at timing t0, the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Fluctuation of the special symbol When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z when the display is performed or when the variable display of the special symbol is stored as pending. (When confirming and displaying the setting value), at that time, the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted at the time the power was cut off is resumed, or it is stored as pending at the time the power was cut off. There is no need to perform variable display of special symbols. In other words, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display of the special symbols that was interrupted at the time the power was cut off is resumed, or it is stored as pending at the time the power is cut off. This is a period during which it is possible to pay out only the game balls B that have not been paid out when the power supply is cut off while preventing the progress of the game without performing the variable display of the special symbols. . For example, when the hall is closed, when the power is turned off while the game balls B are entering various winning holes and the game balls B are being paid out from the payout device 350, the power is turned off. However, the player is prevented from progressing after the power is turned off by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 to put it in a confirmation display state. At the same time, it is possible to pay out only the game balls B that have not yet been paid out at the time the power supply is cut off, thereby preventing the loss of the player.

As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the depressing portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Until the setting key is turned off, the variable display of the special symbols is disabled, and the progress of the game after the power is cut off is prevented, while the game balls B that have not yet been paid out at the time the power is cut off. While the period is such that only the payout can be performed, the confirmation display of the setting value may not be performed. In addition, an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided. , the variable display of the special symbols is disabled, and only the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time when the hall clerk turns on the operation are put out while preventing the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns the operation on. It may be a period during which it is possible to perform Even in such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, the progress of the game during the period when the operation is turned ON by the hall clerk is prevented, and the game balls B which have not been paid out at the time when the operation is turned ON by the hall clerk are paid out. It is possible to prevent a loss from occurring to the player.

As described above, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 will be in a variable state in which it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols. When the power is turned off, the variable display of the special symbols stored as pending is not performed. Taking this as an opportunity, when the power is cut off, the variable display of the special symbols stored as pending is performed. More specifically, when the ball is entered in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the variable display of the special symbol, the special random number is stored as pending in the main control built-in RAM, but the power supply at the timing t0 If the special random number is stored as pending in the main control internal RAM at the time of shutting down, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control side power failure processing. Then, when the change permission state is entered after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, and when the change permission state ends, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Since the stored game backup information is cleared, the special random numbers stored as pending are also lost.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the special random number stored as pending before the power is turned off is erased, in addition to the pending display on the effect display device 1600, the function display unit 1400 The pending display in the pending number indicator is in a non-display state. In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random numbers are stored as new pending.

By the way, if the special random number stored as pending is not deleted before the power is turned off at the end of the change-permitted state, the following problems will occur. In this example, the higher the set value among the set values 1 to 6, the more the number of big hit determination values set in the big hit determination table so that the probability of the big win increases. When the setting value is changed in the permission state, if the setting value is changed from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. Since the special random number increases and the probability of a big hit increases, the special random number that was out of the set value before the power shutdown may become a big hit in the set value after the change permission state ends. On the other hand, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, when changing from a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) to a low setting value (for example, setting value 1), the result of big hit determination Since the special random numbers that are regarded as big hits decrease and the probability of big hits decreases, the special random numbers that were big hits with the set values before the power was turned off may not be the set values after the change permission state ends. . In this regard, in this example, by erasing the special random number stored as pending at the end of the change-permitted state, the result of the jackpot judgment is changed between before power shutdown and after the end of the change-permitted state. It is possible to prevent an unfair situation from occurring. In particular, when a person other than the hall manager changes the set value in the change-permitted state due to fraudulent activity, he/she tries to change the set value to a higher set value (for example, a set value of 6), but the high set value ( For example, even when the set value is changed to 6), the result of the big win determination is not changed to the big win, and it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. In addition, when the hall manager changes the set value in the change-permitted state, the special random number stored as pending is erased before the power is turned off, so that the player is not disadvantaged. It is preferable to cut off the power supply in the absence of suspension, and then change the set value in the change permission state.

In addition, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, not only when the low setting value (for example, setting value 1) before power shutdown is changed to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), Even when the set value before the power shutdown is maintained, the special random number stored as pending is erased when the change permission state ends. For example, when a person who is not the hall manager changes the set value in the change-permitted state due to fraudulent activity, he tries to change the set value to a higher set value (for example, set value 6), but the power has already been cut off. is the high setting and you may not need to change the high setting. Even in such a case, by erasing the special random numbers stored as pending before the power shutdown at the end of the change permission state, the special random numbers that had a high possibility of winning big with the high setting value before the power shutdown can be erased. Since the chance of judging a big hit is lost, it is possible to deter anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 and the state is shifted to the confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and when the confirmation display state ends, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Since the stored game backup information is not cleared, the special random number stored as pending before the power is cut off is held. In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random numbers are stored as new pending. In such a confirmation display state, only the setting of the setting value is confirmed, and the setting value is not changed unlike the change permission state. In other words, even if a person who is not the hall manager checks the settings of the set values in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent activity, the special random numbers that are stored as pending will not be displayed before the power is turned off and in the confirmation display state. The special random number stored as pending before the power is cut off is retained even after the confirmation display state is terminated, because the result of the jackpot determination is not changed after the termination and no profit is obtained by the fraudulent act. and

Also, if a person other than the hall manager checks the setting of the set values in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent activity, he/she can access the back of the pachinko machine 1 by some means while pretending to play the game normally. If it is predicted that an unauthorized setting confirmation will be performed by doing so, and the setting value that has been incorrectly confirmed is disadvantageous setting content (for example, setting value 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), advantageous setting content ( For example, it is conceivable that the pachinko machine 1 with the set value 6) having the highest jackpot probability is obtained and immediately leaves the seat. In this regard, in this example, when confirming the setting of the setting value in the confirmation display state, the pending state is retained without being erased. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to take a strange action such as leaving the seat afterward, and by monitoring such a strange action, it is possible to make it easier to catch a person who illegally checks the settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized confirmation of settings by anyone other than the hall manager.

In addition, in order to further increase the deterrence of fraud, in the confirmation display state, while holding the special random number stored as pending before the power is turned off, in addition to the pending display on the effect display device 1600, the function display unit The pending display on the pending number display of 1400 is also temporarily hidden, and is displayed as if the special random number stored as pending no longer exists, as in the change permission state. As a result, it is possible to make the fraudulent player misunderstand that the suspension has disappeared, and to give up the continuation of the game after illegally confirming the setting. In order to effectively exert such an effect of deterring fraudulent acts, not only the confirmation display state, but also after the confirmation display state ends, a predetermined return timing (for example, when the body frame 4 is closed or a predetermined time The pending display may be kept in a non-display state until the lapse of time, etc., arrives.

[13-2. About jackpot games and launch devices]
As shown in FIG. 123, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) has not started, A large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 and a distribution piece 2415 for distributing the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 are operated. becomes impossible. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the big winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. As a result, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when the jackpot game is started at timing t6, it is possible to operate the jackpot door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 as the jackpot game. , the game ball B can be entered into the big winning opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that when the power supply is cut off at timing t0, if the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operating during the execution of the jackpot game, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 , The setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed ( (during operation of the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415) will be lost. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it becomes possible to operate the big winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415, but it is interrupted when the power is turned off. The jackpot game being played is not restarted, and the big prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are not operated.

As described above, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started. When the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the start opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate portion 2003, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each. is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B Neither the payout nor the provision of the high-probability state is performed, and as a result, the game ball B is accidentally dropped into the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the like during the regular operation of changing the set value. Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Also, in this example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has passed since the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It may be in a state in which it is possible to This is because before the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, making it difficult to actually start the game. Because there is

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is not started, but firing by the handle 182 in the change permission state Considering that the operation is checked, etc., the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted during that period is set, A game ball B can be shot when a handle 182 is operated. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state is changed. , the state in which the game ball B can be shot continues when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

As shown in FIG. 124, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) is not started, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 are distributed to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. It becomes impossible to operate the sorting piece 2415 . Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. As a result, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when the jackpot game is started at timing t6, it is possible to operate the jackpot door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 as the jackpot game. , the game ball B can be entered into the big winning opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that when the power is cut off at the timing t0, if the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operating during the execution of the jackpot game, the timing is changed while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at t3 (when the setting value is changed), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the setting of step S37 of the main control power-on processing is performed. The change process is terminated, and subsequently, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for the specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed (the operation of the big winning entrance door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 While the information about the middle) is lost, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when performing confirmation display of the setting value), When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the set value confirmation display process of step S28 of the main control power-on process is completed. Since the process of step S38 for clearing is not performed except for the specific area among the areas, the information regarding the execution of the big winning game (during operation of the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415) is held. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 125, after the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, is completed, it is assumed that the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. As a trigger, the jackpot game that has been interrupted when the power is cut off is restarted, and the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. In addition, as will be described later, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for launching the game ball B before restarting the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was turned off at the timing t5. The game ball B can be efficiently entered into the big winning opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after restarting the game.

As described above, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, the first start port 2002, the second When the game ball B enters various prize winning openings such as the starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate portion 2003, a detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each. is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B Neither the payout nor the provision of the high-probability state is carried out, and as a result, the game ball B is accidentally dropped into the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the like during the normal operation of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Also, in this example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the confirmation display state ends, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has passed after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It may be in a state in which it is possible to This is because before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, and it is difficult to actually start the game. Because there is Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the confirmation display state ends, when the big win game interrupted when the power is cut off is restarted, the big win game is restarted. Although it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, by delaying the resumption of the big win game interrupted when the power supply is cut off, the game is delayed before the restart of the big win game. It becomes easy to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, and the game ball B can be efficiently entered into the big winning opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after the big win game is restarted. .

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similar to the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is not started, but confirmation display is performed. Considering that the firing operation by the handle 182 is checked in the state, during that period, the firing permission signal that tells the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow the firing of the game ball B Logic is set so that the game ball B can be shot when the handle 182 is operated. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state is changed. , the state in which the game ball B can be shot continues when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

[13-3. About staging equipment and staging materials]
As shown in FIG. 123, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined It is possible to display images. Then, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display (decorative pattern display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker , a setting change in-progress notification is executed to notify that the setting value is being changed. As for notification during this setting change, a voice repeatedly saying "The setting is being changed", a message "The setting is being changed!"I'm doing it. In addition, the setting change in-progress notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change-permitted state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but when the change is permitted, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and setting change notification are executed in parallel, the setting change notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the setting change notification is completed. A form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the change permission state at timing t4, until a predetermined period of time (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker change the pattern and the jackpot game. A game start notification is executed to notify that the game can be started.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as the above-described setting change notification, in addition to the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, the function display unit 1400 also gives a notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirmation displaying indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting changing indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the change-permitted state, the notification by the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game does not progress.

In addition, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various prizes such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc. When the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate section 2003, even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker may cause various winning ports and gates to be displayed even though it is not a period during which the game should be played in the change-permitted state. A warning effect A is executed to notify that the game ball B is entering the part. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the setting changing notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Also, in the normal time when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed for notifying that the setting key is turned on illegally by means of the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON while the symbol variation is performed normally, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, A warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where pattern variation is not normally performed, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. running C. Also, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the effects being executed are stopped and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the pattern variation is performed. Note that the warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161). This makes it possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. In other words, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is made detectable, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600 are changed. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a screen in stages. Specifically, by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (a volume gauge image representing five levels of adjustment status depending on the length of the long-press, and a light amount gauge image) is displayed, the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1→2→3→4→5→1→2 . . ), and by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time, it is possible to fix the sound volume and the amount of light. However, during the period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed during the symbol change, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the operation of the effect operation unit 160 for the effect. Even if it is operated, it is a prohibition period during which it is not possible to adjust the volume or the amount of light.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (For example, the rendering operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) are being initialized. In other words, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where it is impossible to perform variable display of the special symbols (variable state A), while the main body Initial operations of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the frame 4 and the game board 5 are performed. Each of these production members is a member capable of moving between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operating position. It is decided to perform accurate positioning so that the production members will wait at the initial position. After the end of the change permission state at timing t4, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol The performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, and if the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52, immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to variably display the special symbols on the 1400 special symbol display. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is made without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When a variation pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during pattern variation is transmitted during the initial motion of the performance member, the performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the movement of the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot perform the variable display of the special symbols (non-variable state A ), the initial actions of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are performed, so when the state shifts to the variable state after the end of the change permission state, the initial actions of the production members are completed. It is more likely that As a result, even if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted after the change permission state is ended, the initial operation of the effect member does not affect the change pattern. Based on the variation pattern, the performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position, so that the information obtained from the content of the performance is not missed.

However, the initial actions of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 require a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete. Therefore, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 before the initial operation of the production member is completed, the initialization of the production member Waiting for the completion of the action, it becomes possible to execute the effect using the effect member. In other words, the time to turn off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4 may be before or after the completion of the initial action of the effect member. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 124, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined It is possible to display images. Then, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the pattern display (decorative pattern display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600 and the The output from the lamp and the speaker is used to notify that the confirmation display of the set value is in progress. This notification during the confirmation display consists of a repeated voice saying "Confirmation is being displayed", a message display of "Confirmation is being displayed!" I'm doing it. The notification during confirmation display is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the notification that the main body frame is opened when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during confirmation display is given the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the confirmation display completion notification. A form can also be illustrated. After the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker change the pattern and the jackpot game. A game start notification is executed to notify that the game can be started.

Further, after the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, the jackpot that is interrupted when the power is cut off is triggered by the state in which the big winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. It is possible to resume the game and operate the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415, but as shown in FIG. A jackpot game resumption notification for notifying that the jackpot game interrupted when the power is cut off is restarted and the jackpot door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated is executed by the output from the speaker. In addition, before the restart of the jackpot game, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are waiting for the execution of the jackpot game that has been interrupted when the power is cut off. A big hit game standby notification for notifying that the segment 2415 is in operation standby may be executed. As a result, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B before restarting the jackpot game, and the game can be efficiently moved to the jackpot 2007 or the second reception port 2008 immediately after restarting the jackpot game. Ball B can be entered.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, in addition to the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, as the notification during confirmation display described above, Notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirming display indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the confirmation display state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game will not progress.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various prizes such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc. When the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate section 2003, even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 may cause various winning openings and gates to be displayed even though it is not the period during which the game should be played in the confirmation display state. A warning effect A is executed to notify that the game ball B is entering the part. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the in-confirmation display notification and the body frame open notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the notification during confirmation display or the notification of opening the main body frame.

Also, in the normal time when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed for notifying that the setting key is turned on illegally by means of the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON while the symbol variation is performed normally, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, Warning production B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where pattern variation is not normally performed, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. running C. Also, the warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the effects being executed are stopped and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the pattern variation is performed. Note that the warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161). This makes it possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is made detectable, and the volume output from the speaker and the , the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 can be adjusted in stages. Specifically, by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (a volume gauge image representing five levels of adjustment status depending on the length of the long-press, and a light amount gauge image) is displayed, the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1→2→3→4→5→1→2 . . ), and by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time, it is possible to fix the sound volume and the amount of light. However, during the period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed during the symbol change, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the operation of the effect operation unit 160 for the effect. Even if it is operated, it is a prohibition period during which it is impossible to adjust the volume or the amount of light.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (For example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) are being initialized. In other words, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the special symbols on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be variably displayed (non-variable While being in the state A), the initial operation of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) is performed. Such production members are members that can each move between an initial position and an operating position. In the initial operation of the production members, the production members are sequentially or simultaneously operated in a predetermined operation pattern. By operating it, it is possible to confirm whether the production member moves normally from the initial position to the operating position, and to perform accurate positioning so that the production member waits at the initial position. After the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol At a predetermined timing during fluctuation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, and if the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52, immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to variably display the special symbols on the 1400 special symbol display device. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is made without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When a variation pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during pattern variation is transmitted during the initial motion of the performance member, the performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the movement of the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot perform the variable display of the special symbols (non-variable state A ), the initial actions of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are performed. Therefore, when the transition is made to the variable state after the end of the confirmation display state, the initial actions of the production members are completed. It is more likely that As a result, even if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted after the confirmation display state is ended, the initial operation of the effect member does not affect the performance. Based on the variation pattern, the performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position, so that the information obtained from the content of the performance is not missed.

However, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete the initial actions of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 . Therefore, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 before the initial operation of the production member is completed, the initialization of the production member Waiting for the completion of the action, it becomes possible to execute the effect using the effect member. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at timing t4 either before or after the completion of the initial action of the effect member. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

When the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are respectively equipped with performance members, at least the performance members mounted on the game board 5 are firstly executed and mounted on the main body frame 4.例文帳に追加It is also possible to delay the initial motion of the presenting effect member until "after closing of the body frame 4 at timing t5". This is because the body frame 4 is in an open state during setting change or setting value confirmation display, and the main body is closed by closing operation of the body frame 4 after setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display is completed. An impact is generated on the frame 4 . Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is closed, there is a possibility that the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 may not operate normally or may be displaced from their initial positions. By starting the initial action of the performance member mounted on the body frame 4 after closing the body frame 4, it is possible to cope with such a situation.

It should be noted that after each of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 has been initialized sequentially or simultaneously, if the initial action of each production member is not completed normally (each production member By the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of, if there is a production member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time, or if there is a production member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time. Initialization is performed again. If there is a production component that is not detected at the initial position even at a predetermined time after performing an action or retry operation, etc.), the production using the production component that was not completed normally is executed during the pattern change. We are trying to limit it so that it does not. Here, as described above, if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the pachinko Immediately after turning on the power of the machine 1, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where the special symbol can be variably displayed (variable state), and the initial operation of the production member is performed. . In this example, if the initial action of the production member is not completed normally under such a situation, the player will feel a sense of incongruity that the production member will remain stopped at a position different from the initial position during the variable display of the special symbols. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value is changed and the setting value is confirmed and displayed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a. If not, at a predetermined time after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 (time when it is assumed that each of the presentation members will be positioned at the initial position after the initial action of each presentation member is completed), one of the presentation members is detected at the initial position. When not in use, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

On the other hand, if the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation while the setting value is being changed (change permitted state) or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), the normal setting change or confirmation display is performed. In order to avoid obstruction of the work of (1), even if the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position, the initial position error notification is suppressed so as not to be performed. After the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Regarding the initial position error notification, it is designed to start after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, but it is designed to start in advance from the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation. may In addition, when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation, out of the image, lamp, and speaker output of the effect display device 1600, a notification ( For example, the specification may be such that only the lamp) is executed first.

As a modification of the above, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, special While making it impossible to perform the variable display of symbols and preventing the progress of the game, the performance members (for example, the performance operation part 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are changed. While the initial operation is performed during this period, setting changes of setting values and confirmation display of setting values may not be performed. In addition, an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided. , the variable display of the special symbols is disabled, and the initial action of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed while preventing the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns on the operation. It may be a period of time. Even in such a case, after the hall clerk turns off the operation, even if a variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the pattern change is transmitted, the initial action of the effect member is affected. The performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern without being changed, and the information obtained from the contents of the performance can be prevented from being missed.

As described above, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, that is, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 are adjusted. It is possible to adjust the More specifically, when changing the setting of the set value or confirming the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process, Before the setting change process of step S37 and the set value confirmation display process of step S28 are started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs initialization processing for activating (booting) the drawing control system of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes wait time waiting processing. After completion, various commands can be received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). As described above, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to detect the operation of the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the production display device 1600. It's becoming

In addition, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 are changed at timing t3 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Information about the amount of light is not held, and the state is returned to the initial state (for example, a state in which the sound volume and the amount of light are median values). Therefore, the sound volume and the amount of light after turning on the power change to a state different from the sound volume and the amount of light adjusted before turning off the power.

Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the change permission state and the confirmation display state are terminated. It has shifted to a variable state in which it is possible to perform variable display of symbols. That is, prior to the state in which the player can start the game in the variable state, the volume output from the speaker, the output from the light emitting member such as the lamp and the screen of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to adjust the amount of light. For example, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, there is a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect is set during symbol variation. If it is transmitted, while the pattern is changing, the sound (game sound) is output from the speaker based on the information set in the effect, or the light is emitted from the light emitting member such as the screen of the lamp or the effect display device 1600. However, if such an effect is started before adjusting the amount of light or volume, the volume or amount of light will be output in the initial state, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this example, prior to the player being able to start the game in the variable state, by enabling the adjustment of the volume and the light amount, the player can start the game. The sound volume and the amount of light can be changed from the initial state until the game is started, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable due to the sound volume and the amount of light in the initial state after the player starts the game.

In this example, by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing five levels of adjustment status depending on the time of long-pressing, a volume gauge image, After displaying the light intensity gauge image), the sound volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2 . . . ), and by not operating the effect operation section 160 (pressing operation section 161) for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to fix the sound volume and the amount of light. In the variable state, when the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and the amount of light are changed. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, the volume and the amount of light can be changed. It is set not to output the change sound. This is because it is assumed that the hall manager is changing the set values and displaying the confirmation of the set values in the change permission state and the confirmation display state from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall manager is emphasized rather than the necessity of outputting a change sound that informs that the volume or amount of light has been changed, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. It should be noted that when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, light is output from a light-emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 according to the changed light amount as the light amount is changed. is not an event that hinders the work of the hall manager, so it is not prohibited even in the change permission state or confirmation display state.

Further, in this example, in the variable display state, if an operation to change the volume or the amount of light is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), the adjusted volume or the amount of light is output at that time. It is reflected as soon as possible. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation to change the volume or the amount of light using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). After the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is reflected so as to output the adjusted sound volume or light intensity without reflecting to output the adjusted sound volume or light intensity. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, as will be described in detail later, an alarm is issued to the outside to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. Although it is being executed, the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 that is being executed as such warning notification is not allowed to be the volume and light amount after adjustment, and the sound volume and light amount are fixed. I'm trying As a result, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even if an operation to change the sound volume or the amount of light is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), it is difficult to notice the alert notification being executed. can be prevented from occurring and the fraud monitoring system can be prevented from weakening.

As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, an alarm is issued to the outside so that anyone other than the hall manager will not commit fraud. Even after the end of the permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to extend and execute the warning notification. If the warning notification is to be extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) can be used to adjust the volume or the volume even during the execution of the extended warning notification. It is possible to perform an operation to change the light intensity, but at that time, it is not reflected to output the adjusted sound volume and light intensity, and after the extended warning notification ends, the adjusted sound volume and light intensity It is reflected to output with In other words, the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker during the execution of the warning notification cannot be changed to the volume and light amount after adjustment, and the sound volume and light amount are fixed. . As a result, similarly to the change permission state and the confirmation display state, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is used to adjust the volume and It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to notice an alert notification being executed even if an operation to change the amount of light is performed, and to prevent the fraud monitoring system from being weakened.

In addition, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation to change the sound volume and the light amount using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are ended. , the volume and light intensity after adjustment are reflected in the output. You may reflect it so that it may be output. For example, among the multiple lamps, for the lamps used for warning notifications, when an operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed, the adjusted sound volume and light intensity will be reflected in order to maintain the fraud monitoring system. All or part of the lamps that are not used for alarm notification may be reflected so as to output with the adjusted sound volume or light intensity when an operation to change the sound volume or light intensity is performed.

[13-4. About fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraudulent activity are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, by bringing a magnet closer to the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ), a magnetic sensor 2470 is provided to detect fraudulent activity such as entering a ball. , the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. In addition, shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 vibrates the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to change the path of the game balls B to the game board 5.例文帳に追加By installing vibration sensors that detect fraudulent actions such as entering the ball into the various winning openings and gates provided, the main control MPU determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. A fraudulent action due to vibration is monitored, the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. The monitoring of these fraudulent activities is divided into normal conditions (when setting values are not changed or confirmation display of setting values is performed), and when setting values are changed or confirmation display of setting values is performed. , the mode of monitoring is different.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity with a magnet, the location where the magnetism is generated There is provided one magnetic sensor capable of specifying the front of the game area 5a located on the front side). Normally, the magnetic sensor 2470 generates magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. It monitors whether it has occurred (whether a magnet has approached), and monitors fraudulent behavior such as an attempt to change the setting or display confirmation by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display of the set value. It is monitored whether magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated is generated in the area (whether the magnet is approaching), and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is changed to change the game board. It monitors illegal acts such as entering the ball into the various winning openings and gates provided in 5. In addition, as a fraudulent act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, an illegal metal tool is used in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (inside the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). , a magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent device is installed, and the magnet and the metal fraud are detected through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening created by partially destroying the pachinko machine 1. An act of illegally accessing the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the equipment is conceivable.

It should be noted that when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input in the fraudulent act detection process in step S112, it is determined that an act of fraudulent activity using a magnet is being performed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. is output so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent act is being carried out.

Although not shown, the magnetic sensor 2470 of this example is composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and is a first magnetic detection sensor having a directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. It is now possible to perform magnetic detection within the region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side, which is the opposite side. ing. It should be noted that "vertically sensitive" means that each side has greater sensitivity in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The magnetic sensor 2470 is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body spread in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. includes the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic detection area is the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc. on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and others It is possible to monitor a plurality of points among the main parts of the ball flow path, the other magnetic detection area includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided so that it can be monitored. With such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

Further, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting cheating due to vibration, a vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the sorting piece 2415 inside the big winning hole 2005 provided on the game board 5 is used. A sensor 3004 is provided. And only during the jackpot game of normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor cheating, and the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor cheating except for the jackpot game. This is because, in the jackpot game, the distribution piece 2415 distributes the game ball B received in the big prize winning opening 2005 and circulating inside to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. When vibration is applied to the sorting piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the big winning opening 2005 and enter the game ball B into the second receiving opening 2008. , to prevent such fraud. In other words, during the jackpot game of normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 applies vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not occur to the periphery of the sorting piece 2415 inside the big winning hole 2005. It monitors whether or not the game ball B is caught, and monitors cheating such as changing the course of the game ball B inside the big winning opening 2005 and causing the game ball B to enter the second receiving opening 2008. - 特許庁

It should be noted that when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, it is determined that an act of fraudulent activity is being performed by vibrating around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize winning opening 2005. Deciding. Then, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being carried out around the sorting piece 2415 inside the big winning hole 2005, it is installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer that has been detected so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, the security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration is being performed is the same signal as the security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed. . However, depending on whether the security signal is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration is being performed or when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, a security signal is output. The notification mode is different when the external notification is performed in the fraud-related error processing controlled by the control MPU. That is, when it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by vibration and a security signal is output, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are displayed in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act by vibration. In contrast to the notification by output, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed and a security signal is output, a presentation is displayed in a manner corresponding to fraudulent activity using a magnet. It is possible to distinguish which fraudulent act is being performed by notifying by the image of the device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

Next, the monitoring of fraudulent actions during setting change or confirmation display of setting values will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. FIG. 126 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of the set value, and FIG. 127 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during confirmation display of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 126, during the change permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 is not executed. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized operator who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting switching button. This is because there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the setting of the magnet to perform an illegal act using the magnet. In addition, even if the authorized operator who changes the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the obstruction of regular setting change work.

Further, during the change permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting switching button. This is because there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who makes the change to commit fraudulent acts using vibration. In addition, even if the authorized operator who changes the settings applies vibration when changing the setting values, it is possible to prevent detection as fraudulent action due to vibration, and to prevent the unauthorized setting change work from being detected. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Also, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, thereby setting the set value. A change can be made (change permission state), but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state starts, the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side. In addition to this, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 In response, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. In other words, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. This security signal is generated when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2470 in a state in which fraudulent activity using a magnet is monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470, and it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed using vibration, In the state where the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor fraud due to vibration, when a detection signal is input from the vibration sensor 3005 and it is determined that fraud due to vibration is being performed, the hall computer It is the same signal as the output signal. However, in the change permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. , by outputting a security signal to the hall computer even in a state where such fraudulent activity is not monitored, the pachinko machine 1 is warned to be monitored through the hall computer, and the set value is set normally. The hall clerk can be made to know through the hall computer that the setting of is being changed. In other words, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer whether the set values have been changed by a person who commits fraudulent acts through the hall computer. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU outputs the second security signal, and the second security signal completes the setting change of the setting value. can be grasped by the hall clerk through the hall computer.

As for the security signal, it is sufficient that it is output to the hole computer only for a time that the hole computer can recognize, and the time from timing t3 to timing t3' is short (for example, less than 1 second). It may be for a long time (for example, 10 seconds or longer). However, if the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, At timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, that is, when the change permission state ends, there is a possibility that the change permission state has not ended. In other words, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before timing t3' at which the output of the first security signal ends arrives. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, if the output of the first security signal has not ended, the first security signal is not output. After the output of the signal is finished, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second). In other words, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the output of the first security signal is completed. As a result, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, even if the output of the first security signal has not ended, the hall computer can reliably output the security signal twice.

As another example in which the above-described predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be done. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, if the output of the first security signal has not ended, a new security signal is generated from that time point. (the timer that counts the signal output time is set again), and the first security signal and the second security signal may be output in a continuous manner. In this case, the security signal is output for a long period of time exceeding a predetermined maximum output time (output time of the first security signal). The hall clerk can be made aware of the completion of the setting change through the output of the security signal over a long period of time. In addition, depending on the environment of the game hall, etc., if it is not necessary for the hall clerk to know through the hall computer that the setting change has been completed using the security signal output mode, based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch, etc. It may be possible to cancel without outputting the second security signal itself.

As shown in FIG. 127, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the magnetic sensor 2470 is not used to monitor unauthorized actions. This is because, in the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values is illegally using a magnet. This is because there is no room for Also, when confirming and displaying the setting value, even if the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the regular confirmation display work.

Further, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display to commit fraudulent acts by vibration. because there is no In addition, even if the authorized operator who carries out the confirmation display of the setting value applies vibration when displaying the setting value, it is possible to prevent detection as an illegal act due to the vibration, thereby preventing the confirmation display work from being performed properly. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. The confirmation display is possible (confirmation display state), but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state starts, the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. A main control MPU outputs a security signal to a hall computer installed on the game hall side via the main control MPU. On the other hand, at the end of the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is While the control MPU outputs a security signal, at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the signal is sent to the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU is not outputting a security signal to the installed hall computer. In other words, when changing the set value, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer. will be output only once. As a result, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. By outputting a security signal to the hall computer even though such fraudulent activity is not being monitored, the pachinko machine 1 is warned to be monitored through the hall computer and set to be legal. The hall clerk can be made to know through the hall computer that the confirmation display of the value is being performed. In other words, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer whether the confirmation display of the set value is not performed by the person who commits the fraudulent act through the hall computer. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the main control MPU does not output the second security signal as in the change permission state. It is possible to distinguish which of the confirmation display of .

In addition, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed and a security signal is output to the hall computer, the peripheral control is performed based on the transmission of the monitoring result from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. As external notification in error-related processing controlled by the MPU, notification is performed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. When a security signal is output to the hall computer at the time of setting confirmation (confirmation display state), no information related to the monitoring results to the peripheral control MPU is transmitted, and an error-related error controlled by the peripheral control MPU is prevented. As an external notification in the processing, no notification is performed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. This also makes it possible not to hinder normal setting change and confirmation display work.

As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the setting Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are used to monitor fraudulent activity, while setting values are neither changed nor displayed for confirmation. You may do so. In addition, an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided. It may be a period during which monitoring of fraudulent activity using is not performed. Even in such a case, even if the regular operator who performs the inspection work brings the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 or applies vibration, it will be detected as a fraudulent act due to the magnet or vibration. It is possible to prevent this, and suppress the obstruction of regular inspection work. In addition, at least at the start of the period in which the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, the security signal is output to the hall computer as at the start of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. Thus, it is possible to warn the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer that the pachinko machine 1 will be monitored, and let the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the inspection work is being carried out normally.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by magnets, the location where magnetism is generated 5) is provided, but a plurality of magnetic sensors may be provided, for example, in front of the game board 5. In front of the game area 5a located and around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5, each magnetic sensor may detect the generation of magnetism. In such a configuration, similar to the above-described configuration in which one magnetic sensor 2470 is provided, during normal times, a plurality of magnetic sensors are used to monitor fraudulent activity. , it may be possible not to monitor fraudulent activity using multiple magnetic sensors, but in the change permission state and confirmation display state, some of the multiple magnetic sensors (for example, setting change It is also possible to monitor fraudulent activity using only the substrate 1311 and the magnetic sensor provided around the setting key switch 1311a.

Similarly, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting cheating by vibration, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors may be provided. Vibration sensors around the ball entrances other than 2005 and around the setting change board 13111 and the setting key switches 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 may detect the occurrence of vibration. In such a configuration, during normal times, fraudulent activity is monitored using a plurality of vibration sensors (however, the vibration sensors provided around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning opening 2005 are Only during the jackpot game), in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it may not be possible to monitor cheating using a plurality of vibration sensors, but in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, Fraudulent activity monitoring may be performed using only some of the plurality of vibration sensors (for example, vibration sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a).

In addition, fraudulent activity using magnets or vibration may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the change permission state or confirmation display status ends (immediately after fraudulent activity monitoring is started). There is a concern that the fraud monitoring system may be weakened due to the inability to output important security signals based on behavior detection. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be done. That is, the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraud is delayed until the second security signal output period in the change permission state and the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state have passed. It can be exemplified that the timings of outputting the security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity do not overlap. Specifically, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, although the monitoring of fraudulent activity is started immediately, the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the first security signal in the confirmation display state If there is an opportunity to output a new security signal (detection of fraudulent activity) within the output period of , the previously output security signal is output without discarding the output of the new security signal. The output information of the new security signal may be stored and held until the is completed, and the new security signal may be output with a delay from the original output timing. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraud is not discarded and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. As another example, the timing of starting fraud monitoring itself may be extended until the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state ends. may be According to such an embodiment as well, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent activity is not discarded, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the fraud monitoring system is weakened.

[14. About command transmission processing]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the body frame 4, Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls game operations (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310 . Specifically, at a predetermined timing, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 stores information about the control of game effects and information about the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM (storing commands). By sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 also receives information on the control of game effects and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1. can grasp. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when changing the settings of the set values or confirming and displaying the setting values, the information on the control of the game effect and the information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 are stored in the main control built-in RAM as various commands. , only some of the commands are immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 during execution of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the rest of the commands are sent to the change permission state or the confirmation display state. After completion, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

First, the command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128(A) is a time chart showing command transmission timing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is normally turned on (when the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed), and FIG. 128(B). 4 is a time chart showing command transmission timings when changing setting values or displaying setting values for confirmation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, at least the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, and the game ball B enters various winning ports and the gate section 2003. It is assumed that the main control MPU receives the detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors when the ball enters the ball.

As shown in FIG. 128, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Then, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, as described in the above [Behavior of pachinko machine when power is turned on], the processing of steps S10 to S24 of the main control side power-on processing is executed, and timing When ty arrives, it is determined which combination of the values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG and the values of the setting key ON flags CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S37 to set the setting permission state. Further, when the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control built-in RAM After initializing, set it to a variable state. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S27, a predetermined set value display permission is given. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the set value confirmation display process of step S28 to enter the confirmation display state. Further, when the main control MPU determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control built-in RAM Make variable state possible without initializing . It should be noted that the variable state, as described above, by starting the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessories control processing of step S114) by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, function display This is a state in which it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display device of the unit 1400 .

As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) activates the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. Since the initialization process for booting has been completed, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received after timing ty.

As shown in FIG. 128(A), the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at timing t3, and it is assumed that the power is normally turned on. In this case, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing t3 as well, from timing ty, the main control built-in RAM is initialized in step S38, and then the variable state is set. On the other hand, if the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at timing t3, from timing ty, the main control built-in RAM is set to a variable state without being initialized in step S38. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control built-in RAM. is set, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately.

For example, when the main body frame 4 is open at the timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door open command specifying that the main body frame 4 is open in the command buffer, and the door is opened. When the hour command is set, it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door open time command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), and until timing t5 at which the body frame 4 is closed, the effect display device is displayed. The door open notification is executed to notify that the body frame 4 is open by means of the image of 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The notification when the door is opened consists of repeating a voice saying "The door is being opened", displaying the message "The door is being opened!", and emitting a lamp with a brightness higher than normal. In this way, when the body frame 4 is open, the hall manager can immediately grasp that the body frame 4 is open by executing the door open notification to the outside. During the opening of 4, the monitoring system can be strengthened so as to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts.

As shown in FIG. 128(B), the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing t3, and when changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation of the setting value, RWM When the pressing operation part of the clear button 633z is operated, from the timing ty, the change permission state is set so that the setting value can be changed, and at the timing t3, the pressing operation of the RWM clear button 633z is performed. If the part is not operated, a confirmation display state in which confirmation display of the setting value can be performed is made from the timing ty. In the change permission state, the change permission state ends at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. make it possible. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the confirmation display state is terminated, and from the timing t4, the main control built-in RAM is changed without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. make it possible.

In the change permission state and the confirmation display state described above, the main control MPU sets information regarding the control of the game effect and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. , the storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set differs depending on the type of the command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, a first storage area (first command buffer) and a second storage area (second command buffer) are used as storage areas (command buffers) of the main control built-in RAM. When a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. On the other hand, when a command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is sent to The command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off without immediately transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510. At timing t4, the second command buffer , is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, commands that need to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately are set in the first command buffer, while the change permission state and the confirmation display state are set in the second command buffer at timing t4. A command that needs to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 after ending the confirmation display state is set.

Except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer, and stores them in the first command buffer. When a command is set, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, commands are set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer. A command is set only in the first command buffer so that it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . However, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first command buffer and the second command buffer are not divided, and when a command is set in the undivided command buffer, the command is immediately executed. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

First, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the commands set in the second command buffer include, as commands related to fraud monitoring, a command when the door is opened to specify that the main body frame 4 is open, and various prize openings. (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, etc.) and when the game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the input of the detection signal is set to an invalid period, but the detection itself (abnormal ball entry) ) can be used to specify that there was an abnormal ball entry command. Specifically, the command when the door is opened is set in the second command buffer when the body frame 4 is open at the timing ty when the change permission state or the confirmation display state starts, and the second command When the door open command is set in the buffer, the door open command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. , the door open command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Also, the abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer when game ball B is detected (abnormal ball entry) in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4. When the command for abnormal ball entry is set in the second command buffer, the command for abnormal ball entry set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. , at timing t4, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

Then, the peripheral control MPU receives a command for opening the door from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. executes a door opening time notification for notifying that the body frame 4 is open by means of an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, and an output from a speaker. The notification when the door is opened consists of repeating a voice saying "The door is being opened", displaying the message "The door is being opened!", and emitting a lamp with a brightness higher than normal. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and thereby controls the image, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period from timing t4. , an abnormal ball entry notification is executed to notify that an abnormal ball entry has occurred in various prize winning openings or the gate section 2003 by the output from . This notification of abnormal ball entry is performed by repeating a voice saying "abnormal ball entry", displaying a message "abnormal ball entry!" In this manner, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the main body frame 4 is open and whether or not there is an abnormal ball entry in the various prize winning openings and the gate portion 2003, and the change permission state and the confirmation display are performed. After the end of the display state, by executing a door opening notification and an abnormal ball entry notification to the outside, it is possible to confirm that the body frame 4 is open and that an abnormal ball entry has occurred in the various prize-winning openings and the gate section 2003. The hall manager can grasp what happened. After the change permission state and the confirmation display state are ended, it is possible to simultaneously execute the notification when the door is opened and the notification when the ball is abnormally entered. notification) may be preferentially executed.

As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as the door opening command and the abnormal prize winning command, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Without transmission, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It is designed to be transmitted to the control board 1510 . As a result, when changing setting values or checking and displaying setting values, it is possible to prevent the execution of door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification due to unauthorized detection unintended by the hall manager. can suppress the inhibition of

On the other hand, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the commands set in the first command buffer include, as commands related to settings, a setting change command specifying that the change permission state is started, and a confirmation display state start time. A setting confirmation command specifying that it is time, a setting change completion command specifying that it is time to end the change permission state, a setting value confirmation display completion command that specifies that it is time to end the confirmation display state, etc. . Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the setting confirmation command is set at timing ty when the confirmation display state starts. , is set in the first command buffer, and any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4 when the change permission state ends, and the setting value confirmation display completion command is set at timing t4 when the confirmation display state ends. At this point, the first command buffer is set and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set.

When the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU waits until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. During the period, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to issue a warning notification corresponding to the type of command. In other words, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are periods from timing ty to timing t4, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to issue a warning notification corresponding to the type of command. . The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command is to repeat the voice "Settings are being changed", display the message "Settings are being changed!" and In addition, as an alarm notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, there is a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed", a message "Settings are being confirmed!" (light emission mode different from the lamp light emission in the corresponding color) is executed during the change of setting. In this way, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the hall manager can confirm that the setting value can be changed and the setting value can be confirmed and displayed by executing the warning notification to the outside. This can be grasped immediately, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that anyone other than the hall manager does not commit fraudulent acts in the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

As described above, commands related to settings, such as setting change commands and setting confirmation commands, are set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set command is executed. It is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510 . In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, even if the main body frame 4 is open or an abnormal ball is entered in the various prize winning openings or the gate portion 2003, the door opening notification is continued until after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. Because it delays the execution of the abnormal ball entry notification, it is not a normal fraud monitoring system, but prior to the command set in the second command buffer, the setting change command, setting confirmation command, etc. By transmitting a command (specific command for warning) related to the setting of , to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system is strengthened so that anyone other than the hall manager does not commit fraud even in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. be able to.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, it executes warning notification corresponding to the command type. In the change permission state, it is possible to change the settings of the set values. However, by executing an alert notification corresponding to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately determine whether or not the monitoring system needs to be strengthened.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door open command or an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, it executes a door open notification or an abnormal ball entry notification. However, in these notifications, not only are predetermined message contents notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, lamps, and output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as "beep beep" is added to the sound from the speaker. Output (“The door is open, Beep, Beep, The door is open, etc.”) and execute it with a combination of “message + warning sound”. On the other hand, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, an alert notification corresponding to the command type is executed. In the notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but as for the sound output from the speaker, the warning sound is not output, and only the voice is used. ing. As a result, even if a warning effect corresponding to the type of command is executed when changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, Appeals can be suppressed, and interference with regular work can be suppressed.

[14-1. Timing of sending game information commands]
In the above-described embodiment, when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), in step S34, various information is read out from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to this various information is generated by the main control. By setting in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the RAM and sequentially transmitting the set game information commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side also grasps the information regarding the game before the power is cut off. be able to. As a result, after the end of the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the current game state, the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was cut off, the number of reservations stored when the power was cut off, and the like. By grasping by the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU restores the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the effect by the output from the speaker, for example, the fluctuation of the decoration pattern that was interrupted when the power was cut off. The display can be resumed, and the display of the number of pending items stored at the time the power was turned off can be resumed.

In this regard, the game information command is processed in the second command buffer at the start of the confirmation display state (timing ty), not at the end of the confirmation display state (timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). , and when the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. However, the game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t4. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when such game backup information is transmitted as the game information command will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing a modification of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 130(A) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when the RWM clear button 633z depressing operation portion and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated). 130(B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In this example, a case is described in which the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game backup information is transmitted as a game information command. When the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on to initialize the main control built-in RAM or to change the setting of the setting value, in step S38, the specified area of the main control built-in RAM Since the area is cleared except for the area, the game backup information is lost, and the game backup information is not transmitted as a game information command.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the main control power-on processing of this example, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to When it is determined that the value is not 0, first, steps S29 to S36 are performed. Among the processes of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read out from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to the various information is set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. there is After the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that there is, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). That is, the process of step S32 is performed before performing the set value confirmation display process of step S28, various information is read out from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to the various information is transmitted to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. (command buffer). Further, when the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed after the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is performed, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29 and the checksum value (sum value) in step S30 are set. The restart of the game will be delayed by the time to determine whether or not it matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). , By performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 before performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time until the game is restarted after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is shortened. will be able to

As shown in FIG. 130(A), when the power is normally turned on, that is, when the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at timing t3, at timing ty From this point on, the changeable state is set without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. At the timing ty when such a variable state starts, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and immediately after setting the game information command It will be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, the peripheral control MPU quickly restores the effect (the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker) at the time when the power is cut off at the timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state. be able to.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the effect member (for example, effect operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) is performed. That is, from the timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state, the initial operation of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. It is done. Each of these effect members is a member capable of moving between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial action of the effect member, the effect member operates normally from the initial position toward the operating position. It is decided to perform accurate positioning so that the production members will wait at the initial position. Thereby, even if the production member is in a position shifted from the initial position at the timing ty when the variable state is started, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial action, When the performance member does not return to the initial position by one initial action, the performance member is kept on standby at a position deviated from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the performance member to the initial position several times. can be prevented. After the completion of the initial motion of the effect member, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, a predetermined value during symbol variation At the timing of , the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

As shown in FIG. 130(B), when confirming and displaying the set value, that is, at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If not, the confirmation display state is set to allow confirmation display of the setting value from the timing ty. In the confirmation display state, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the confirmation display state is terminated, and from the timing t4, the main control built-in RAM is changed without initialization of step S38. make it possible. In such a case, at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer, and stores the game information command in the second command buffer. is set, the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the game set in the second command buffer is set until the timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. The information command is held, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can restore the effect (the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker) at the time when the power supply is cut off at the timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state. can.

As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, and the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held, and at timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer is peripherally controlled. It is designed to be transmitted to the substrate 1510 . As a result, when confirming and displaying the setting value, the production (image of the production display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker) at the time when the power is cut off is prevented from being restored, and regular work is prevented. can be suppressed. In addition, since the game backup information has already been set in the second command buffer as a game information command at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 Even if noise occurs and the game backup information is destroyed, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

The setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, and the set setting confirmation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the effect member (for example, effect operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the initial operation of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. is being done. Each of these effect members is a member capable of moving between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial action of the effect member, the effect member operates normally from the initial position toward the operating position. It is decided to perform accurate positioning so that the production members will wait at the initial position. Thus, even if the production member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation, When the performance member does not return to the initial position by one initial action, the performance member is kept on standby at a position deviated from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the performance member to the initial position several times. can be prevented. After the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, a predetermined value during symbol variation At the timing of , the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

As described above, after the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, while it is possible to transmit the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the period from timing ty to timing t4 In the confirmation display state, the variation pattern is not transmitted. Therefore, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the effect member does not operate by transmitting a variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the pattern variation. It cannot be determined whether or not it is not operating due to a failure of the production member. In this regard, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial stage of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is displayed. By performing the action, it is possible to inform the outside that ``the performance member is normal but the situation is not associated with the game'', and it is possible to determine that the performance member is not out of order. In this example, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed, but this operation is performed to inform that the effect member is not out of order. For example, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, only a provisional movement of the effect member is performed separately from the initial movement, and after the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends. , the initial motion of the production member may be performed. Note that the temporary motion of the effect member may be a motion different from the initial motion, or may be the same motion as the initial motion.

When changing the setting value, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the set setting change command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510 . are sending to Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 in the same way as when the setting confirmation command is received. The initial operation of the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) is performed. In this way, even in the change permission state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, as in the confirmation display state, the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of By performing the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210), it is possible to inform the outside that ``the production member is normal, but it is not associated with the game,'' and that the production member is not out of order. can be discriminated.

[14-2. Regarding the extension of the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state]
In the above-described embodiment, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, an alarm corresponding to the type of command is issued by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Although it is being executed, the warning notification may be extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. A case in which the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. 131 . FIG. 131 is a time chart showing a case where the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

As shown in FIG. 131, the details have been described above, but at the start of the change permission state at timing ty, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer, and at the end of the confirmation display state at timing ty, the first command A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. When the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU waits until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. During the period, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to issue a warning notification corresponding to the type of command.

When the change permission state ends at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state starts at timing t4, the setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. Any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and thereby receives a predetermined time (for example, During the period until timing t4' after 30 seconds) has passed, the warning notification that is being executed from the time of timing ty is continuously executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. there is In other words, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the warning notification corresponding to the command type is executed. The warning notification is extended for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) from t4 to timing t4'. The extension of the alert notification is terminated by setting extension termination conditions of the alert notification and satisfying the set extension termination conditions. Specifically, when the extended period of warning notification ends in a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer section, and the timer section measures the predetermined time. and ends when the time expires. As another example, when the extended period of warning notification ends with a predetermined number of voice notifications (for example, a loop of five message voices), the predetermined number of times is set in a specific counting unit, and the counting is performed. The unit may start counting a predetermined number of times and end when the number of times expires.

As described above, when the change permission state and the confirmation display state are executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also the timing t4' after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the timing t4. Until then, the warning announcement has been extended. For example, in the case of executing the warning notification only when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, in a short time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the timing ty which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the period for executing the warning notification, is shortened. If the confirmation is displayed, the hall manager may not notice it. In particular, when confirming and displaying setting values, there is no need to change the setting values. people may not notice. On the other hand, if the warning notification is to be extended and executed even after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, a short time (for example, 1 2 seconds), the period from timing t4 to timing t4' is ensured as the time for executing the warning notification. Therefore, even if someone other than the hall manager illegally changes the settings of the set values or displays the confirmation display of the set values in a short time, the hall manager can easily notice it, and it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. The monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent

In addition, as described above in detail, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, an alert corresponding to the type of command is displayed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. running notifications. The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command is to repeat the voice "Settings are being changed", display the message "Settings are being changed!" and In addition, as a warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, the voice "Setting confirmation is in progress", the message "Setting confirmation in progress!" I'm doing it. In addition, if the warning notification is to be extended after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the content of the warning notification message during the change permission state or confirmation display state may be maintained. The content of the message may be different from the state and the confirmation display state. For example, in the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the message content different from the message content during the change permission state or confirmation display state is "The setting change is completed" or "The setting confirmation is completed." It may be configured to loop and output a message such as As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the hall manager to notice not only the countermeasures against the above-described fraudulent act, but also when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends normally. In addition, when maintaining the message content of the warning notification during the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is necessary to prevent the temporary interruption of the warning at t4, which is the timing of switching from the time of extension of the warning notification. good too. For example, at least the voice output from the speaker of the warning notification executed corresponding to the command type in the change permission state or the confirmation display state is continuously output until the voice is completed so as not to end halfway. As for the sound in the extended warning notification, it can be exemplified that after the sound of the continuously output warning notification is completed, the sound is re-executed from the beginning of the sound.

As for warning notification, predetermined message contents are notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is used to notify when the door is opened or when an abnormal ball is entered. Warning sounds such as "beep beep" that are output as are not output, and are executed only by voice. In addition, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are periods from timing ty to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is in a non-variable state in which it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols. On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 will be in a variable state in which it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols. For example, by transmitting a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various effects sounds are output from the speaker. In this regard, even if the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, there is no warning sound output from the speaker as a warning notification, so there is a finite number of options for outputting sound. A situation in which there is no vacancy (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels when assigning to the finitely provided channels for outputting various effects sounds. can be avoided as much as possible.

Further, in the case of extending and executing the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command or abnormal ball entry from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. Although the time command is received, the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are not executed at timing t4, and the door is opened from timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification. Time notification and abnormal entry time notification are performed. That is, when the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the extended warning notification is executed with priority over the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification. As a result, even if someone other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or displays the confirmation display of the setting value in a short time, the extended warning notification is given priority, so that the hall manager can It is easy to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that anyone other than the hall manager does not commit fraudulent acts. In addition, regarding the notification suspected of serious fraud (for example, notification at the time of abnormal ball entry), it is during the execution of the extended warning notification, not at the timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification. may be executed at timing t4.

As for the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification, not only is the predetermined message content notified by the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as "beep beep" is emitted from the speaker. is output and executed with a combination of "message + warning sound". The door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are continuously output while the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are being executed, but are configured to be output only for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). may be However, in this example, since the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are executed from the timing t4', which is the end time of the extended warning notification, for example, the extension time of the warning notification (timing period from t4 to timing t4') is longer than or equal to the output time (for example, 10 seconds) of the door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification, the door open notification or abnormal The notification at the time of entering the ball will not be output. In view of the problem caused by this decrease in notification frequency, if the extension time of warning notification (period from timing t4 to timing t4') is longer than or equal to the output time of warning sound (for example, 10 seconds) Alternatively, the door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification may be output only for the remaining time after the warning notification extension time out of the output time of the door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification. . Further, it may be configured such that the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are newly started after the extension time of the warning notification.

Further, when extending the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the door opening notification is executed from the timing t4' when the extended warning notification ends. , when the timing t5 at which the body frame 4 is closed comes earlier than the timing t4', the notification when the door is opened is not executed. In other words, when the body frame 4 is closed during execution of the extended warning notification, the door opening notification is not executed. However, if the body frame 4 is closed during execution of the extended warning notification and the body frame 4 is opened again before timing t4', the extended warning notification is terminated and the door open notification is performed. Running. Normally, the main body frame 4 is only closed after the setting value is changed or the setting value is displayed for confirmation, and the main body frame 4 is not opened again. If an incomprehensible situation arises in which the main body frame 4 is opened again immediately after changing the setting or displaying the confirmation of the set value, the door opening notification consisting of a combination of "message + warning sound" will be changed to warning notification. By giving priority to execution, the hall manager can easily notice that the main frame 4 is open due to the occurrence of an incomprehensible situation where there is a suspicion of fraud, etc., and the situation where the main frame 4 is open will continue. The monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent

In addition, as described above in detail, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, even though the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are not used to monitor fraudulent activity, On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, fraudulent activity monitoring is executed using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 (however, the fraudulent activity monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 is , only during jackpot games). When it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by magnets or vibrations, fraudulent reporting is carried out as an external report by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or an output from a speaker. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the fraud notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, by prioritizing fraud alerts such as magnets and vibrations that are suspected of being serious frauds over extended warning alerts, the hall manager can easily notice them, and it is possible for anyone other than the hall manager to commit fraud. The monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent

In addition, in the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The image of the device 1600 may be configured not to be output. In such a configuration in which a part of a plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker) is used to issue a warning notification, the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In this case, it is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as an extended warning notification, but is output as an extended warning notification if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by a magnet or vibration. The fraud notification may be executed only by the image of the effect display device 1600 that is not used (by notification using only the unused notification members among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when extending and executing the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to make the hall manager aware of the fraudulent notification suspected of fraud without canceling the extended warning notification. can. Similarly, regarding the door opening notification and the abnormal winning notification, only the image of the effect display device 1600 that is not output as the warning notification during extension (only the unused notification member out of the plurality of notification members is used) Depending on the notification used), the notification at the time of opening the door or the notification at the time of abnormal winning may be executed.

Also, in this example, the warning notification is extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, but only after the end of the confirmation display state. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, when changing setting values, the main control built-in RAM is initialized after the end of the change permission state (in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area). However, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since timing t4. In the period until timing t4' arrives, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are configured to execute the RAM clear notification to notify that the RAM is cleared instead of the extension of the warning notification. may be As a result, after the end of the change permission state, the hall manager can grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

[14-3. Regarding the case where the initial action of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state]
In the above-described embodiment, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of Although the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210) is performed, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. With reference to FIG. 132, the case where the effect member is initialized after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends will be described. FIG. 132 is a time chart showing a case where the initial action of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the change permission state ends at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the setting value is confirmed in the first command buffer. A display completion command is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 by receiving a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. The initial operation of the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) is started. In other words, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, the change permission state and the confirmation display state do not perform the initial action of the production member. is designed to perform the initial operation of

The production members described above include the production operation unit 160 and a plurality of rotary decorations 3210 as members each capable of moving between the initial position and the operating position. In the initial motion of such a performance member, a return process for performing accurate positioning so that the performance member stands by at the initial position and confirmation of whether the performance member operates normally from the initial position toward the operating position are performed. Confirmation processing and are executed in order. For example, if the effect member is in operation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the effect member will stop at a position deviated from the initial position, and even when the power is turned on after that, the effect member will not be initialized. It is out of position. In this respect, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at timing t4 when the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, even if the performance member is shifted from the initial position, the return processing is performed. By doing so, the production member can be returned to the initial position, and if the production member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for returning the production member to the initial position is repeated several times. , the production member can be prevented from waiting at a position deviated from the initial position. Further, in the confirmation process, after the performance member moves from the initial position to the operation position, it is operated to return from the operation position to the initial position, so that it can be confirmed whether the performance member operates normally. In addition, if the production member does not return to the initial position even after repeating the return process several times, or if the production member does not move normally to the operating position or the initial position in the confirmation process, the production member is abnormal. The occurrence of is notified to the outside. After the completion of the initial motion of the effect member, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, a predetermined At the timing of , the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

Further, the effect member includes a light guide plate 3110 capable of decorating the first pattern and the second pattern with light by irradiating light. In the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light. In other words, in the confirmation process, the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to decorate the first pattern and the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to decorate the light guide plate 3110 with the second pattern are repeated several times. , it can be confirmed whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light. It should be noted that the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 and the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 are performed in parallel from the timing t4 when the change permission state and the confirmation display state end. I have to. Then, after the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 is finished, it is possible to execute the effect using the light guide plate 3110. - 特許庁For example, as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which the effect using the light guide plate 3110 is set during the pattern variation is transmitted, during the pattern variation At a predetermined timing, the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with the first pattern and the second pattern.

As described above, in this example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, are set without performing the initial operation of the effect member. Only the setting change of the value and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed. For example, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, if the initial action of the effect member is performed, the setting value change or setting value change is performed at the time of confirmation work at the factory. At the same time as confirming whether the confirmation display functions normally, it is necessary to confirm whether the presentation member operates normally by the initial operation of the presentation member, and it is difficult for the person who performs confirmation work at the factory to confirm. . However, after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, by performing the initial action of the effect member, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, have the set value Only the setting change and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at timing t4, it is possible to only confirm whether the presentation member operates normally by the initial operation of the presentation member. It is possible to increase the certainty of confirmation because it is not necessary for the person who performs the confirmation work in the factory to confirm at the same time.

In the above description, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed. However, apart from the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command, the initial operation command for performing the initial operation of the effect member was received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. At this time, an initial motion of the effect member may be performed. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4 when the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, and is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the initial operation command is set. and On the other hand, the initial operation command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty when the change permission state or confirmation display state starts, and the set initial operation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation command set in the second command buffer is retained until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held at timing t4. may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In such a case, even though the initial operation command is set at the timing ty when the change permission state or the confirmation display state starts, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, The initial action of the effect member can be delayed, and the initial action of the effect member can be performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends.

Further, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but also the period from the timing t4 to the timing t4' after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed. When the warning notification is extended and executed, the extension time of the warning notification is set so as to be longer than the time during which the initial motion of the performance member is performed. In other words, the initial action of the effect member performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended before the warning notification extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended. . As described above, after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 shifts to a variable state in which the special symbols can be variably displayed, and the player starts the game. Although it is possible to do so, during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are executed, and the external warning is increased. and For this reason, the period during which the warning notification is extended makes the player hesitate to start playing the game, and is not actually a period during which the player tries to start the game. In this regard, by ending the initial action of the production member during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, the extended warning notification is finished, and when the player tries to start the game. , the initial action of the production member has already been completed. For this reason, after the termination of the warning notification extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member. , it is possible not to miss the information obtained from the content of the presentation. In addition, during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, in order to encourage the player not to start playing, the content of the extended warning notification is changed to "Please wait a little longer before starting the game". It may be executed in a mode including a special message prompting the player to wait for the game.

In addition, when performing the initial action of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, if the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, or if the effect member does not return to the initial position in the confirmation process If the operation position or the initial position does not operate normally, the image of the production display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the production member. running notifications. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the accessory abnormality notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, by prioritizing the accessory abnormality notification over the extended warning notification, the hall manager can easily notice and easily confirm whether the production members operate normally.

In addition, in the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The image of the device 1600 may be configured not to be output. In such a configuration in which a part of a plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamps, speakers) is used to issue a warning notification, the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In this case, the image of the production display device 1600 is not output as an extended warning notification, but if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the production member, an effect is not output as an extended warning notification. The accessory abnormality notification may be executed only by the image of the display device 1600 (by notification using only unused notification members among the plurality of notification members). Thus, in the case of extending and executing the alert notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be made aware of the accessory abnormality alert without canceling the extended alert alert.

In addition, in this example, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as the initial operation of the production member, the return processing for performing accurate positioning so that the production member waits at the initial position, and the production member is operated from the initial position. Confirmation processing for confirming whether or not it operates normally toward the position is sequentially executed, but the return processing may be executed first in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In other words, from the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing ty, only the return processing of the initial actions of the effect member is executed, and after the change permission state or confirmation display state at timing t4, the effect member The confirmation process may be executed in the initial operation of . Here, regarding the return processing, if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return processing, the return processing for returning the effect member to the initial position is repeated several times, so a long time is required. may become. In this regard, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, by executing the restoration process in advance, even if the restoration process requires a long time, the change There is no influence on the time until the confirmation process as the initial operation of the performance member is completed after the end of the permission state or the confirmation display state. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial action of the effect member can be completed relatively quickly, and thereafter the effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern can be executed.

Further, in this example, even if the transition to either the change permission state or the confirmation display state occurs at timing ty, after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the initial action of the effect member is performed. However, when shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial action of the effect member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. That is, in the case of shifting to the change permission state, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the initial action of the effect member is performed. The initial action of the presentation member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state at ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, the setting value is not changed unlike the change permission state, and only the setting confirmation of the setting value is performed. Therefore, the confirmation display state can be terminated in a relatively short time. is possible. In this regard, when shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial action of the production member is performed in advance in the confirmation display state, so that the initial action of the production member is completed before the confirmation display state ends. can be made Therefore, after the end of the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute the production using the production member based on the variation pattern, and the initial operation of the production member is completed while the confirmation display state is ended in a relatively short time. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult for a player to start a game because the game is not played.

[14-4. Modified example of fraud monitoring]
In the above-described embodiment, the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is used as a location where magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the game board 5). A single magnetic sensor is provided that can identify the area in front of the game area 5a located in front of the game board 5. In front of the game area 5a and around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5, each magnetic sensor may detect the generation of magnetism. In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, fraudulent acts using only some of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, the magnetic sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a). monitoring may be performed. A modified example of the monitoring of fraudulent activity during such setting change or confirmation display of setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 133 . FIG. 133 is a time chart showing a modified example of the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values or confirmation display of setting values.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is used. A magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. In normal times, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In other words, normally, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a detects magnetism that should not be generated (such It monitors whether a magnetic field has been generated (whether a magnet is approaching), and monitors fraudulent actions such as attempts to change settings or display confirmation by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display. Examples of fraudulent acts against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using magnets include, for example, illegal metal implements and their A magnet for indirectly manipulating the illegal metal implement is installed, and the magnet and the illegal metal implement are driven through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening formed by partially destroying the pachinko machine 1. An act of illegally accessing the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is conceivable. It should be noted that when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a in the fraudulent act detection process in step S112, an act of fraudulent act using a magnet is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. has been determined to be carried out.

Similarly, during normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In other words, normally, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated in the area in front of the game area 5a is generated (whether a magnet approaches). Also, it monitors cheating such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and causing the ball to enter various winning openings or gates provided on the game board 5.例文帳に追加It should be noted that when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor 2470b in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, it is determined that an act of fraud using a magnet is being performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. is doing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity using magnets. Sensors 2470a, 2470b may have identical performance. That is, the two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, although illustration is omitted, and the first magnetic sensor 2470a and 2470b has directivity with strong sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. Magnetic detection within the magnetic detection region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side opposite to the magnetic detection region. It has become. It should be noted that "vertically sensitive" means that each side has greater sensitivity in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The game area magnetic sensor 2470b is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body spread horizontally or vertically when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. , a wide range of the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., and other main parts of the ball flow path, etc. location) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a is configured such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body are spread in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and One magnetic detection area is arranged so as to include the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

As shown in FIG. 133, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. is not executed, the game area section magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. This is because, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who changes the setting values or confirms and displays the setting values on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 operates the setting key switch 1311a. While there is no room for anyone other than such a legitimate worker to commit fraudulent acts using a magnet, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is positioned so that it cannot be visually recognized by a legitimate worker. This is because there is a possibility that a person other than such a regular worker may commit fraudulent acts using magnets. In addition, if the regular operator who changes the settings of the set values and displays the confirmation of the set values has something that can generate magnetism, the play area magnetic sensor 2470b may detect the generation of magnetism. is low, setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is likely to detect the generation of magnetism, but setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet. Therefore, it is possible to suppress obstruction of regular setting change and confirmation display work.

Further, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, that is, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, when the authorized operator who changes the setting value and displays the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the pachinko machine. This is because the vibration may be transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 although it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . In other words, even if an authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values or confirms and displays the set values applies vibration, the vibration sensor 3005 is prevented from detecting the occurrence of vibration as a fraudulent act due to vibration. setting change and hindrance of confirmation display work can be suppressed. In addition, in this example, only during the jackpot game of the normal time, the monitoring of cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 is executed. Not only that, but even in the variable state, the vibration sensor 3005 may be used to monitor fraudulent activity. Then, even when monitoring fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 in the variable state or during the jackpot game, the change permission state and the confirmation display state before shifting to the variable state , the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraud. In other words, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity related to magnetism. Vibration fraud monitoring is not performed.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a and the game area section magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided. It may be possible to detect only the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located at . In such a configuration, as in the above-described two magnetic sensors, the magnetic sensor 2470b on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is used not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state. It monitors fraudulent activity in a predetermined area. Also, instead of one magnetic sensor, a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b. You may monitor. For example, a plurality of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, normal winning opening 2003, and large winning opening 2005 on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and other main parts of the ball flow path On the other hand, it is possible to detect the generation of magnetism so that each magnetic sensor among the plurality of magnetic sensors corresponds to each other, thereby monitoring fraudulent activity. In such a configuration, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, all of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are used to control the entire area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. We monitor fraudulent activity. However, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, only a part of the magnetic sensors among the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are used, and an important area (for example, , the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening 2005, etc.) may be monitored.

Also, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism, a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 I believe that fraudulent activity has taken place. In addition, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism, at that time, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the magnetic field. is set in the second command buffer, and when the command at the time of magnetism generation is set in the second command buffer, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Until then, the magnetism generation command set in the second command buffer is held, and the magnetism generation command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a magnetism generation time command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, so that the images, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 are displayed for a predetermined period from timing t4. , a magnetism generation notification is executed to notify that the generation of magnetism has been detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 . This notification at the time of magnetism generation is performed by repeating a voice saying "abnormal magnetism detection", displaying a message "abnormal magnetism detection!", and emitting lamp with brightness higher than normal. Thus, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the generation of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, , by executing a magnetic detection notification to the outside, the pachinko hall manager can notify that the body frame 4 is open and that the generation of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. can grasp. It should be noted that after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is possible to simultaneously execute the above-described door opening notification and abnormal ball entry notification, but the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism. If this is the case, serious fraud may be suspected, and the notification at the time of magnetism generation may be preferentially executed.

As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as magnetism generation commands, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, in the same way as the above-described door opening command and abnormal winning command. Without immediately transmitting the set command to the peripheral control board 1510, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. The command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, even if the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet when changing the setting of the set value or displaying the confirmation of the set value, the magnetism generation time notification is executed. It is possible to prevent this and suppress the obstruction of regular work.

In the above, when the game area portion magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is changed without executing the magnetic generation time notification at that time. Although the magnetism generation notification is executed after the end, it may be executed prior to the period of the change permission state or the confirmation display state as long as the notification does not interfere with the regular work. . For example, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the occurrence of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU ) side, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the notification by the output from the speaker are delayed, while the output from the speaker is not performed, but only the error display is performed on the 7 segments provided on the payout control board 633. For example, the control board 1310 (main control MPU) side executes simple notification without delay.

In addition, in this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but only in the confirmation display state, It is also possible to use the game area magnetic sensor 2470b to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 . In other words, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform confirmation display of the setting value by short-term work, so the possibility that the play area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism due to a regular worker is low. While the monitoring of fraudulent activity in the predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is strengthened using the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, in the change permission state, the setting value will be changed by long-term work. , there is a high possibility that the game area magnetic sensor 2470b will detect the generation of magnetism due to a regular worker, and the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible not to monitor fraudulent activity with respect to a predetermined area on the surface side of the .

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. The main control board 1310 has a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. 68 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as a wiring for extracting an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test device for testing the pachinko machine 1. It is ready.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector 1310k is mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which is the rear surface side.

In this way, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institute, or when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall Even if it is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to , the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the surface side of the main control board 1310 will not be formed as an empty area. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of main control board 1310 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310' of FIG. 66(a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. . These electronic components are a ZIP type main control MPU included in the lead type of FIG. An SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 shown in FIG. 66(a) is used as an electronic component, and is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

The main control board 1310' has a parts list area 1310xb' in FIG. 66(a) as an information area. This parts list area 1310xb' can describe identifiers of surface mount type electronic parts and corresponding information. Examples of information written in the parts list area 1310xb' include names of manufacturers of surface mount electronic parts (including abbreviations and symbols), product numbers of surface mount electronic parts, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(a), in the parts list area 1310xb', there is a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned. is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number and the size of the part number are larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black) as A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog). The product number (the number listed in the catalog) and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black).

In this way, even if the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310′ is difficult to visually recognize, information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) are displayed in a parts list area 1310xb' provided on the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface-mount type electronic component can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is accommodated in a main control board box 1320 of FIG. 68 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. It is

As described above, main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z, which are holes having a shape smaller than the shape of surface mount type electronic components. is removed from the main control board 1310 and replaced with an illegal electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the vent hole 1301z, which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as the winning probability control circuit, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 is provided as the setting device. ing. The main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by external operation.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot symbol A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated so that the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be switched. The setting key switch 1311a is set to the initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed in 1311ab (for example, at a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening 1311aba is along the vertical direction). When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees to turn it on, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on. It is possible.

The main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are mounted on different substrates and electrically connected.

In this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are mounted on different boards, respectively, so that the force associated with the external operation of the setting key switches 1311a can be applied to the setting key switches. 1311a is mounted to the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. This can contribute to preventing the bending of the main control board 1310 that is applied. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing bending of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 22 on which the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22, on which the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 are mounted as a setting device, is a lead-type electronic component. It is an insertion mounting component mounting board on which only insertion mounting components can be mounted. In this way, the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted is a board capable of mounting surface-mounted components (SMD type), and the setting key switches 1311a are mounted to change settings. The board 1311 can be an insertion mount component mounting board on which only insertion mount components (of the SMD type) can be mounted. As a result, the stripping load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the soldered part of the insertion mounting component (lead type) on the soldered surface of the board can be reduced compared to the surface mounting component (SMD type). As a result, it is possible to strengthen the peeling of the solder portion.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 22 as a surface-mounted component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 shown in FIG. 22 as an insertion-mounted component mounting board are transparent boards. Each of them is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 in FIG. 68 as a case. The transparent main control board box 1320 is sealed by the caulking portion 1303 shown in FIG. 68 using its exterior as a sealing device. A connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 22 as a winning probability control circuit on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as an insertion mount component mounting board, and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 is provided as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a in FIG. 22 as a setting device. . The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. In this way, the main control board 1310, which is a board on which surface-mounted components can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311, which is a board on which insertion-mounted components are mounted, can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the caulking portion 1303. Therefore, it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310, which is a board on which surface-mounted components can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311, which is a board on which insertion-mounted components are mounted.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 as a connector provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 is electrically connected to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. It is Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected by a special connector having a floating mechanism. A special connector with this floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug. By inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it in, the socket and the plug are mated. By moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction (for example, vertical direction) perpendicular to the direction of insertion and pushing in, it is possible to absorb an error (fitting shaft misalignment) that occurs when pushing in.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as the game control board, and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22 is provided as the setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310, is electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and can change the setting value in which the probability of being advantageous to the player is set. A setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 22 is provided as a lead-type electronic component.

The lead-type setting key switch 1311a is such that a setting key for changing setting values is inserted and removed. While the setting change board 1311 may flex as the setting key is inserted into or removed from the lead type setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 does not flex.

In this way, since the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is provided on the setting change board 1311 which is separate from the main control board 1310, the operation of inserting/removing the setting key that can change the setting value ( operation), even if the setting change board 1311 is bent, the main control board 1310 is not bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending when the lead type setting key switch 1311a is operated.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable on the outer frame 2 of FIG. 2 and the game board 5 of FIG. It has a structured front frame. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 21 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. The initial position is set at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba formed in the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311a (for example, at a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). The key switch 1311a is turned off, and when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees and turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. It is designed to be able to

A setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 .

Specifically, the outer frame 2 is configured by an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 to form a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. are coaxially rotatably supported so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in front view. The left side of the body frame 4 in the front view in the up-down direction where the hinge assembly 52 is arranged is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, and the right side in the up-down direction in the front view of the body frame 4 opposite to this side is the side of the body frame 4. It becomes the open side of the body frame 4 . That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the body frame 4 that constitutes the front frame.

As described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 on the rear surface of the game board 5. If the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is to be illicitly altered, the front frame must be opened, and the illicit act must be carried out in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Become a prominent presence. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 serves as a cover body pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable on the open side opposite to the pivotal support side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered with the back cover 640, and the front frame The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless the back cover 640 is opened after the . In this way, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered with the rear cover 640 pivotally supported to open and close on the open side opposite to the pivotally supported side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered with the back cover 640, and the back cover 640 is opened after the front frame is opened. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless it is opened.

Specifically, the outer frame 2 is configured by an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 to form a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. are coaxially rotatably supported so that the body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in front view. The left side of the body frame 4 in the front view in the up-down direction where the hinge assembly 52 is arranged is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, and the right side in the up-down direction of the body frame 4 on the opposite side is the side of the body frame 4 in the front view. It becomes the open side of the body frame 4 . That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the body frame 4 that constitutes the front frame. A rear cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. It is a thing. That is, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the rear cover 640 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and a left Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side of the front view is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. , and the left side in front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640 . That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the back cover. The setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting a metal setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. Therefore, in order to access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. FIG. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. FIG.

Therefore, the back cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switches 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated. I have to open the frame. Therefore, if an attempt is made to tamper with the setting key switches 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The cheating can be conspicuous in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 65(a) is provided as a game control board for controlling the progress of the game. On the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 shown in FIG. a) Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be mounted, and the SMD type electronic component (surface mounting) shown in FIG. type electronic component) and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface) 1310x are configured such that wiring patterns and through holes for transmitting control signals are not arranged at all.

In this way, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 as an insertion mounting component and the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 as a surface mounting component can be mounted in a mixed manner. The area in which the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 as a component is mounted can be configured as a circuit non-formation area in which circuits such as wiring patterns and through holes are not formed. As a result, even if the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface-mounted component, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the circuit to the Schmidt-trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface-mounted component, is not formed except for the circuit non-formation area. Therefore, the circuit to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, can be visually observed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on surface mount components.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played. And after operating the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 as the second operation unit, A main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 22 is provided as a setting change means capable of changing the setting value in which the probability of being advantageous to the player is set. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 . In this pachinko machine 1, as a guide means for guiding information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, there is further provided a notation serving as location information capable of conveying the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In this way, since information about the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is guided, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused about the operation procedure. By separately providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the security can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played using game balls as game media. A main control board 1310 of FIG. 22, a setting change board 1311, and a payout control board 633 of FIG. 22, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3, and the main control side power supply of FIG. It consists of the determination of step S14 in the processing at the time of input, the processing of step S16A, and the like. The progress control unit is composed of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 22, the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 87, the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 89, and the like. . The main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, and the payout control board 633 as game control means include the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 22, the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 in FIGS. The setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 22, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. Electronic components related to setting control such as the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 22 and the payout control board 633 in FIG.

In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic parts related to setting control, are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633, respectively. can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played using game balls as game media. 22 main control boards 1310 are provided. The game control consists of the main control side main process in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 87, the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 89, and the like. The game preparation control includes the determination of step S14 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 87 as the first game preparation control, the processing of step S16A, and the like, and the second game preparation control of step S216 in the setting change processing of FIG. and the processing of step S218. The first game preparation control is the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. When the power is restored at the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting is performed. As the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the key cylinder 1311ab clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, If the condition is that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated and the operation signal is input, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 is further included.) Based on the operation It is possible to set a setting change state in which a setting value in which a probability of being advantageous to a player is set can be changed. In the second game preparation control, following the first game preparation control, switching to one of a plurality of set values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 as the second operation unit. is possible. The RWM clear button 633z is arranged on a payout control board 633 which is different from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged.

In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 on different boards, crime prevention can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged are shown as separate board cases. 68 and the dispensing control board box 632 of FIG. By separating the payout control board box 632 housing the payout control board 633 in which the button 633z is arranged, the security can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 68 and the payout control board box 632 of FIG. In order to modify the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 housed in the board box 1320, and the payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632, the crimped portion must be destroyed, leaving traces of alteration. can be left.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game arranged on the back side of the game board 5 in FIG. The setting change board 1311 arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310, and the payout control board 633 where the RWM clear button 633z of FIG. As the frame side, it is arranged in the body frame 4 of FIG. 4 to control the payout, and is housed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case. It can be arranged on the back side of the game board 5 while being accommodated in the main control board box 1320 as a crimping case together with the main control board 1310, and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is used as a crimping case to control the payout. Since it can be placed on the main body frame 4 as the frame side in the state housed in the board box 632, the setting key switch 1311a is separately placed on the game board 5 side, and the RWM clear button 633z is separately placed on the main body frame 4 side as the frame side. By doing so, the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 4 is provided on the front side as a door that can be opened and closed, and the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. The main control board 1310 and the first key (a regular metal key possessed by a staff member such as a game hall clerk) are operated to perform the first operation (when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 , when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 3), the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 in FIG. 1 and the locking unit 360 of the body frame 4 in FIG. , a second key (setting key) different from the first key can be operated to perform a second operation (when changing a setting value, when confirming a currently set setting value). A setting key mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. and a switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting multiple types of winning probabilities (when changing the set value), and is capable of confirming the currently set set value (set value). when checking the current set value). The cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3, and the housing of the cylinder lock 127 is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated.

Specifically, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side that is N (Neutral) of AC 24V. It is In addition, by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the metal frame of the setting key switch 1311a can be formed. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having long long hole shapes extending in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the plate 1311ad can be inserted are formed in the setting change board. It can be in a state of being electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of 1311 . For this reason, as a housing for the setting key switch 1311a, a metal frame plate 1311ad is formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal frame plate 1311ad, a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab. are electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 .

In this way, since the cylindrical metal cylinder body that is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 provided on the front side of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to the ground side, the metal cylindrical cylinder body Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intrudes into the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, by releasing the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) to the ground side, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, does not fluctuate, and As a housing for the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated. In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected to the ground side and are insulated. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) penetrates into the metal frame plate 1311ad in the metal type setting key switch 1311a, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad itself, so that the electronic components are It is possible to prevent the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board to be mounted, from fluctuating. And even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters the metal frame plate 1311ad, this noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is removed by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad. By attenuating by itself, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the ground line of main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

In addition, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While electrically connected to the ground side, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the N (24V AC) supplied to the pachinko machine 1. The metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311ad. is not electrically connected and insulated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the ground side which is the N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While it can be in a state of being electrically connected to a certain ground side, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the metal frame plate 1311ad is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and to the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal outer cylinder 1311aa. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected and insulated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the ground side which is the N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. can be in a state where

Further, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 360 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is set to the outer frame 2). ), the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 enables setting of multiple types of winning probabilities. (when changing the set value), and the current set value can be confirmed (when the current set value is confirmed). As a result, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 360 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is 2), access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a and access the setting value setting possible state (when changing the setting value) or the setting value confirmation possible state (set value is changed). (when checking the current set value), and the security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the door frame 3 in FIG. The main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. a setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with 1310; At least the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, out of the decorative plating, the electrostatic removal pad, and the setting key switch 1311a. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting values, but also to check the current setting values that have been set. limited to 2-3 people.

In this way, when a person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only a limited number of people, including the store manager of the game hall, is permitted to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people), the static elimination unit is touched. , the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge caused by charging the person himself is removed by the static elimination unit, so that the person can set multiple types of winning probabilities. Even if the switch 1311a is operated, it is possible to prevent noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from entering through the setting key switch 1311a. In addition, by arranging at least the setting key switch 1311a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 away from the static elimination unit and the setting key switch 1311a, the effect of the noise removed by the static elimination unit is minimized. It does not reach switch 1311a. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

As a frame body, a front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 4 is provided as a front frame pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. Of the various decorative parts, the front and back surfaces are all plated with decorative plating, and the static elimination pad is provided on the front frame. As a result, a person who can operate the setting key switch 1311a (only a limited number of people, including the store manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people) charges themselves and discharges static electricity. The noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by this can be removed by touching the static elimination unit provided on the front frame.

In addition, of the various decorative parts provided on the door frame 3 as a static elimination part, those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces are the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the N of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1 It is electrically connected to the ground side (neutral). As a result, the frame ground of the pachinko machine 1 or the N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1 is the ground side of the frame ground of the pachinko machine 1, which is decorated with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces of the various decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Since it can be electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a, only a limited number of people (including the store manager of the game hall) are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to 2 to 3 people. ) is charged to itself and the noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge is transferred to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or to the ground side which is the N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1 It can be removed by escaping.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is installed on the island facility of the game hall and has the game board 5 shown in FIG. On the rear side of the game board 5 is a setting key mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. The switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a' in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b) (hereinafter simply referred to as "setting key switch 1311a, 1311a'") and the unconnected wiring from the island equipment of the game hall are set. As a protective member capable of preventing contact with the key switches 1311a and 1311a', it is pivotally supported by the cover body of the drive board box 1730 in FIG. 71 and the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 72(a). a protective cover 1304 which is openable and closable at the bottom, and a cover body of drive board box 1730 in FIG. ing.

Inside the island facility of the game hall, a plurality of types of wiring for electrical connection with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part thereof, depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. There are wiring electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall.

In this way, on the rear side of the game board 5, a cover body of the drive board box 1730 is provided so as to prevent unconnected wires from the island facilities of the game hall from contacting the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a'. Since the protective cover 1304 is provided, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to contact with unconnected wiring. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

71, 72(a) and 72(b) (hereinafter simply referred to as "back cover 640") as a first protective member for covering the rear of the game board 5; As a second protective member protruding rearward from the rear surface of the setting key switches 1311a, 1311a' (the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switches 1311a, 1311a'), the cover body of the drive board box 1730 in FIG. a) A protective cover 1304 pivotally supported by the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320 and freely openable and closable, and a cover body of the drive board box 1730 shown in FIG. Cover body, protective cover 1304"), and the unconnected wiring from the island facility of the game hall is prevented from contacting the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a' by the first protective member and the second protective member. It is designed to be preventable. As a result, the first stage protection of protecting the rear side of the game board 5 by the back cover 640, which is the first protective member, and the rear surface of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a' (setting key cylinders of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a') ) is protected by a protective cover 1304, which is a second protective member projecting rearward from the rear surface (the front surface of the setting key cylinders of the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a'). With the second stage protection and the total two stages of protection, it is possible to prevent unconnected wires from the island facilities of the game hall from contacting the setting key switches 1311a and 1311a'.

Further, on the rear side of the game board 5, there is provided a mounting base to which the setting key switch 1311a' shown in FIG. 72(b) can be mounted. The position of the rear surface of the is set. As a result, based on the length of the setting key switch 1311a' in the front-rear direction (the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the depth direction)), the unconnected wiring from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the setting key switch 1311a'. It is possible to set the position of the rear surface of the mount where the setting key switch 1311a' can be mounted so as to prevent contact. As this mounting base, compared with the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the length of the board holder 1200 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 is shortened. The board holder 1200' may be a board holder 1200', or a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the board holder 1200' so that the outer cylinder 1311aa of the setting key switch 1311a' and the front part of the setting key cylinder 1311ab do not come into contact with the floor of the game hall. In addition to the length in the front-back direction (that is, the depth direction), a recess is formed in the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100 to which the board holder 1200′ is attached, and the depth of this recess (the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1 ( In other words, the length in the depth direction) may be adjusted, or the length in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 by the recess and the substrate holder 1200' may be adjusted.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. a resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 accommodated together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 21 as a key switch whose signal line is electrically connected to an electronic component; A main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 21 is provided as a case body capable of accommodating the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The resin type setting key switch 1311a serves as an insertion port into which a setting key is inserted. 25 as a non-conductive member on which 1311aba is formed, and a resin type setting of FIG. 25 as a conductive member for fixing the resin type setting key switch 1311a. and a metal frame plate 1311ad in the key switch 1311a. The main control board box 1320 in FIG. 21 has an opening corresponding to the insertion port 1311aba formed in the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a. A through hole 1301z is formed in the case body 1301 of the control board box 1320, and the insertion port 1311aba is exposed through the through hole 1301z when the resin type setting key switch 1311a is housed therein. On the other hand, the metal frame plate 1311ad is not exposed through the through hole 1301z.

In this way, when the resin type setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a The insertion port 1311aba of the main control board box 1320 is exposed through a through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, whereas the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is the main control. Since it is not exposed through the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the board box 1320, even if a person charged with static electricity passes through the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 The non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate of the resin type setting key switch 1311a are susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge even when a finger is brought close to the setting key switch 1311a. 1311ad can be prevented, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from fluctuating. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

Further, the main control board box 1320 has a rib part 1301za shown in FIG. In this way, the strength around the through hole 1301z can be increased by the rib portion 1301za. The gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab is increased, or the periphery of the through-hole 1301z is damaged to enlarge the through-hole 1301z, and the through-hole 1301z and the resin type are formed. It is possible to prevent the gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab from becoming large.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. A resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. and has. A non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. It is insulated without being electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the setting key switch 1311a. Further, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated without being connected to the ground side.

Specifically, since the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a has non-conductivity, the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically conductive. They are insulated and not connected to each other. In addition, by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can be formed. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having long long hole shapes along the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad can be inserted. , the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 can be electrically insulated.

Thus, the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and is insulated. Since the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated without being connected to the ground side, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is resistant to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). can prevent fluctuations in the ground line of main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

Also, since the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is made of a metal member that is a conductive member, if the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a Even if (electromagnetic wave noise) intrudes, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a itself. It is possible to prevent the ground line of the control board 1310 from fluctuating.

In addition, since the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is a non-conductive member, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted through the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab. intrusion can be prevented.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. A resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. and has. A metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a of FIG. 25 as a housing of the key device is electrically connected to the ground side, while a cylinder member forming a cylinder of the key device is provided in FIG. The non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is insulated without being electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. there is

Specifically, since the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a has non-conductivity, the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically conductive. It is insulated without being physically connected. In addition, on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, A pair of long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, which are elongated in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the 1311ada can be inserted, are formed on a front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and a back surface (solder surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311. 1311y is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground).

In this manner, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the ground side, whereas the resin setting key cylinder of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically grounded. 1311ab is insulated without being electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. That is, by electrically connecting the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the ground side, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically floating. Therefore, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which electronic components are mounted, should not fluctuate. can do. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

The main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 21 is provided as a case body capable of accommodating the resin type setting key switch 1311a. While a part of the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the plastic type setting key switch 1311a is exposed, the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not exposed. Even if a person charged with static electricity brings his or her finger close to a part of the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a exposed from the main control board box 1320, the resin in the resin type setting key switch 1311a may Since the setting key cylinder 1311ab is insulated from the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge is prevented from affecting the resin type setting key switch 1311a. By preventing intrusion into the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a through the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation of

The resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is provided with a non-conductive material for the resin type setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. An insertion port 1311aba is formed on the front surface of a resin-made setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the main control board box 1320 accommodates the resin type setting key switch 1311a at a portion corresponding to the insertion port 1311aba. As an opening, a through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 of FIG. Since the metal frame plate 1311ad is not exposed through the through hole 1301z, only the insertion opening 1311aba into which a predetermined key (setting key) is inserted can be exposed from the main control board box 1320. The exposed portion of the resin type setting key switch 1311a from the main control board box 1320 can be minimized.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the body frame side relay board KB of FIG. I have it. Terminals of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN are soldered to the copper foil surface adhered to the base material KBo of the body frame side relay board KB in FIG. 77 as the base material of the body frame side relay board KB. A land KTH1 shown in FIG. 77 is formed as a joining portion, and a portion of the land KTH1 has a peeling prevention portion covered with a resist. Specifically, the exfoliation prevention portion may be a state in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1.

In this way, the land KTH1, which is a joint portion, is formed on the copper foil surface bonded to the base material KBo of the body frame side relay board KB, and part of the land KTH1 is coated with a resist to prevent peeling. Since the land KTH1 has the portion, the peeling strength can be increased by the peeling prevention portion coated with the resist so that the land KTH1 does not peel off from the body frame side relay board KB. Therefore, peeling of the copper foil of the body frame side relay board KB due to the load on the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN can be suppressed.

In addition, resist is applied to the copper foil surface of the body frame side relay board KB so that an opening smaller than the copper foil region of the land KTH1 is formed at a position corresponding to the land KTH1, which is a joint portion. It's becoming Regarding the opening smaller than the copper foil area of the land KTH1, specifically, the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB is coated with a resist liquid to form the surface (mounting surface). Although the side resist layer KBxr is formed, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 on the surface (mounting surface) side. A resist opening KBxra is formed. In addition, on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, a resist liquid is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, but the back surface (solder surface) is not formed. A backside (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1, which is the joint portion, can be covered with the resist, so that the high peel strength can be uniformed against loads applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions.

Further, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, which is a connector, is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB by rivets. Since the rivets are plastically deformed by crimping the ends thereof, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN can be maintained fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the board KC shown in FIG. 78 is provided as a board to which the surface mount type connector KCN shown in FIG. 78 is soldered. The housing of the surface-mounted connector KCN is made of resin, and the housing of the surface-mounted connector KCN is provided with a housing fixing portion made of metal. Specifically, the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. The housing fixing portion is soldered to the board KC so as to be electrically connected to the ground of the board KC.

In this way, by soldering the metal housing fixing portion to the resin housing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC, each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. It is possible to strengthen the fixation of the surface mount type connector KCN to the substrate KC compared to the case where it is attached. Therefore, it is possible to suppress peeling of the copper foil of the board KC due to the load applied to the surface mount type connector KCN.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the board KC shown in FIG. 78 is provided as a board to which the casing of the surface mount type connector KCN shown in FIG. 78 is soldered. As the base material of the board KC, the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC in FIG. The housing fixing pads KSPF shown in FIG. 78 are formed as housing fixing joints to which both sides of the housing (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides respectively) are soldered. A part has a peeling prevention portion covered with a resist. Specifically, the detachment suppressing portion may be a state in which the outer periphery of the housing fixing pad KSPF is covered with resist from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. can.

In this way, the housing fixing pads KSPF, which are housing fixing joints, are formed on the copper foil surface KCxp bonded to the base material KCo of the substrate KC. Therefore, the peeling strength can be increased by the peeling prevention portion coated with the resist so that the housing fixing pad KSPF does not peel off from the substrate KC. Therefore, it is possible to suppress peeling of the copper foil of the board KC due to the load applied to the surface mount type connector KCN.

A thermal pattern KCxb in FIG. 78 is applied as a thermal pattern to the housing fixing pad KSPF, which is a housing fixing joint. By means of the thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are soldered to each housing fixing pad KSPF of the board KC. It is possible to prevent the heat that melts the solder from being removed from the outer circumference of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

In addition, a resist solution is applied onto the copper foil surface of the substrate KC so that an opening smaller than the copper foil area of the housing fixing pad KSPF is formed at a position corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF, which is a housing fixing joint. is applied. Regarding the opening smaller than the copper foil area of the housing fixing pad KSPF, specifically, the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is coated with a resist solution to form the surface (mounting surface). Although the side resist layer KCxr is formed, in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, a pad surface (mounting surface side) having the same shape as each pad KSP is provided in a region corresponding to each pad KSP. Side resist openings are formed, and in areas corresponding to the housing fixing pads KSPF, the housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF A resist opening KCxra is formed. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the housing fixing pad KSPF, which is the housing fixing joint, can be covered with the resist. can be uniform.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the board KC shown in FIG. 80 is provided as a board to which the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN shown in FIG. 80 is soldered. The copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC in FIG. The housing fixing pads KSPF of FIG. 80 are respectively formed as housing fixing joints to which the metal housing fixing parts provided in the respective housings) are soldered, and are connected to the housing fixing pads KSPF and are surface mount type. The land KCTH of FIG. 80 is formed as a housing fixed non-joining portion to which both sides of the housing of the connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side respectively) are not soldered, and is part of the land KCTH. is covered with the resist (specifically, the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH). ing.

In this way, the housing fixing pad KSPF of FIG. 80, which is the housing fixing joint portion, and the land KCTH of FIG. At the same time, the substrate KC is formed so that a part of the land KCTH is covered with the resist (that is, the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH). Since the copper foil surface KCxp is coated with the resist liquid, the housing fixing pads KSPF, which are the housing fixing joints, are not removed from the substrate KC. The peeling strength can be increased by the resist covering part of the land KCTH, which is the non-bonding portion fixed to the housing and connected to the pad KSPF. Therefore, it is possible to suppress peeling of the copper foil of the board KC due to the load applied to the surface mount type connector KCN.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN shown in FIG. It has a relay board KB. On the body frame side relay board KB surface to which each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered, silk print on the resist between each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. It has a solder separation portion formed by As the solder separating portion, the horizontal line KSH1, the vertical line KSV1, the area KSA1 surrounded by a rectangular shape, and the like in FIG. 74 can be cited.

In this way, since the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a solder separating portion formed by silk printing on the resist between each terminal PN, the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath. When this is done, the solder needs to flow past the solder separating section, and the solder will try to stay on the resist by the solder separating section, causing a force to separate the solder. ) Solder bridging between terminals PN of the DCN can be suppressed. Therefore, solder bridging can be suppressed.

Also, the solder separation section has a horizontal line KSH1 in FIG. 74 as a first solder separation section in a direction different from the direction in which the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath. As a result, when the body-frame-side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the body-frame-side relay board is placed on the resist of the body-frame-side relay board KB between the terminals PN of the body-frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Since the horizontal line KSH1, which is the first solder separating portion, is printed by silk printing in a direction different from the direction in which the board KB flows into the solder bath, it is necessary for the solder to flow beyond the horizontal line KSH1. By trying to stay in the resist, a force is applied to separate the solder, thereby suppressing solder bridges between the terminals P of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side.

Also, the solder separating portion has a vertical line KSV1 in FIG. 74 as a second solder separating portion in the same direction as the direction in which the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath. As a result, when the body-frame-side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the body-frame-side relay board is placed on the resist of the body-frame-side relay board KB between the terminals PN of the body-frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Since the vertical line KSV1, which is the second solder separating portion, is printed by silk printing in the same direction as the direction in which the board KB flows into the solder bath, the solder flows along the vertical line KSV1 and also on the vertical line KSV1. The vertical line KSV1 tries to keep the solder in the resist and separates the solder, thereby suppressing the solder bridge between the terminals PN of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. be able to.

In addition, the solder separating section surrounds each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side with a region KSA1 surrounded by a rectangular shape as a predetermined figure in FIG. The area KSA1 is solidly coated on the resist except for the portions corresponding to the terminals PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. As a result, each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN is surrounded by an area KSA1 surrounded by a predetermined rectangular shape, and the main body frame side drawer connector in the area KSA1 surrounded by the rectangular shape is surrounded by the area KSA1. Connector (concave type) Except for the portion corresponding to each terminal PN of the DCN, it is solidly printed by silk printing. ) Looking at each terminal PN of the DCN, it becomes a depressed region because it is not printed by silk printing. state. As a result, when the body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and over the small plateau of the region KSA1 surrounded by the silk-printed rectangular shape. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing over the area KSA1 surrounded by the rectangular shape, and the portions corresponding to the terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, which are not printed by silk printing, have a rectangular shape. When the solder flows into this recessed area, the area KSA1 surrounded by a silk-printed rectangular shape becomes a recessed area formed on a small plateau surrounded by By trying to stay without being able to separate the solder, a force of separating the solder acts, so that solder bridges between the terminals PN of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN can be suppressed.

In addition, among the terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the final stage terminal in the direction in which the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath is provided with a different terminal ( Unlike the land KTH1, which is a joint portion to which the land KTH1) to which the solder escape pattern KNP1 is not connected in FIG. It is formed on the copper foil surface. As a result, the solder flowing from the direction of travel can be smoothly flowed backward, so that the occurrence of solder bridges can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 82 is provided as a board on which the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1500 shown in FIG. 82 is provided as a control device in which a base body 1502 is formed of a conductive member and a peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the housing. The peripheral control unit 1500 has a ground path portion and a non-ground path portion. The ground path portion is a path through which the housing of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is a path that is not connected to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1510 (substrate ground).

Specifically, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. ), the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the circuit board by means of metal pan head screws, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND). are configured to be the same ground (GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise entering the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 through the foil extraction region 1510ya to perform peripheral control. A "noise-free route" that cannot penetrate into the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate is formed as a non-ground path portion, and penetrates into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503. Noise can be removed by forming a "noise exit route" through which the noise flows to the ground (GND) of various substrates via the metal pan screws described above as a ground path. there is

In this way, in a state where the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a as an electronic component is mounted is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 in which the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, which are housings, are formed of conductive materials, The noise that enters the housing of the peripheral control unit 1500 passes through the non-ground path portion, ie, the ``noise-removing route'', and the peripheral control board 1510 does not escape through the ground path portion, which is the ``noise-removing route''. Therefore, it is an electronic component mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 by limiting the path through which noise escapes to the "noise escape route", which is the ground path portion. It is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the peripheral control IC 1510a. Therefore, the noise resistance of peripheral control board 1510 can be enhanced.

In addition, the "route without noise", which is a non-ground path portion, includes disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 as rib portions of the base body 1502, which is the housing of the peripheral control unit 1500. 85 as the copper foil peeling area formed in the area that abuts on the peripheral control board 1510, the disconnection prevention rib portion of the base body 1502 that is the housing of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 form the foil removal area 1510ya in the area where the peripheral control board 1510 abuts, noise entering the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, which are the housing of the peripheral control unit 1500, Intrusion into the peripheral control board 1510 through the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 of the base body 1502 can be prevented.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a mackerel machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel. The slot machine will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004, as shown in FIG. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise to open the front door (front frame) 6002 to the main body. It can be opened from the portion (box) 6004 .

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body (box) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking the front door (front frame) 6002 . The metal locking device is attached to a cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) made of metal extending back and forth, a key hole 6005 made of metal formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the regular metal key. The cylinder main body of the metal locking device penetrates from the rear through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal lock unit (not shown) is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit has the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and also functions as a door frame metal ground, and is connected to the main body ( It is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside the box 6004 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island equipment of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. there is This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near or around the metal locking device, and is positioned below the metal locking device and placed on the main body so as not to be affected by electromagnetic wave noise that enters the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 . In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

A front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) are electrically connected). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, when electromagnetic noise that enters the decorative parts with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), the door frame metal ground wire is transferred. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via the ground board, and then transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined location on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, A static elimination pad may be provided as a static elimination unit on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The electrostatic removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

Also, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of them are decorated with decorative plating on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). , and the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power board is supplied with AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 .

In this main control board box 1320, together with the main control board 1310, the above-described setting key switch 1311a (resin type or metal type) capable of changing setting values is mounted. 1311 is also housed. That is, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the body portion (box) 6004. FIG. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004 . On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a described above, a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) are provided. A setting indicator 1310g composed of a single unit, the above-described setting change permission lamp 1310z, and the like may be mounted.

The setting key switch 1311a (resin type or metal type) has substantially the same configuration as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above.

The configuration of the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board box 1320, etc. (including other configurations (modifications)) is substantially the same as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. , and the effect is the same, so a description thereof will be omitted, but an example will be described. As the setting key switches 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a of the resin type has a metal frame plate 1311ad, the setting key switch 1311a of the metal type has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, and the setting key switch 1311a has a metal setting key switch 1311a. Even if it penetrates from the key cylinder 1311ab and the metal frame plate 1311ad, as described above, the foil extraction area of the setting change board 1311 in the copper plane on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 By forming SINSx and SINSy, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted into long slots along the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311. A pair of shaped long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 facing each other are electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. Therefore, electromagnetic noise due to static electricity discharged by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is prevented by the metal frame plate 1311ad and the metal setting key switch 1311a. 1311a can be damped by a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311ad. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311, which is caused by static electricity discharged by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a. , there is no influence on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, and there is no change to the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, the space between the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab is filled with a non-conductive resin (insulating resin) to form a metal setting key cylinder. 1311ab is rotatable with respect to the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, and the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab are not electrically connected but insulated. good too. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the metal frame plate 1311ad and passes through the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface of the setting change board 1311. Intrusion into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 via the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy formed on the (solder surface) 1311y. is damped by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. That is, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy. As a result, the setting change board 1311 can prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from entering from the metal outer cylinder 1311aa. The progress to the substrate ground of the main control substrate 1310, which is the control substrate, can be reliably stopped, and the ground line transmitting the substrate ground (ground) will not be changed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

According to this slot machine 6000, a front door 6002 is provided on the front side as a door that can be opened and closed. The first operation (when opening the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004) can be performed by operating the regular metal key possessed by a staff member such as a store clerk). As a first device, a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a second key (setting key) different from the first key are operated to perform a second operation (set value The main control board box as a second device in which the signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic parts. A setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in 1320 is provided. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting multiple types of winning probabilities (when changing the set value), and is capable of confirming the currently set set value (set value). when checking the current set value). The metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. ing. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground and is insulated.

Specifically, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the locking device made of metal for the front door 6002, is electrically grounded to the frame ground on the door frame side or the N (neutral) of AC 24V. connected to In addition, by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the metal frame of the setting key switch 1311a can be formed. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having long long hole shapes extending in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the plate 1311ad can be inserted are formed in the setting change board. It can be in a state of being electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and back surface (solder surface) 1311y of 1311 . For this reason, as a housing for the setting key switch 1311a, a metal frame plate 1311ad is formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311 in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. The metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal frame plate 1311ad, a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab. are electrically insulated from solid grounds (substrate grounds) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the rear surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 .

In this way, since the housing of the metal locking device provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) occurs in the metal locking device Even if it does intrude, this intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is released to the ground side so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, does not fluctuate, and the front door (front frame) As a housing for the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the 6002, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated. In the setting key switch 1311a, the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected to the ground side and are insulated. In the setting key switch 1311a, even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters the metal frame plate 1311ad, the metal frame plate 1311ad itself attenuates the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise), so that electronic components are mounted. It is possible to prevent the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board, from fluctuating. Even if noise (electromagnetic noise) enters the frame plate 1311ad, the noise (electromagnetic noise) that enters is attenuated by the metal outer cylinder 1311aa, the metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the metal frame plate 1311ad itself. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the ground line of main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

In addition, the metal columnar cylinder main body, which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002, is the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. While electrically connected to the N (neutral) ground side, the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a metal frame plate 1311ad supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the slot machine 6000. The metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa, a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab. A metal frame plate 1311ad is not electrically connected to and insulated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the ground side that is the N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000 . As a result, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the N (neutral) of the AC 24 V supplied to the slot machine 6000. While it can be in a state of being electrically connected to a certain ground side, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the metal frame plate 1311ad supplies the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the slot machine 6000. In addition, the metal type setting key switch 1311a has a metal outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal outer cylinder 1311aa. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected and insulated from the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the ground side which is the N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. can be in a state where

Also, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is locked to the main body (box) 6004 ), the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 enables setting of multiple types of winning probabilities. (when changing the set value), and the current set value can be confirmed (when the current set value is confirmed). As a result, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is changed to the main body (box) 6004), access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a and access the setting value setting possible state (when changing the setting value) or the setting value confirmation possible state (set value is changed). (when checking the current set value), and the security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

Further, according to this slot machine 6000, the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320 is provided as a board on which electronic parts are mounted, and the signal line by operating the setting key as a key is electrically connected to the electronic parts. As key switches to be connected, a resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320, and this resin type setting key switch 1311a can be accommodated. A main control board box 1320 is provided as a simple case body. The resin type setting key switch 1311a has an insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of a non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a as an insertion port into which a setting key is inserted. A non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab as a non-conductive member, and a metal frame plate of the resin type setting key switch 1311a as a conductive member for fixing the resin type setting key switch 1311a. 1311ad and . The main control board box 1320 has an opening corresponding to an insertion port 1311aba formed in a non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. A through hole 1301z is formed in the body 1301, and in a state in which a resin type setting key switch 1311a is accommodated, an insertion port 1311aba is exposed through the through hole 1301z. frame plate 1311ad is not exposed through the through hole 1301z.

In this way, when the resin type setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a has a The insertion port 1311aba of the main control board box 1320 is exposed through a through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, whereas the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is the main control. Since it is not exposed through the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the board box 1320, even if a person charged with static electricity passes through the through hole 1301z formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 The non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate of the resin type setting key switch 1311a are susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge even when a finger is brought close to the setting key switch 1311a. 1311ad can be prevented, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, can be prevented from fluctuating. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

Further, the main control board box 1320 has a rib portion 1301za as a protruding portion along the inner periphery of the through hole 1301z, which protrudes rearward from the back surface of the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. As shown in FIG. In this way, the strength around the through hole 1301z can be increased by the rib portion 1301za. The gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab is increased, or the periphery of the through-hole 1301z is damaged to enlarge the through-hole 1301z, and the through-hole 1301z and the resin type are formed. It is possible to prevent the gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab from becoming large.

According to this slot machine 6000, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted and a signal line by operating a predetermined key (setting key) are electrically and electronically controlled. A resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 as a key device connected to the component is provided. A non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a as a cylinder member in which the cylinder of the key device is formed is a metal member in the resin type setting key switch 1311a as the housing of the key device. is insulated without being electrically connected to the frame plate 1311ad. Further, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated without being connected to the ground side.

Specifically, since the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a has non-conductivity, the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically conductive. It is insulated without being physically connected. In addition, by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, the resin type setting key switch 1311a can be formed. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having long long hole shapes along the horizontal direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the pair of projecting pieces 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad can be inserted. , the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change substrate 1311 can be electrically insulated.

Thus, the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and is insulated. Since the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically insulated without being connected to the ground side, the resin type setting key switch 1311a is resistant to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). can prevent fluctuations in the ground line of main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

Also, since the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is made of a metal member that is a conductive member, if the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a Even if (electromagnetic wave noise) intrudes, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a itself. It is possible to prevent the ground line of the control board 1310 from fluctuating.

In addition, since the non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a is a non-conductive member, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted through the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab. intrusion can be prevented.

According to this slot machine 6000, a main control board 1310 housed in a main control board box 1320 as a board on which electronic components are mounted and a signal line by operating a predetermined key (setting key) are electrically and electronically controlled. A resin type setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in a main control board box 1320 as a key device connected to components. The key switch 1311a has a resin-made frame plate 1311ad for the key switch 1311a. The metal frame plate 1311ad of the key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the ground. A non-conductive resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a and is insulated.

Specifically, since the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a has non-conductivity, the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal frame plate 1311ad are not electrically conductive. It is insulated without being physically connected. In addition, on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311, a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, A pair of long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, which are elongated in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the 1311ada can be inserted, are formed on a front surface (mounting surface) 1311x and a back surface (solder surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311. 1311y is electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground).

In this manner, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the ground side, whereas the resin setting key cylinder of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically grounded. 1311ab is insulated without being electrically connected to the metal frame plate 1311ad in the resin type setting key switch 1311a. That is, by electrically connecting the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a to the ground side, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is electrically floating. Therefore, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which electronic components are mounted, should not fluctuate. can do. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

A main control board box 1320 is provided as a case body capable of accommodating the resin type setting key switch 1311a. While a part of the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed, the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is not exposed. Even if a person approaches a part of the resin setting key cylinder 1311ab in the resin type setting key switch 1311a exposed from the main control board box 1320, the resin setting key switch 1311a cannot be set. Since the key cylinder 1311ab is insulated from the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge is prevented from affecting the resin setting key cylinder of the resin type setting key switch 1311a. 1311ab can be prevented from entering the metal frame plate 1311ad of the resin type setting key switch 1311a. You can choose not to give.

The resin setting key cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a is provided with a non-conductive resin cylinder 1311ab of the resin type setting key switch 1311a as an insertion port into which a predetermined key (setting key) is inserted. The setting key cylinder 1311ab has an insertion opening 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the main control board box 1320 has an opening corresponding to the insertion opening 1311aba in a state in which the resin type setting key switch 1311a is accommodated. A through hole 1301z is formed in the case body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, and the insertion port 1311aba is exposed through the through hole 1301z. is not exposed through the through hole 1301z, so that only the insertion opening 1311aba into which a predetermined key (setting key) is inserted can be exposed from the main control board box 1320. Therefore, resin type setting keys The exposed portion of the switch 1311a from the main control board box 1320 can be minimized.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 100 door frame lower unit 120 bulging portion 123 device placement portion 130 upper plate (storage plate)
131 storage area 131a front area 131b side area 132 bottom wall 133 rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front peripheral wall 135 Supply port 136 Delivery port 137 Alignment portion 138 Storage luminous decorative portion (luminous decorative portion)
138a LEDs
150 door frame production device (production device)
1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board (performance control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (effect control means)
1512 Production display control unit (production control means)
1600 effect display device (effect display means)
3000 back unit 3200 back second effect unit (front decoration)
3210 rotary decoration (pre-decoration)
3228 Back second outer decoration (front decoration)
3229 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3230 Back second inner peripheral decoration (front decoration)
3300 Back third production unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3312 First decoration 3313 Second decoration 3320 Back third upper driving motor (driving motor)
3330 lower unit 3331 lower vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3332 First decoration 3333 Second decoration 3340 Back third lower driving motor (driving motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3352 First decoration 3353 Second decoration 3360 Back third left driving motor (driving motor)
3370 right unit 3371 right horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3372 First decoration 3373 Second decoration 3380 Back third right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a control board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The control board is
A wiring portion that connects a plurality of electronic components is formed,
comprising a front substrate surface and a back substrate surface having the wiring part,
a specific board- to-board connecting portion that avoids obstacles on the front board surface and connects the front board surface and the back board surface in routing wiring that connects electronic components;
and a special board- to-board connection part that connects the front board surface and the back board surface even though there is no obstacle on the front board surface in the routing of the wiring that connects the electronic components. ,
The special substrate surface- to-surface connection portion is provided for wiring between surface-mounted electronic components,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images